JP5935068B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine equipped with a display that displays symbols in a variable manner, such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display based on the lottery result. A game in which symbols are stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time elapses. In this type of gaming machine, a big hit game for controlling opening / closing of the big prize opening is executed when the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display are in a specific display mode, and the game ball enters the big prize opening. By paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, the player can acquire a large number of prize balls (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-54334 A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, if a big hit game is not performed, a monotonous game in which symbols are variably displayed on the display unit is repeated, so that the fresh taste is lost and there is a risk of reducing the gaming interest. .

  In view of the above situation, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest by solving the above-described problems.

In order to solve the above object, a gaming machine of the present invention includes a first display means for displaying first symbol information,
A first lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of the first start condition after the first start condition is established;
When the winning lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the first symbol information is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation period, and then the first lottery means in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. First display control means for stopping and displaying one symbol information;
Second display means for displaying second symbol information;
A second lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the second start condition being satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied;
When the winning lottery is performed by the second lottery means, the second symbol information is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation period, and then the second lottery means in a manner according to the lottery result of the second lottery means. 2nd display control means for stopping and displaying 2 symbol information;
The second graphic displayed by the second display control means as a trigger when the first display control means causes the winning mode to be stopped and displayed as a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. A shortening control means for changing the information fluctuation period to a shortened fluctuation period shorter than normal,
In the case where the first display control means displays the first symbol information in a variable manner and stops the winning mode as a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery unit, at least the first variable period and the first The first symbol information is variably displayed over any one of a plurality of fluctuation periods including a second fluctuation period shorter than the fluctuation period,
The shortening control unit is configured to control the second display control over the first variation period and the second variation period of the first symbol information variably displayed by the first display control unit. The variation period of the second symbol information variably displayed by the means is changed to the shortened variation period.
According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the second display control is performed over the respective fluctuation periods of the first fluctuation period and the second fluctuation period of the first symbol information variably displayed by the first display control means. In order to change the fluctuation period of the second symbol information that is variably displayed by the means to the shortened fluctuation period, the second symbol that is suddenly variably displayed by the second display control means when the variable display is started to stop-display the first symbol information in the winning manner. The variation period of the symbol information is changed to the shortened variation period, which can give the player surprise and surprise, and the first symbol information is expected to change the variation period of the second symbol information to the shortened variation period. It is possible to pay attention to the start of fluctuation display. In addition, when the first symbol information is variably displayed and the winning aspect is stopped and displayed as the aspect corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means, at least the first fluctuation period and the second fluctuation period shorter than the first fluctuation period In order to variably display the first symbol information over any one of a plurality of variation periods including, the variation period of the second symbol information variably displayed by the second display control means is changed to a shortened variation period. The period to be played can be changed according to the fluctuation period of the first symbol information, and by playing the game while paying attention also to the end time of the fluctuation period of the first symbol information, a thrilling feeling of when the end time comes It can be given to the player, and the decline in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was seen from the back. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view at the time of seeing the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism. It is AA sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. (A) is a top view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamper-proof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cuts and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from before. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the game panel of embodiment different from the examples of FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear in FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear in FIG. 110. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in a pachinko machine is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base substrate, a peripheral relay terminal plate, an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal audio | voice signal cutoff board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the power failure generation | occurrence | production of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special control process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol control process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st fluctuation | variation start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the 1st fluctuation | variation of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving function setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol control process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd fluctuation start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd change process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control process of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the gate passage process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol normal process of this embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specification of the 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart explaining the simultaneous variation control of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart shown about the ideal game mode transition in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence about an example of the sub main process of this embodiment performed by the periphery control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 16ms steady process performed every 16 ms in a sub main process. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural view of an attacker device, (B) is a front view showing an enlarged function display unit, and (C) is a front view showing an enlarged 7-segment display. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specification of the 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hit game process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd linkage setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right hand penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right hand penalty notification process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the 1st change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation | variation start process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the forced deviation production | generation addition process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment, (B) is a special symbol fluctuation | variation in the case where an addition deviation notification production | generation effect is set in a forced deviation production addition process. 10 is a timing chart of effect display in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the resumption effect change process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect after resumption in a resumption effect change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the 1st change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the reset setting in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specification of the 1st special symbol and 2nd another symbol of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart shown about the ideal game mode transition in 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table selected in rush preparation mode. It is an example of the timing chart shown about the effect content performed when the start timing of a rush mode is changed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specification of the 1st special symbol and 2nd another symbol of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 4th Embodiment. It is an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table selected by the rush mode of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of 6th Embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front structural member and front unit in the game board of 6th Embodiment in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit in the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked under the side unit in the front unit of 6th Embodiment, and on the side unit from the front, (b) looked under the side unit under 6th Embodiment and the side unit from back. It is a perspective view. It is the perspective view which looked at the center combination of the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center combination of the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right side in the center combination of 6th Embodiment in a cross section. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacker unit vicinity in the center combination of 6th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of 6th Embodiment from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. in the game board of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. of 6th Embodiment from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable effect unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main back direction movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the back bottom back movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main structure and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit of the back bottom back movable production | production effect unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front with the back back back 1st decoration body and the back back back 2nd decoration body. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back with the back lower back 1st decoration body and the back lower back 2nd decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back lower back movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. (A) is a front view of the back bottom movable movable effect unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a back bottom back first decorative body and a back bottom back of the sixth embodiment from the normal state. It is a front view of the state which rotated the two decoration bodies together and turned the 2nd decoration surface of the back 2nd decoration body to the front, (c) is a back bottom 1st decoration body in the state of (b) And it is a front view of the state which moved the back 2nd decorative body to the left side moving end in front view. FIG. 224 (c) shows that the first back of the first back of the back and bottom decorative body is rotated together in the state shown in FIG. It is a front view of a state, and (e) is the state after (d), after rotating a back bottom first decorative body to open a back bottom back first decorative body and a back bottom back second decorative body, It is a front view of the state which turned the 2nd decoration surface of the 1st decoration body, and the 2nd decoration surface of the back bottom 2nd decoration body to the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable production unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable production unit of 6th Embodiment from back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper left movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper left movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows the back upper left movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment in a normal state, (b) is the back upper left 1st decoration body in the back upper left movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment, and It is a front view shown in the state where the back upper left second decorative body is moved to the position of the right end of the front view, (c) is the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second from the state of (b). It is a front view shown in the state where a decoration object was developed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. . (A) is a front view which shows the back left movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment in a normal state, (b) is the state which made the back left movable decoration body in the back left movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment protrude. It is a front view shown by. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main production | generation effect unit in the back of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is an operation product unit in the back inside in the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main structure and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back middle decoration body unit of the back middle movement direction production unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the back middle decoration body unit of 6th Embodiment from back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper inside decorative body unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper middle decorative body unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of the back inside decoration body unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in (a). (A) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 7C is a front view showing the half-opened outer side, and (c) is a state in which the pair of back-side middle decorative bodies of the sixth embodiment is completely opened outward. FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back middle drive unit of the back middle movable production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back middle drive unit of the back middle movement production unit from the back. is there. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back middle drive unit of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the main back drive unit of 6th Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every structure and was seen from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back middle rotation unit of the back middle drive unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front, (b) is the back of the back middle drive unit of 6th Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper middle rotation unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the drive system of the back middle moving effect | production effect unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. (A) is a front view of the back middle movable effect unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a lower upper middle decorative body unit in the back middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is a front view shown in the state. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable production | presentation unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled parts other than a back lower front decoration body unit, and was seen from the front in the back lower front movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled parts other than a back lower front decoration body unit, and was seen from the back, the back lower front movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable production | production unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism in the back bottom front movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the state of the ornament body unit raising / lowering mechanism when raising the back lower front ornament body unit of 6th Embodiment, (b) is a site | part of the unit raising / lowering pin in (a). (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit raising and lowering pins and the raising and lowering slits by further enlarging (b). (A) It is a front view which shows the back lower front movable production | presentation unit of 6th Embodiment in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front decoration body unit from the state of (a). (C) is a front view showing a state where the back lower front first decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b). A state in which the first decorative body after back and the second decorative body after back are rotated together at a normal position and the second decorative surface is directed to the front in the rear back movable movable production unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment It is a front view of the game board shown by. After the back unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment, the first back and back second decorative body of the movable directing unit is closed and the first back surface of the back and back first decorative body faces the front. In the left and right direction in the gaming area, and the upper left first decorative body and the upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable production unit are placed in the horizontal center in the gaming area. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state of sliding. From the state shown in FIG. 253, the first decorative body after the back bottom of the movable production unit after back back is opened by rotating the hinge, and the second decorative surface of each of the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body behind the back is displayed in front. The second upper decorative body of the back upper left first decorative body and the second decorative member of the second upper decorative body of the back upper left decorative body It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing the front. From the state shown in FIG. 253, the first decorative body after the back bottom of the movable production unit after back back is opened by rotating the hinge, and the second decorative surfaces of the first back decorative body and the back back second decorative body are front-facing. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which turned to. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment is slid to the appearance position of the right end in front view. In the back unit of the sixth embodiment, the back top middle decorative body unit of the back top middle movable effect unit is moved to the position of the descending end, and the back top middle decorative body unit is tilted downward in front view so as to extend diagonally. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state rotated in the clockwise direction. 257 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 257 and slid to the half-open intermediate open position. FIG. FIG. 259 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the pair of backside middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and slid to the fully opened position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable production unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment is located at the rising end. FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first backside front decorative body is hinged and raised above the backside front second decorative body from the state of FIG. 260. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment, (b) is about the interruption process regularly performed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the production pre-determination process, and (B) is a table about details of the type of pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in the lottery process for jackpots in the sixth embodiment, (B) is a reach determination table used in the lottery process for reach in the sixth embodiment, (C ) Is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the type of jackpot in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the notice determination processing performed by the periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control process performed by the periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the change production start process performed by the periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the change production end process performed by the periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the production contents of the specific notice production of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the monochrome notice execution process performed by the periphery control MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is the area occupation pattern determination table used in order to determine the area occupation pattern in execution of the monochrome notice effect of 7th Embodiment. It is an example which shows the area | region where a notice effect appears among the display areas of a main liquid crystal display device in execution of the monochrome notice effect of 7th Embodiment. It is an effect example when the monochrome notice effect of 7th Embodiment is performed. It is an effect example when the monochrome notice effect of 7th Embodiment is performed.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 that is operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in terms of the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the horizontal direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 passes through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 passes through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend toward the center of the tip from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b, and the left side frame depending on the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support 644 (see FIG. 70, etc.) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21, and the lower After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support metal 644 (refer to FIG. 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. And a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. (Refer to FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in a front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has mounting boss portions 110g for mounting the speaker brackets 132 for mounting the side speakers 130, and mounting holes 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker covers 338 appropriately positioned. Each is formed.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and includes a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is recessed substantially backward in a triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to perform an illegal act with respect to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is made of a metal that can be drilled with a thin drill or the like from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121 and can prevent an illegal act.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the mounting boss portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction and having an I-shaped cross section as shown in FIGS. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  The wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined binding band in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wire 196 can be held by inserting the wire 198 and tightening the wire 196 together with the wire holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction of closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. Is pushed forward to rotate in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thus, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free end. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that the wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base board cover 195 (in the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems (disconnection of the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

  In addition, according to this example, the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems by reliably folding the wiring 196 in the lateral direction.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric devices are connected to the door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, rental unit 360, as electrical equipment, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 112). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 112), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, The right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted thereon, and the side inner on the lower side A right side lower decorative board 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214. The right side attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214. An upper decorative substrate cover 218, and a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative substrate 216. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 while being disposed at a front surface of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, while being attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end at the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. It is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a plurality extending substantially concentrically with the gaming window 101. A radiating lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower central portion of the game window 101 when viewed from the front, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed backward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  Further, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, a side diffusing lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 can be diffused widely in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a in the side lens 210 is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses at the peak portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffuse and refract light by a wrinkle-like portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. The side inner lens 212 cooperates with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side to glitter the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. As well as letting you see it, you can make it look strange.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are disposed at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively high irradiation. Those having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red and green LEDs in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. As with the side inner lens 212, the front side inner lens 206 also has a front surface formed in a wrinkle shape, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a peak portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. In addition, the light can be irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and arranged on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b that is recessed to the rear of the side lens 210. The side lens 210 thus made can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit with a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the right side is the gaming window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially same width as the right side decoration unit 200 and extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and an oval shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a that are continuous with the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extend in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a large And a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250 An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and having a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 A plurality of bands extending in a radial pattern centered on the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view, and a transparent upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252. The upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffusion part formed by a plurality of band-like lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially centered on the lower left and right centers And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decorative unit 240, a side lower decorative frame 242, a side upper decorative frame 244, a left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right central lower portions of the gaming window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that pass through the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a state of being cut out, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a so that the rear of the side inner lens 252 passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example has a shape extending in the vertical direction along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a substantially triangular shape. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with the side opened. The side upper decoration frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

  The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size that combines the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size that extends from the center to the left side of the left and upper sides of the game window 101. Yes. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is recessed from the rear side, and is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 includes a plurality of slits 251 a that are disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250 a in the side lens 250 and extend along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 as a center. Several are provided. In addition, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  In addition, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Yes. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially centering on the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 on the front surface. The decorative member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonal) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252 a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusers 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are larger than the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) is used.

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the mischief of the left upper speaker 262 or the breaking of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to cause noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side lens 250 including a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms and curved the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is disposed on the rear surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and provided with a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses. (See FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. It is irradiated from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, a part of the light irradiated forward (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to irradiate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. And since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front surface), and a part of the light reflected from the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved, so The light reflected on the rear surface side converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has a direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and a peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersected by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-like lenses in the side inner lens 252. It diffuses in the direction of (substantially orthogonal). Accordingly, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective can be made (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extended frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 having a frame-like lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower part arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283; an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward; and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 A light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 disposed on the rear side of the light shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tube portion 287a are mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of front decoration units 280 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 289. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290, is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear part of the board cover 291 and extends backward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; An upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295; a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295; and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 glitters with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. And an extended frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially are arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the axis of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282 can diffuse light, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses are formed on the rear side, so that light can be irregularly refracted. Is invisible.

  In addition, the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light emission. Furthermore, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decorative board 290 can light up and decorate the upper extended frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately causing the LED 290a to emit light.

[Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along a portion of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in the door frame.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed at the approximate center of the front surface, opened upward and rearward, and has a large left side (axial support side) in front view and bulges forward. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction is projected forward, upper plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314, and upper plate front part The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and is located on the right upper side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  In addition, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the right and left center to the lower surface on the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted thereon. A part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 can be illuminated by decorating the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 as appropriate.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-like lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 to be described later are provided at a portion that covers the lower end front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right side in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower left and right center left sides of the lower plate cover 328. And Shitasara side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Also, the dish unit 300 is disposed at the lower end of the lower dish upper left side cover 332 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 that are obliquely extended to cover the left side front end of the lower dish body 324 and the left front end of the lower dish top plate 326, and the front and rear. A lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that allows the sound to be transmitted by closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and protection A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower pan lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower dish top plate 326 is covered with an upper dish front decorative member 316.

  The dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 are designed. And a side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in a disc shape that is loosely curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and a decoration attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decoration member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c that is formed in a step shape that is further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. Yes.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed with a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side, while the left side is formed in a smooth shape from a position right to the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed on the rear side of the left smoothly formed portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, whereas the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 has a right side of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player side, and it seems that the sense of distance is not fixed.

  The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces whose surfaces are curved in a spindle shape, similar to the right part of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 which will be described later. Further, the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), can diffuse light refractingly, and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Yes. An upper plate decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 is connected to the upper plate decoration board 322. By appropriately emitting light, the upper dish front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 can emit light appropriately.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is made of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic appearance (matte state such as a sandblast treatment instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower dish side cover 330 includes a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the dish unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower dish upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower pan left lower side cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface thereof. It has a plate-like part that forms the part. An opening 334a in the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a lower speaker 821 (low sound speaker) provided in the main body frame 3 to be described later. It can be transmitted to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein. .

  The dish unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower side cover 334, and the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left side cover The bottom surface between the 334 and the 334 is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. The upper plate ball release button 341 is moved up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310. The operation piece 342 is supported so as to be operable (turnable), and the plate unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper dish ball removal slider 343 that is provided on the rear side of the dish unit base 310 and includes an upper dish ball removal slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. A ball passage 344c in which a game ball can roll.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 via the opening 344a and the ball guide channel 344b of the upper plate ball removal base 344. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g through the lower dish ball supply port 310h through the lower dish ball supply rod 310h. Can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is disposed between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left side cover 334 on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 and forms a bottom center part of the dish unit 300. A ball-opening base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 that is pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower-plate ball removal base 351 and can open and close the lower-plate ball removal hole 324 b of the lower plate body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower dish ball removal slide 353 that is slidably supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slide 353. ing.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slide 353. The lower plate ball removal slide 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower plate ball removal slide 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Be able to.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball slide 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slide backward, and the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slide 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slide 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. In addition, the ball rental unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental unit 360 includes a transparent rental unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the remaining rental display unit 363, and a rear rental unit display unit 363 that is disposed on the rear side of the rental unit front cover 365. And a ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and the ball rental unit of the tray unit base 310 covers the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

  The lending unit mounting portion 310b of the tray unit base 310 to which the lending unit 360 is mounted is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the lending button 361 and the return button 362 and the button opening 310m. A rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward, and is transparent. The rental remaining display portion 363 arranged on the rear side through the front of the rental unit cover 365 is visible from the player side. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a round front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of the present example has a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is arranged to face. In the rental unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  The ball rental unit 360 also includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (player side) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before the hand touches the lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be aware of the presence of the lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430 a that is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416 and the inner cylinder section 401 a of the dial operation section 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the ring, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is latched and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by a substrate holding claw 416g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting on the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is set so that the button body 406 does not come off the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner tube 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward / reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle at a predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from the upper side; A pair of board holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 penetrates in the vertical direction through a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation portion holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410, It has. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c that protrudes outward at the lower end. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 has the operation member holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial operation unit 401 and the like attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached with a predetermined screw to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and then The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. The pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the abutment, the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (dish unit 300) can cause impact or Therefore, it is possible to avoid the concentration of impacts and the like by dispersing the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is apparently adjusted to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and dissipated well through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating. It is possible to withstand high loads Ri, it is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial drive motor 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation unit 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 51B is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the back. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 in the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 A front end cover 506 disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In addition, the handle device 500 has a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 that can rotate integrally with the shaft 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 511. Auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508 A single-shot button 520 that is pivotally supported and operates a firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504 so that the handle body 504 is in an initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Energized to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and has a rear end portion that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward from a front end portion that bulges rearwardly. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 504a concentrically arranged with the rotation shaft is formed in the handle main body 504, and three attachment bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. Accordingly, the rotational range of the handle body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 coming into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b protruding rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle body 504 is turned so that the firing strength becomes a predetermined value or more, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 reaches the right area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and this right area Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle body 504 is turned so that the firing strength becomes smaller than a predetermined value, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 flows down the left area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Thus, it is possible to divide the game ball into the right region and the left region by the player's operation. Note that the ball speed of the game ball flowing down the right region on the right side of the center combination 2500 is relatively higher than the ball velocity of the game ball flowing down on the left side of the center combination 2500. A game ball flowing down the right region at a relatively fast ball speed can win a second starting port 2102 described later, and a game ball flowing down the left region at a relatively slow ball speed will be described later. Winning to the first start port 2101 is possible.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 506 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects a player's contact, if the handle body 504 rotates, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and a game ball is driven. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, The player can be prevented from playing a game different from the original, and the load (burden) associated with the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520 and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotational drive can be stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launch device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating due to game ball driving defects It has to be able to bet.

  In the hitting ball launching device 650 (launching solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 game balls are successively launched at regular intervals per minute. It is driven to achieve a launch speed (pace). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), game balls are successively driven into the game area 1100 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

[Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and communicates with the first sphere inlet 542a. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right when viewed from the front as it goes to the front end of the cover base 542, and a second sphere entrance that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a. 542c and a second sphere passage 542d that communicates with the second sphere inlet 542c and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example uses the first ball outlet to pass the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a. From 544a, the plate unit 300 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is turned to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. Yes.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. The static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball can be removed.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball rolls to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83). From the full ball outlet 776 of the foul cover unit 540 to the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swing member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the game A notification for urging a person to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside is provided.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[Antistatic measures for door frame base substrate 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (transparent polycarbonate molded product) (see FIGS. 52A, 52B, and 53) includes the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. Is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while being in contact with the wall surface of the passage, so that the game ball and the resin are rubbed to generate static electricity and the game ball is charged. Cheap.

  For this reason, a metal ground rail 554 is provided at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d for removing the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance of the gaming ball and discharging it to the lower plate. Yes. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped grounding metal 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the left end grounding metal 556 can be electrically connected to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). The ground metal 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, and 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

  Although the second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, the electrostatic charge is accumulated in this portion of the polycarbonate, and may be as high as 10 kV. Yes (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain from the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). Moreover, even if the electric charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, only the very periphery can be removed, and the majority remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this electric charge.

  In the gaming machine, a ground wire for discharging static electricity is attached to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, for example. However, there is a possibility that the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident, or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected.

  The embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, so that even if the ground is not taken, electrostatic induction is not caused by charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. Further, the invention relates to an invention relating to an antistatic mechanism that shields the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and prevents static electricity that has escaped to the shield metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame showing a state equipped with an antistatic mechanism when viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a main part rear view of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. FIG. 57 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (tinplate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. And a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) that is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates the electric charge jumped to the shield plate 562 so as not to jump to the surrounding conductor. And an insulating sheet 570.

  The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-like conductive portion 563 that is conductively contacted by contacting the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the door frame 5 at an upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent in the left-right direction. Is a substantially plate-shaped shield part 564 that is located below and behind the conductive part 563 and is disposed over substantially the entire back side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower back surface of the door frame 5. And have.

  A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563. An insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565, and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner near the upper side of the conductive portion 563. Is drilled.

  The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield part 564 of the shield plate 562, and functions to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield part 564 from the surrounding conductors. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 by sticking.

  55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 is disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is disposed on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is disposed between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is positioned on the outer side in the radial direction than the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 contacts the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 so as to be in conductive contact and to release static electricity.

  It should be noted that mounting boss portions 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are projected from appropriate positions on the right side portion of the lower rear surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Further, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 to the shield plate 562 and the grounding metal plate 556 are provided at appropriate locations on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. 154c (see FIG. 56).

  The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110g through the insertion hole 566, the screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. Screwed to the base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 is disposed with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. Screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. In addition, a screw is inserted into the mounting portion of the grounding metal 556, and further, screws are inserted into the screw insertion holes 154 b and 154 c of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154, and by screwing the screws, static electricity is applied to the metal lower reinforcing metal plate 154. Screwed to the door frame base body 110 so as to escape.

  The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached to the attachment boss portion 110g together with screws. In addition, a ground wire (not shown) is attached to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 together with the grounding metal 556 with screws.

[Operation of antistatic mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcement sheet metal 154 through the shield part 564 of the shield plate 562 in surface contact and the conductive part 563 in surface contact with the lower reinforcement sheet metal 154. The door-frame base substrate 194 can be shielded by the thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 so that electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

  Further, since the shield plate 562 is disposed so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge jumped to the shield plate 562 is exposed to the surrounding conductor (metal) from the corner or end surface of the shield portion 564. (Things and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. 60A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 60B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after the rear case is removed. Further, FIG. 61A is a plan view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 61B is a front view of the tamper-proof member, and FIG. 61C is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583d. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60B and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right as viewed from the rear of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose overall outer diameter in the rear view is a horizontally long shape, and on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip which is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c divided vertically with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side side) of the upper end portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to be separated from each other. A character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the distal end (left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cutting part 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece part 588b and the upper side of the lower piece part 588c intersect each other at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like that. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is shown. A portion corresponding to the portion where the is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the hit ball launching device 650 sends the illegal game ball I to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 moves obliquely to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in the front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. An attempt is made to enter the game area 1100 through the game. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw differs from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the path of the game ball It moves along the route connecting at the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launcher 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the hitting ball supply port 582a so as to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear view. The wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) that extends rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the anti-fraud member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction of narrowing the gap (leftward in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588 by the force of the illegal game ball I. In this state, friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw is cut (see FIG. 61D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal action is performed on the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw in the game area 1100. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, so that it is impossible to perform an illegal act. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby reducing the momentum of the illegal game ball I and playing area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion, so that it is possible to prevent illegal acts.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance and suppress the interest, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301, so that the game The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are Directional movement can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball hitting device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw adhering to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentary) state immediately after being fired by the ball hitting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. As the wire Iw is pulled quickly (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the force of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent entry into the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the tamper-proof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the anti-fraud member 588 is injured by an operator during assembly. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the anti-fraud member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper upper piece 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting part 588d is formed, the cutting part 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a disposed on the upper sides of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. Stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Modeling decoration on the door frame]
Next, modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, shape decoration, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at the substantially vertical center. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 240, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The door frame 5 is greatly different in appearance on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance crumpled by the side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 that are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 give a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

  62, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection, as shown in FIG. 62, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward larger than 240. In addition, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is seen from the front right side, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front part When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 appears larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 becomes almost invisible, and a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be given an illusion like a pachinko machine of a different model, a player who is selecting a pachinko machine to play, etc. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the whole appearance of the island equipment is smooth and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives the player a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby allowing the gaming window 101 to emit light. It is possible to decorate the light emission with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed on the rear side of the side flash lenses 204 and 246, respectively. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off to change the mode of light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing an arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210 a and 250 a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a and the side inner lens 252 in the side lens 250.

  Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) are provided. . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are relatively high in luminance. LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and the light from each of the LEDs 214a and 216a that emit light is reflected by the substrate to the player side, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and outward outward from the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extending to the right. The front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. On the upper central decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually decorated with light emission. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extended frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light emission. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a on the upper central decorative board 288 and the upper side decorative board 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this dish unit 300, an upper dish decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the upper dish decoration element 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decoration board 322 are used in the upper dish decoration element 316. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be illuminated and decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 63 and 64) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the cross-hatched range in FIGS. 63 and 64), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light as appropriate so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. It is possible to notify various information to a person or a game hall employee who installed the pachinko machine 1.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper center group 106 is configured to illuminate and decorate the upper center. The LED 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make a light emitting decoration that becomes a dot. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 arranged on the lower side of the gaming window 101 is used to decorate the upper dish 301 with light emission. The dish group 108 is set. In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 The operation group 109 is configured to be decorated with light emission. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are played. Can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d on the front and rear sides and on the right and left sides. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, there are three times 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to produce a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each of the systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is aligned along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

  Further, by causing the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 to emit light, an opportunity or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a short time gaming state, a probability variation short gaming state) , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation is performed. A light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405 can be performed. In addition, the system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

[Overall structure of the body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 69). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape in which the lower end hangs down from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and the lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 67, FIG. A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, so that the lower rear wall portion 604 is opened. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is provided so that the game ball can be rolled down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and a game ball rolling on the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 will be described in detail later. Has come to roll.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. as appropriate. Is formed.

[Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67 and the like) penetrating in the up-down direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) for regulating the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side, which is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642b. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Hitball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stopper piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is formed in a loose arc shape that is depressed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 102, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen after disassembly. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball rolling path in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instructions, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 A hook portion 724 extending to the rear, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, and a prize ball formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front sides of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 Place tank 720 on prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and a game ball rolling in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward on the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 78) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and can be brought into contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the outlet 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 that is rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734b in the tank rail 731. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 in the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and communicates with a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b and bends substantially in a letter shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a ball break switch 750 that is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball that is attached to the unit base 741 and rolls in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 through the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. It has.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage that can come into contact with a game ball that rolls in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The grounding metal 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741c. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball to be played, the ball break switch 750 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball break switch 750 (a state where the ball is broken), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal 757 is in contact with the rear end of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding metal 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply path 741a is removed via the supply path grounding metal 757. Be able to.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. At the top of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attaching / detaching button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and relay board mounting The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and generates heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or a ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls discharged to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d by the ball extraction passage 741d from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d are a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank branching unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit 800. Can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 78, FIG. 79, and FIG. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball from the position immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and the game ball rolling on the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right end in front view, and a full passage 775 that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 83). three A), a full Tan passage 775 to release the rolling was game balls forward and full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball received at the reception opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball rolling in the ball extraction passage 778 is released forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view. And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full ball outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantial game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow the game balls to roll in a plurality of rows, and the amount of game balls retained (reserved amount) in the full tank branch unit 770 Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held by the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-down direction in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from after being disassembled. FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 92A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 93A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 93B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, A vertically long slit-shaped compound that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A through hole 815 of, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. In addition, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the launching power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a lower speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a heavy bass with respect to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a housing recess opened upward by a box housing part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing part 843 of a power board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. This is possible (see FIG. 67).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface communicating the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, it is easy to replace the firing power supply board 831. It is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches its lifetime due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute each time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 rolls through a main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, passes through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810, and the rear of the substrate unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to the side and the game ball that is discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are connected to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. It can be discharged downward.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 90, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  Further, the power board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the power board box 850 has a standing wall portion 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to turn (turn back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since the power supply board box 850 includes protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When mounted on the rear panel, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 4, a, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal board 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. Be able to.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connecting terminal plate cover 873 is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 after the fixing piece 873h is inserted, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the terminal board box 870 of the present example, when assembled, has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, it is possible to perform an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opened opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body, the outer side of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-like electrode that cannot be inserted into the gap between the connector body from the rear side) and that prevents unauthorized acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. It can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are turned to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side, and the wiring 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 94B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923a in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 92 to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 A holding member 925 mounted so as to sandwich the, and a. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and is connected to the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection notch 910. Etc. come to the rear side. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated through the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state in which the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252 so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be improved. It can be exhausted. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924a is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a side piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side piece 952a A rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 112).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 112). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Therefore, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the side security plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the size of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and the side security plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent to perform an illegal act. .

  Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. It can be reduced as much as possible, and the side crime prevention plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. 97A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a glass door slide rod and a main body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding door for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the anti-fraud member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the lock device 1000 is a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are prevented from being illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw-fastening portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw-fastening portion 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper end portion and middle portion of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b provided with a protrusion, and the lower end portions of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared to the case where the side surface 1001b is dense.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted through a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 101 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 67, FIG. 72, etc.) It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to receive a rivet 1006 that is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 slides into the door frame. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to disturb the ascending operation of the ridge 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has the guide protrusion 1043 inserted through the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 that connects the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet slot 1042 and the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. While being overlapped, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are used. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base body 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005. .

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 100A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 5 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is greatly increased and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by an L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the peripheral wall 605. It is good also as a structure to accommodate, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to the rear wall portion of the prize ball base 710 A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710b, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper frame 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, the rear wall portion of the winning ball base 710 A prize ball device 740 that is partially attached to the rear side of 710b and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and a rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74 are provided. Since it has a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as the rear surface, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side surface can be visually confirmed, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visually inspected) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. A pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, it passes through the slit 916 or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is the game as viewed from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. Although the game board 4 is not shown in FIGS. 102 to 109 and will be described in detail later, a front unit attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150 are further provided. (See FIG. 113, FIG. 116, etc.)

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[Pre-component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (or has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through-hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 105). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of the present example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520 and fitted with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end of the rear surface of the rear surface when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 whose rear side is opened and a thin horizontal box shape that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is opened on the front side, and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1172 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In addition, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. In addition, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance Can be done.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 106 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 A first special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol, and a lottery result of the first special symbol that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball into the first start port 2101 (first The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 A second consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol that is arranged and lottery by accepting a game ball at the second starting port 2102 as the second special symbol. A special symbol indicator 1186 and a second special symbol for displaying the number of reserved balls relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, which consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the second special symbol indicator 1186. A storage indicator 1187.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations relating to the passage of the general gate 2301 by the game ball The normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the symbol, and the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball through the normal gate 2301 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is a normal symbol. Are arranged side by side on the diagonal upper right side of the normal symbol display 1189 and the normal symbol memory display 1188, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (condition device is Round display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern of the winning prize opening 2103 is repeated (number of rounds). It is provided with a 1190, a.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, probability variation state, time shortening state, probability variation short game state, jackpot game state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination. In the present embodiment, at least the probability variation state, the time shortening state, and the right-handed gaming state are configured to be displayed. In particular, in the present embodiment, a game state that is advantageous to the player if a game ball is launched into the game area 1100 on the left side of the center bonus 2500 (so-called “left-handed”), and the game on the right side of the center bonus 2500 If a game ball is fired in the area 1100 (so-called “right-handed”), a game state that is advantageous to the player is mixed, so the timing for performing “right-handed” is clearly displayed to the player. Thereby, even if it is a game beginner, it can switch smoothly how to hit (driving operation) with the transition of a gaming state, without making a mistake in "left-handed" and "right-handed".

  Note that the game status indicator 1183 is not limited to one configured by a single color LED, and may be configured by a plurality of LED groups or a 7-segment LED. Any configuration may be used as long as the player moves his / her line of sight to the game status indicator 1183 during the game, and can easily grasp the current game status, in particular, the game status that should be right-handed.

  The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. This control signal is transmitted to a peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later to the player in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is preferable to notify “right-handed”. Usually, since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in the front view of the player (the front line of sight), when “right-handed” is notified in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the line of sight is at the left end of the front view. Without shifting, the player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (a driving operation).

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. More specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is 1, and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of holds is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holds is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the combination of the emission color and the lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the ordinary gate 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  Further, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 starts the variable display when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of reserved normal symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round display lamps 1190a and 1190b made of predetermined LEDs, and the number of rounds in the “hit” game can be displayed by lighting these display lamps. It is like that.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of a function display board (not shown). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has functions as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or The position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different. To allow hall clerk to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without confusion. You have me.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. As compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[Second Embodiment of Game Panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. Note that the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. Is formed. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500, and the attacker devices 2100, 2150 and the like from the front side with respect to the opening 1215. The unit which has is inserted and fixed.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 that is recessed in a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear side. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010 in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) having a predetermined amount of depression from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and being opened downward at the lower end side. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it becomes possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the state of holding the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[Second Embodiment of Previous Component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a form different from that of the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110 and 112, the gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 have the outer shape of the panel board 1210 and the inner shape of the through-hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 107 to 109, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The front structural member 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the front structural member 1110 described above in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and the function display unit 1180 is not provided. The point is very different. In addition, about another structure, it is the same as that of the front structural member 1110, and while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-like inner peripheral shape that extends from the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 of the outer rail 1111. The shape is the same as that of the above-described front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from that of the above-described front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion extending from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right-side certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and from the arc-shaped lower end to the outlet port The guide surface 1115 is formed in a straight line that is inclined so that the distance from the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-mouth guide surface 1115.

  The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 than the above-described front component member 1110, and the wide game area 1100 can make the player more entertaining. It can be done.

[Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state in which the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112, the security structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal side security plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 formed of a synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed on the inner side of the front end of the side security plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow unauthorized tools to enter the rear side of the rear end of the middle piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, as shown in FIG. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the gaming board 4 Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the special winning opening of the game board is opened. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back, and FIG. 117 is an exploded view of each main member constituting the game board (however, the center accessory 2500 is not shown). FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a plate-like game panel 1200 are provided.

  The gaming panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A and having an outer shape smaller than the front component member 1110A. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A while holding the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side. An opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  Further, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a left end of the front end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 disposed at a position that is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and is visible from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) which is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. Board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear of the gaming panel 1200, and on the rear face of the substrate holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the game area 1100, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position in the middle thereof. A center accessory 2500 is disposed at a substantially central position of the game area 1100. The design of the center accessory 2500 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

  In addition, an effect display device 1900 that provides an effect display with a large area in front view so as to attract attention from the player is provided behind the center accessory 2500. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1900.

  Above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a display area smaller than the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may display image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the game area 1100, from the right area to the lower area of the center bonus 2500, the general gate 2301, the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100, the special prize opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101, the second, A start port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, a plurality of general winning ports 2201 are provided in the left area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Further, a regular winning opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101 is provided in the area below the center combination 2500 in the game area 1100.

  Here, the first start opening 2101 is a center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction, and a regular winning opening 2101a in which a game ball can always be won below the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the game area 1100 It has a special winning opening 2101b that allows a game ball to be awarded only when the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 operates on the right side. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), the first starting port sensor 3131 (see FIG. 118) described later enters the game ball (wins). ) Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker described later is based on a random number for the first special symbol that is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for a hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time. The When winning the winning combination, after the change display is finished, drive control of an later-described attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) configured with a solenoid or the like is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed. Get to work. After the attacker device 2100 has been opened and closed in this way, it can be controlled to shift to a short-time game state, which will be described later, in which the ease of winning a game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is improved. .

  As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and by starting the variation of the second special symbol. The symbol variation according to the result of the first special symbol lottery cannot be set in the variation start waiting state.

  In addition, the above-mentioned general-purpose gate 2301 is provided above the special prize opening 2101b, and is configured so that a game ball driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 can pass therethrough. When the game ball is received (passed) to the normal gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) described later that the ball has been received.

  At this time, if a predetermined normal start condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normally) is determined based on a random number for a normal symbol that is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A determination process (ordinary determination) is performed on the normal hit that triggers the operation of the electric accessory) 2111, and the normal symbol dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. When the normal winning is won, after the change display is completed, drive control of a later-described ordinary accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118) configured with a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, the movable piece 2111 is allowed to receive the game ball into the special prize opening 2101b of the first start port 2101 through an opening operation in which the upper end rotates rightward (clockwise) around the lower end. .

  In other words, the special prize opening 2101b receives the game ball (entry only) when there is an opening operation by the movable piece 2111 in accordance with the normal winning (the turning operation of the upper end around the lower end of the movable piece 2111). Ball) It is provided so that a prize can be won. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 has a mode (rejected ball mode) that makes it impossible to enter a game ball into the special winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101 and a mode that allows the same ball (permitted). It can be said that it is maintained in the rejected ball mode unless the drive control of the normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, basically, at the special winning opening 2101b, when the player is in the normal gaming state (non-temporary gaming state), the winning of the game ball hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, a game ball is driven into the right area of the center object 2500 in the game area 1100 (right-handed), thereby improving the ease of accepting the game ball. The gameability centered on the game (first special symbol lottery) according to the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening 2101b will be realized.

  The second starting port 2102 is provided below the special winning port 2101b and is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500, and the special winning port 2103 and the first starting port 2101 of the attacker device 2100 are specially awarded. A game ball that is not received in the mouth 2101b is configured to be able to enter. When a game ball enters the second start port 2102, the second start port sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118) described later detects the game ball entering (winning). At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker to be described later is based on a random number for the second special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time. The When the winning is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, drive control of an later-described attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) configured with a solenoid or the like is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 is controlled. Is opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special prize opening 2101b, and is configured to receive a game ball that is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 when in the open state. Has been.

  The attacker device 2100 includes a special winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) for driving the opening / closing member 2106 to open and close. Normally, it is closed by an opening / closing member 2106 so that a game ball is not received in the special winning opening 2103.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the grand prize opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2101 (first special When the special winning lot 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball at the second starting port 2102 (the second special symbol side hit game), The number of balls that can be received by the game balls is adjusted by changing the control modes for releasing them.

  That is, the attacker device 2100 opens the big prize opening 2103 by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a determination result of either the first special determination or the second special determination. Thus, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player. Accordingly, three game balls are paid out when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 (first start port sensor 3131) or the second start port 2102 (second start port sensor 3132). Fifteen game balls are paid out when a game ball wins a big winning opening 2103 (count sensor 2122a) used for execution of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. In addition, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), ten gaming balls are paid out.

  By the way, in the short-time gaming state (the rush preparation mode in the present embodiment), the variation time of the normal symbol is “0.08 seconds”, and the movable piece 2111 is in the open state (the special prize opening 2101b) after the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The time that the game ball is maintained at the right-turning position where the winning of the game ball can be won) is “5.5 seconds”. That is, when a game ball passes through the normal gate 2301, the normal ball is always won, and a time shorter than the time until the passed game ball reaches the movable region of the movable piece 2111 (0 .08 seconds), the change of the normal symbol is stopped, so that the game ball that has been a chance to win the normal hit can be won as it is in the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101. According to such a configuration, in the short-time gaming state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from winning the second start port 2102 that is provided further below the special winning port 2101b and can receive the flowing game ball. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second special symbol lottery from being executed in the short game state when the execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the special prize winning opening 2101b is preferred.

  In addition, after the movable piece 2111 is maintained for “5.5 seconds” in the open state (position where the game ball can be received in the special prize opening 2101b), the movable piece 2111 is closed (the game ball is placed in the special prize opening 2101b). The position is set to be unacceptable.

  Therefore, in the short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the probability of winning the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special prize opening 2101b is moved to the right-turning position for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, it is easy to win a game ball to the special prize opening 2101b by making a right-hand hit. Therefore, in the short-time game state rush preparation mode, the center bonus is such that a large number of game balls win the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) instead of the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a). It is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of 2500 and to fire the game ball (so-called “right strike”).

  On the other hand, in the non-short game state (the normal mode and the rush mode in this embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 1 second). ), It becomes impossible to accept the game ball to the special prize opening 2101b of the first start port 2101.

  It should be noted that, even in the non-short-time game state, whether or not it is advantageous for the player to launch the game ball aiming at the left or right of the center accessory 2500 differs depending on whether or not it is in the probability variation game state. In the normal game state (normal mode) that is a non-time-saving game state and not a probability change game state, the left side of the center accessory 2500 is placed so that a large number of game balls win the regular winning port 2101a of the first start port 2101. It is considered advantageous for the player to aim at launching a game ball (so-called “left-handed”). Also, in the non-short-time gaming state and the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than the normal gaming state, there are many game balls at the second start port 2102. It is advantageous for a player to launch a game ball (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center actor 2500 so as to win a prize.

  In addition, the time-shortening function includes control for increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol as compared to the non-time-short gaming state, control for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol than that for the non-time-short gaming state, Control to maintain the movable piece 2111 of the special prize opening 2101b at the right rotation side position is longer than the non-timeless gaming state, and the number of times the movable piece 2111 is operated to the right rotation side position is larger than the non-timeless gaming state. Any one of the increasing controls or any combination (or all) may be executed.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010 in which 3010b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back effect unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box The back bottom rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010b in the 3010, and the bottom right bottom disposed between the back bottom rendering unit 3400 and the front front decoration unit 3100 in the bottom right front corner in the back box 3010. The production unit 3600 is mainly provided. The front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board that houses a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150, which will be described in detail later. A box 1910 is provided.

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment is a wide area where the game ball can sufficiently roll between the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). In the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board 1210 in the left area of the center accessory 2500.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a strength of a predetermined strength or more), the game ball is upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. The right side passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500 flows down from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one. The game balls that have flowed down the right passage 2545 are first decelerated at the stop 1114 and then the path of the right passage 2545 It reaches the normal map gate 2301 arranged above. After that, it is guided to the movable region of the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker device 2100. In this movable region, the game balls that have not been received by the winning prize opening 2103 by the opening / closing member 2106 are then guided to the movable region of the movable piece 2111. Note that the game ball flowing down to the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding portion 2901 and the flow direction is changed, and then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. Here, the game ball that has passed through the upper normal gate 2301 is guided to the special prize opening 2101b in which the game ball can be received by the movable piece 2111.

  In the movable region of the movable piece 2111, the game ball that has not been guided by the movable piece 2111 to be received in the special prize opening 2101 b is decelerated again by the second guiding portion 2902 and then guided to the second starting port 2102. Is done. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second start port 2102 with a probability close to 100%, unless it enters either the big winning port 2103 or the special winning port 2101b.

  As described above, in the short-time gaming state, the game ball that has been hit right and passed through the normal gate 2301 can be received by the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

  As a result of such a game, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of the determination of either the first special determination or the second special determination, the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106. Thus, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixed piece 1902. ing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and is projected from the right side in front view. After one fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side in the rear view in the back box 3010, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion port formed by the locking mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward and closing the insertion slot.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Note that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses white light LEDs as a backlight.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3131 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 3132 and a detection signal from a general winning port sensor 3133 that detects a game ball received in the general winning port 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, a gate sensor 2302, a count sensor 2122 (counting). Sensor 2122a, count sensor 2122b), a specific sensor 2580, and a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000, a panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4, and a main control I / O port 4100b. It is supposed to be entered through.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the normal accessory drive mechanism 2114, A drive signal is output to the attacker drive mechanism 2121, the winning opening distribution drive motor 2558, and the specific area distribution drive motor 2559, or via the main control I / O port 4100 b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. First special symbol indicator 1185, second special symbol indicator 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol indicator 1189, normal symbol memory indicator 1188, game status display A drive signal is output to the indicator 1183 and the round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 that performs control, an error LED display 4130 that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860 b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 118, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and indicates the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for display on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is sent via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Via the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or finger is touching the handle body 504 and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. Are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle body 504 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d generates a firing reference pulse based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, and emits a driving current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504. Is input to the firing solenoid 654 when triggered by. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see B 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs presentation control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3041, or the gaming board Motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 4 To transmit to the drive board 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 The light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882, or the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. In addition, control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the door frame via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. 5 is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. It outputs to LED, such as each decoration board | substrate 2116,2125,2569,3113,3114,3115,3123,3124,3266,3320,3322,3426,3536,3546 with which the game board 4 was equipped. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received movable body drive command. 414, the drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 and the like provided in the game board 4 and the respective solenoids.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041, the motor drive board 3045, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the 882, or via the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. An acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Thus, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) having a sense of reality more than before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic facilities, LED, and sensors that require electric power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes a side speaker 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of left and right side decoration units, and a lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 (FIG. 67) provided in the main body frame 3. Is connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4 and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. An amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  In addition, the door frame base board 194 is bundled with wires that connect various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and the like to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, and the like, and extends to the rear. The main frame 3 is connected to the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIG. 23).

  In addition, in the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the ball hitting device 650 is launched into the game area 1100. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) for guiding a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the dish unit is provided in the vicinity (FIG. 23).

  The ball path 542b of the foul cover unit 540 passes at a high speed while the game ball (metal) is in contact with the wall surface of the path, so that electrostatic charges are accumulated in this portion of the polycarbonate, which can be as high as 10 kV. Yes (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain from the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, unlike metal, the charge accumulated in the resin can only escape from the periphery even when grounded, and most of it remains.

  Then, the electrostatic induction by this electric charge may cause a malfunction of a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified to exceed the appropriate amplification width (when it becomes an excessive AC voltage). Occur. If this happens, for example, a cracking sound such as a squealing noise will be generated from the speaker, or the sound played back by the speaker will become a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound will be generated). It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. The digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, but is usually not on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, the output tends to be set larger.

  The embodiment described below detects whether or not an audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the abnormal audio signal described above, and is an abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention related to an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the various commands are received. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 118).

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the door frame base substrate 194, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal audio signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base substrate 194 disposed on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 disposed on the main body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and the door frame base substrate 194 is connected to the periphery. The woofer + signal and the woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the + 24V voltage and the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 119, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

  120, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the + 24V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer, which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194, are provided. The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

  In addition, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 to the lower speaker 821, and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been. Thus, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is disposed at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by arranging the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 in a place where it is difficult to be affected by electrostatic noise, it is possible to stably suppress an abnormal audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit]
The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal. The audio signal is blocked from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 includes an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal, and an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. When the output abnormality detection signal is received, an abnormal audio signal cut-off circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of an abnormal audio signal to the lower speaker 821 is provided.

  The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 in the abnormal audio signal cutoff board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

  The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, one is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is An abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is input.

  In addition, the woofer signal that is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and one is relayed in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is only connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal audio signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifier bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge shape, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, arranged in a subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit). It is mainly composed of an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF, a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (which includes an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifier bridge circuit. A positive voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by a rectifier bridge circuit is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 while a rectifier bridge is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD4. A 0V line 891 is connected to supply 0V, the minus portion of which is cut by the circuit and the voltage is substantially 0V.

  In the subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifier bridge circuit (the waveform of the + voltage in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By applying the voltage to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage, and during the period from the peak voltage of the + voltage waveform to 0V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. In addition to being connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, the base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 having one end connected to a connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the waveform of the + voltage is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, the collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and a smoothed woofer signal after rectification, that is, a + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. In addition, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, after the connection point of the positive voltage line 890 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the positive voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In the abnormal audio signal cut-off circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, and the other connected to the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Has been. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  A base terminal of a relay operation transistor STR3 is connected to a connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of a capacitor SC3 having the other end connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  The fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the A contacts) is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. To the external lower speaker 821.

  Further, a varistor SZNR1 for bypassing induced current by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the fifth relay SRL1 is connected. A contact protection varistor SZNR2 is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

  In addition, since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. It is like that.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conductive, In FIG. 120, current flows from the top to the bottom through electrolytic resistor SC1 through resistor SR1, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the positive voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an alternating voltage with a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and is kept off.

  Next, during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and a current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an alternating voltage with a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and is kept off.

  Next, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  In this manner, when a normal sound signal (AC voltage waveform with a different amplitude peak) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 maintains an off state. Accordingly, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 are also kept off, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is not practically turned on.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Relay SRL1 is in an inoperative state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, the non-operating B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 (the contact is closed), and the non-operating between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal. A contact (contact open state). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal is input for a certain period of time]
[Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as + 24V, + 18V, + 1.5V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conducts, and in FIG. 120, a charging current flows from top to bottom through electrolytic resistor SC1 through resistor SR1, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, an increase in the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 as time passes is applied. As a result, the voltage reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Accordingly, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2, and the resistor SR4, and is applied to the resistor SR4 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4). , A current flows through the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and a voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (a voltage appearing at a connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor STR2. As a result, the transistor STR2 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistor SR8, and the resistor SR9. Here, when the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, it means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. Note that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in an excited state, and the relay SRL1 between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal is the B contact at the time of operation (the contact is open), and between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal is in the operating state. A contact (contact closed state). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off for the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888. Thereby, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  In addition, the third terminal and the fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground. Pulled down, the transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the path of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The coil is switched to a conducting state and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the woofer + signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 remains cut off.

  In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal (photocoupler). Is turned on). When the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is kept off from the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority on preventing speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal audio signal can be grasped by an attendant or the like, or when the audio output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input when the audio signal is extremely amplified, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, In FIG. 120, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak. Is done.

  Further, for example, in the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and in FIG. 120, a charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage due to the normal audio signal, even if the width of the mountain-shaped waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 Through, the charging current rapidly flows into the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored in the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 increases rapidly. Due to this rapid charge increase, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Accordingly, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal due to the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be described briefly.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the relay SRL1 is disconnected from the 5th and 6th terminals. The woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 is blocked from the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1. Thereby, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal audio signal having an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width. Therefore, an unpleasant sound can be prevented from being output to the player.

[LCD control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 A character ROM 4150d for storing various data, and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 and Drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when various persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display apparatus 3252, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites overlap each other, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device. 3252 is drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 are sequentially scanned from the left to the right when viewed from the front, main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel, and intersecting the one direction. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeatedly performed in such a direction. When one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 moves from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. Sequentially output to one line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, Based on the drawing data of the minute, the data is sequentially output to the pixels for one line from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 149.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board of the present embodiment. When the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs). If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings) are executed. , Setting interrupt timing, etc.).

  If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM. If the RAM clear switch 624a that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) during the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game, such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is shut off. Note that the backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In the present embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  When the power interruption occurs, the processing of the gaming machine is changed from the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In order to start, it is a process which memorize | stores the state at the time of a power failure as backup data in RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3).

[Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power failure occurs according to the present embodiment. The process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main process.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process according to the present embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

  The main control MPU 4100a first executes a process of saving a register (step S10), and then executes a process from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker driving mechanism 2121). The opening / closing member 2106) for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103 is controlled by this, and a process for changing the open / closed state of the special winning opening 2103 is executed.

  In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process related to a normal winning as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2111 is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2111 is higher when a specific condition (ON of the time reduction flag) is satisfied after the end of the big hit gaming state. (So-called short-time gaming state). In the present embodiment, the time required for the normal symbol variable display control is shortened for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and this is set as a long time as the operation time when the movable piece 2111 operates. Thus, the short-time game state is realized in which it is easier to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first start port 2101 than in the normal state (low probability non-short-time game state).

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (also called a big hit determination or a big hit lottery), a big hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination A big hit symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined that it will be made, a determination whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state instead of the big hit (also called a small hit determination, a small hit lottery) ) Used for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined that the small hit game state is generated in the small hit determination, the big hit lottery and the small hit Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) on whether or not to perform a high expectation effect such as reach effect when it is determined that it is not a win in the lottery, Fluctuation display pattern random number (variation time random number), big hit (small hit) game (special bonus) used to determine the special symbol fluctuation display pattern (variation time, etc.) displayed on the separate symbol indicators 1185, 1186 In the game), the round determination random number used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the grand prize opening 2103, the movable piece 2111 that opens and closes the special prize opening 2101b is opened (the upper end is clockwise with the lower end as the center) There is a normal hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to control (a determination based on the normal lottery).

  The jackpot symbol random number is also used for the determination regarding the status type of the jackpot (such as whether to operate the time reduction function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the big hit (small hit) random number for big hit (small hit) lottery, the big hit (small hit) design random number, the round decision random number, and the movable piece 2111 are opened. The random number for judgment per symbol related to whether or not to control is updated. That is, the random numbers used for the determination related to the big hit (small hit) lottery and the opening / closing control of the movable piece 2111 are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that a big hit (small hit) gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 2111 is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number is made constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being in an unfavorable state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the reach determination random numbers not related to the big lot (small hit) lottery and the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process according to the present embodiment.

  In this special control process, first, first and second start opening prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102. Then, after the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled, and the first special symbol A first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progress of the game on the symbol side is controlled is sequentially performed. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be changed simultaneously, As a result, even if the symbol variation on one side starts, the symbol variation on the other side does not start.

[First and second start opening prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up winning process according to the present embodiment.

  In the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110), the process mainly involved in determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there has been, the process related to the update of the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is performed.

  Accordingly, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from second start port sensor 3132, it is determined that a game ball has been won at second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) are obtained and the second special symbol provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold count counter is less than 1 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 1 (the second hold number counter is 0), the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second start port 2102 (a big hit determination random number, for a big hit symbol) as the second start hold storage process (step S203). A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with a special symbol type or a reservation order. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step S203, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has been won at the second starting port 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the on-hold display on the second start port 2102 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the detection signal is 1, next, in step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from first start port sensor 3131, it is determined that a game ball has been won at first start port 2101 (YES in step S205), and the next Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (such as the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (random hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number obtained by winning a game ball in the first start port 2101 as the first start hold storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  Also in the process of step S207, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, it is possible to update the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like on hold on the first start port 2101 side quickly through control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that no game ball has been won in the first start port 2101 or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) for the first starting port 2101 is executed after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) for the second starting port 2102 is executed. . However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2101 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 2102 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, a jackpot lottery, a probable variation lottery, and determination of a variable display pattern, which will be described later), and a process for determining the lottery result in advance. It is. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number and the preceding determination table, the lottery result (the big hit (small hit) win / no-win, the type of the big win, the variation display pattern) when the lottery using the random number is performed is performed. Etc.) (the determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed ( Also called “Direction”).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the preceding determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is controlled and the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled. Each detailed procedure will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, unlike the control execution procedure, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be described first.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process on the first special symbol side of the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-described first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 125) and the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later are executed in the above-described special control process (FIG. 124). This process is executed later.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the first special symbol side is in an on state (step S100a). The linkage flag of the first special symbol is a flag that is set to ON when the game on the first special symbol side should be linked to the game on the second special symbol side.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side can proceed simultaneously. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. In order to avoid this, when a big hit (small win) is obtained in the game on one side, an interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on. Therefore, the interlock flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (small hit) in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later.

  When the interlock flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S100a), main control MPU 4100a does not perform the process corresponding to the first process flag (step S130a to step S200a), 1 linked setting processing is executed (step S250a). Details of the first linkage setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is OFF in the process of step S100a (NO in step S100a), the main control MPU 4100a performs the original game of the game on the first special symbol side. The state of the first processing flag indicating the progress status of the game on the first special symbol side is confirmed, assuming that the game status allows progress. And main control MPU4100a selectively selects the process according to the state of the 1st process flag (the game progress of the 1st special symbol side) among a plurality of processes (Steps S130a-S200a) shown in the figure. Since the game is executed, the game on the first special symbol side is appropriately progressed.

  More specifically, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a). If the first processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120a), 1 Fluctuation start processing (step S130a) is executed. In the first variation start process (step S130a), after the setting for starting the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special determination) or the like, The one process flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the first process flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first process flag is 1 (step S140a). As a result, if the first process flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) is executed. In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 (the first special symbol (identification) on the first special symbol display 1185). The first processing flag is updated to “2” after the variation time from the start of the variation display of the symbol) to the stop display is determined.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 2 (step S160a). As a result, if the first process flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first changing process (step S170a) is executed. In the first variation processing, the variation time set in the first variation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is monitored by a timer, and the first special symbol display 1185 displays the first special symbol based on the time-out. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined that the big win is won in the first variation start process (step S130a), a linkage flag for linking the game on the second special symbol side with the game on the first special symbol side is set. After the on state, the first processing flag is updated to “3” to start the big hit game. However, if the win is not won (losing), the first processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the first change start process (step S130a).

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 3 (step S180a). As a result, if the first process flag is 3 (YES in step S180a), a first jackpot game start process (step S190a) for creating an interval period before starting the jackpot game is executed. When the interval period before starting the big hit game has elapsed, the first process flag is updated to “4” in the first big hit game start process.

  On the other hand, if the first process flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), main control MPU 4100a executes the first big hit game start process (step S200a). In the first jackpot game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated, or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a executes the first big hit game process (step S200a) assuming that the first process flag is 4 if the first process flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a). In the first jackpot game process, the mode of the big hit game (number of rounds, opening time, maximum number of winnings, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set mode of the big hit game. . In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the first change start process (step S130a).

  Thus, in the process of step S100a, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be linked to the game on the second special symbol side is OFF, When any one of the processes of S130a, S150a, S170a, S190a, and S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first process flag, the first special control process in the interrupt process is Is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the first variation start process (step S130a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the first variation process (step S170a), the first big hit game start process (step S190a), the first big hit game process ( The detailed procedure of each process of step S200a) and the first interlock setting process (step S250a) will be described separately.

[First variation start processing]
First, the first variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first variation start process of the present embodiment. The first variation start process is executed when the first process flag is “0” in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

  First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter as the process of step S301a. I do. If it is determined that there is no lottery process for the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter (YES in step S301a), The first variation start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, each time the above-described interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301a, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery process for the first special symbol that is in a hold state. Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the first special symbol, the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S301a that there is a lottery process for the first special symbol that is on hold (NO in step S301a), then the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S302a. As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is zero. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (special symbol fluctuations) that make the winning probability of jackpot a high probability (probability variation state), and is set at the end of the jackpot game in the first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) described later. . In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after the completion of all the big hit games. Details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S302a), main control MPU 4100a updates the ST count by 1 as the process in step S303a. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process proceeds to step S304a without performing step S303a.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs a random number group (for example, the first winning symbol) related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S304a. The random number group stored in the earliest storage area among the random number for determination, the first design random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process of step S305a, a random number group (a first winning determination random number) related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. , The first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number) are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  More specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the first special holding number counter as the processing of steps S306a and S307a, and draws the winning lottery (first step) based on the read first winning determination random number. 1 special symbol lottery). In the lottery process for the above winning, if the lottery for whether to win the jackpot and whether to win the jackpot based on the first winning determination random number is performed, and the lottery result indicating that the jackpot is won, A process of determining a jackpot symbol, that is, a type of jackpot based on the first symbol random number is executed.

  Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the big win winning probability state is a normal state (low probability non-short-time state), a big hit with a probability of 1/399. If the winning probability state of the big hit is the probability variation state (high probability state), the winning combination is set to win with a probability of 1/45.

  Then, when the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as processing of step S308a, respectively. To do. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery is also determined. After that, as the process of step S309a, when the first process flag is updated to “1” so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), this process is terminated.

  The result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in the first variation start process is the peripheral control by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the winning information command set in the process of step S308a. It is transmitted to the unit 4140.

[First variation pattern setting process]
Next, the first variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) and the like will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first variation pattern setting process of the present embodiment.

  In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is “1”, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 wins a big hit. If the flag indicating this is set (YES in step S401a), the variation pattern table at the time of jackpot according to the gaming state is selected (step S402a), and in the flag state indicating that it is a loss that does not win the jackpot If there is any (NO in step S401a), a variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S403a).

  The main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a), and the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 to start the operation is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S405a). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the first variation timer (step S406a). As a result, variation control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time thus determined. After that, as the process of step S407a, when the first process flag is updated to “2” so that the process shifts to the first changing process (step S170a), this process is terminated.

  The variation pattern set in the first variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. Is done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. A display effect is performed.

  Of the variation pattern tables used in the processes of steps S402a and S403a, the variation pattern table used in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) A plurality of variation patterns (variation times) for exciting display effects in the device 1900 are stored. In these fluctuation patterns, an effect (including a reach effect) that sets different expectations for “winning” is set, and any of the fluctuation patterns is selectively determined in the process of step S405a. It becomes. On the other hand, a shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected in the variation pattern table used in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode). Details of setting the variation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[First change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first changing process (step S170a) executed when the first process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first changing process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first variation timer set in step S406a in the first variation pattern setting processing (step S150a) has reached 0 as the processing in step S501a, that is, the setting described above. Judgment is made as to whether or not the specified fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the first variation timer is not 0, that is, the set variation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first variation processing (step S170a) is performed. Each time it is performed, the first variation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521a.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501a that the first variation timer has reached 0, that is, the set variation time has elapsed (YES in step S501a). ) The main control MPU 4100a displays on the first special symbol display 1185 the stop symbol that has already been determined (the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery) as the processing of step S502a and step S503a. Display control for ending the variable display, and the first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol. It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The first fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  After the process related to the symbol stop is performed in this way, this process is ended when various processes corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery are executed.

  When the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the second special symbol side avoids the occurrence of duplicate hits on the second special symbol side. The above-mentioned second special symbol interlocking flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the first special symbol side game is turned on (step S505a). Further, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state (probability variation state) is turned off (step S506a). Thereafter, when the first process flag is updated to “3” in order to start the big hit game (step S507a), this process is ended.

  By performing such control, the interval between the end of the big hit game is ended and the interlock flag of the second special symbol is turned off (the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later). In step S726a), the game on the second special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the first special symbol side regardless of the second processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost (NO in step S504a), main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the probability change flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100 is on. Judgment is made (step S511a). The probability variation flag is set to an on state when the winning probability of winning the jackpot is shifted from a normal probability (normal state) to a high probability (probability variation state). Since the change in the winning probability of the big hit is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  When the probability variation flag is in the on state (YES in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S512a). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the probability variation state has ended, and the probability variation flag is set to an off state (step S513a).

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514a when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511a). Even if the probability variation flag is on, if the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S512a), the probability variation state continues, so the probability variation flag is kept on and the processing proceeds to step S514a. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time reduction function is in operation as the process of step S514a (step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a time reduction flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in an ON state. The time reduction flag is set to ON when the time reduction function is activated in the time reduction function setting process (step S725a) of the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  When the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S514a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether to stop the time reduction function (step S515a). In the present embodiment, the time reduction function is given together with the probability changing function when the first big hit A is generated, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time reduction function is stopped when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state, and it is determined that the time reduction function is continuously operated when the probability variation flag is in the ON state.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time-saving function, assuming that the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is satisfied when the probability variation flag is set to the OFF state in the process of step S513a described above (step S516a). Then, after the processing related to the time-shortening function is performed in this way, the special symbol is suspended and suspended as shown to be lost, and the first processing flag is set to “ It is updated to “0” (step S517a), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the first special symbol is performed.

[First jackpot game start processing]
Next, the first big hit game start process (step S190a) executed when the first process flag is “3” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a timer (first big hit start interval timer) for counting the big hit game start interval has been set as a process of step S601a. As a result, if the first big hit start interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S601a), the processing of step S602a activates the condition device (not opening / closing the attacker device 2100, but the attacker). The condition for enabling the opening / closing operation of the device 2100 is established), and if the time reduction function is activated as the processing of step S603a and step S604a (YES in step S603a), the operation is stopped. Let That is, after such preparations are made, at the time when the first jackpot start interval timer is set and the first jackpot interval start command is set as the processing of steps S605a and S606a in order to start the interval before the jackpot game starts. This processing is once terminated.

  The first big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has already been set in the process of step S601a every time an interrupt process is performed ( In step S601a, YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit start interval timer is 0 in the next step S611a, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. A determination will be made as to whether or not it has been done. In the process of step S611a, as long as it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S611a). ) Each time the first big hit game start process (step S190a) is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621a.

  As a result of such processing, it is determined in the processing of step S611a that the first jackpot start interval timer has reached 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the jackpot game has elapsed. If so (YES in step S611a), the main control MPU 4100a updates the first process flag to “4” to execute the big hit game (step S612a), and ends this process.

  For the first jackpot start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of jackpot symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

[First jackpot game processing]
Next, the first big hit game process (step S200a) executed when the first process flag is “4” will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the first jackpot game process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress is in the ON state as the process of step S701a. The first big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the process of step S703a described later at the start of the first big hit game, and is turned off by the process of step S723a described later at the end. Is set.

  Then, if the first big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701a), the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S702a to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. Are set according to the type of jackpot (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round). Note that details of the opening mode corresponding to the type of jackpot will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the big hit game execution mode is set in this way, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of step S703a and step S704a, indicates that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress. When the flag is turned on and the first big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

  That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress each time an interrupt process is performed ( In step S701a, YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been consumed as the processing of the next step S711a. In the process of step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not yet been digested, that is, it is in the middle of control related to the execution of the jackpot game (NO in step S711a). ) Each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes the control according to the set release pattern as the process of step S712a. As a result, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) of opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712a. As a result, a jackpot game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is realized.

  When such control is being performed, in the process of step S711a, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, it has been determined that all the control for executing the jackpot game has been completed. (YES in step S711a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, step S742a) for generating a big hit game end interval.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (first jackpot end interval timer) for counting the big hit game end interval is already set (step S721a). As a result, if the first big hit end interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S721a), the first big hit end interval timer is processed as steps S741a and S742a in order to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the first big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  The first big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during an end interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S721a every time an interrupt process is performed ( In step S721a, YES, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval elapses as the next step S722a. A determination will be made as to whether or not it has been done. Then, in the process of step S722a, as long as it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S722a) ) Each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the first big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731a.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S722a that the first jackpot end interval timer has reached 0, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. On the other hand (YES in step S722a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (steps S723a to S728a) for ending the jackpot game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the first big hit game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S723a to the off state. Then, as the processing of step S724a, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state (probability variation state) is turned on, and the number of times of special symbol lottery (high probability state) ( Set the number of STs) to 70. The probability variation flag operated in the ON state here is operated in the OFF state when the number of STs is digested (step S513a) or a big hit before digestion (step S506a).

  In this embodiment, the probability variation function is activated for all jackpots. However, if the probability variation function is not activated according to the type of jackpot, the time-shortening function setting process (step S725a) described later is performed. As described above, first, a process for determining whether or not a big hit that activates the probability changing function may be executed. Then, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability variation function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability variation flag to the on state in the same manner as the processing in step S724a described above, and sets the ST count. In the case of a big hit that activates the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only operates the probability changing flag to the ON state and does not have to set the ST count.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a executes time-shortening function setting processing for setting whether or not to activate the time-shortening function in accordance with the type of jackpot and the gaming state as step S725a. Details of the time reduction function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing related to the probability changing function and the time-shortening function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a takes the second special symbol side into consideration in view of the possibility that the big hit game is not duplicated on the second special symbol side. The above-described interlocking flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol is turned off (step S726a). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727a), and the first processing flag is updated to “0”, assuming that the first special symbol that has been the big hit this time is in a processing stage (step S728a). ), This process is terminated. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the first special symbol is performed.

  According to such a jackpot game process, until it is determined in the process of step 711a that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds, the corresponding big prize opening 2103 is opened according to the type of jackpot ( In step S712a), the player is repeatedly released, and the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of jackpot.

[Time reduction function setting processing]
Next, the short time function setting process (step S725a) of the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time-saving function setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time-shortening function according to the type of the big hit (step S751). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (C) described later, the time saving function is given only when the big hit of the symbol A (first big hit A) is won in the first special symbol lottery.

  If the main control MPU 4100a is a big hit that activates the time reduction function (YES in step S751), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (step S752). The rush mode in the present embodiment refers to a gaming state (highly accurate non-short gaming state) in which the probability changing function is activated and the time-shortening function is not activated. Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off.

  If the current game mode is not the rush mode (high-probability non-short-time gaming state) (NO in step S752), main control MPU 4100a operates the time-shortening function by operating the time-short flag (step S753). . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the current big hit is not a big hit that activates the time reduction function (NO in step S751), main control MPU 4100a ends this process without operating the time reduction flag. Even if the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time-saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (high-probability non-time-short game state) (YES in step S752), the time-short flag is not operated. This process ends. Here, the hourly flag is set to an off state when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130).

  Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush mode (high-probability non-short-time gaming state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time-saving function, It will not be activated. In the present embodiment, a game state (rush mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a game state (rush preparation mode) in which the time reduction function is activated by not operating the time reduction function that is generally advantageous to the player is provided. It is characterized by that.

[First linked setting process]
Next, the first interlock setting process (step S250a) of the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first linkage setting process of the present embodiment.

  In the first linkage setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the game on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is controlled so as to be linked to the game on the second special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a).

  When the first special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) in the first variation start process (FIG. 127). A stop symbol is set to a predetermined loss symbol (step S1002a).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set loss symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1185 (step S1003a). Further, the first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display and display the display result of the decoration symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004a). . Note that the processes in steps S1003a and S1004a are the same as steps S502a and S503a performed when the variation time is up in the above-described first variation process (FIG. 129).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same process as the process of steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the first changing process (FIG. 129) in the process of steps S1005a to S1011a. After executing, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001a), main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of the first special symbol (that is, the state where the first special symbol has not changed). (Step S1021a), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the first interlock setting process, when the big hit or the small hit is derived by the change of the second special symbol (when the first interlock flag is on), the changing first special symbol is forcibly set. Stop at the lost pattern. Further, the first special symbol which is not changing is put into a standby state where the change is not started until the first interlocking flag is turned off. This avoids overlapping hits between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side.

  In the present embodiment, in the process in step S505b of the second changing process (FIG. 137), the first interlock flag is set to ON at the timing when the second special symbol change time ends, and in the first interlock setting process, Although the stop symbol already determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is changed to the off symbol, the present invention is not limited to this. You may set a 1st interlocking | linkage flag to ON at the timing which a fluctuation | variation starts according to a gaming state. For example, in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), when the big hit or the small hit is derived in the hit determination process (step S307b) of the second variation start process (FIG. 135), the first interlock flag is turned on. Try to set. When the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the fluctuation in which the second big hit is derived, the first winning determination random number is not used and the lottery is not performed. An outlier design may be determined. Thereby, since the variation of the first special symbol executed during the variation of the second special symbol from which the big hit is derived is shifted at the start of the variation, the process at the variation end timing of the second special symbol is simplified. can do.

  Further, as a modification of the first interlock setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state in which the fluctuation state is maintained even when the first special symbol is changing may be generated. In this way, when the big win is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol side, it is forcibly controlled to lose, and the player loses the first big hit acquisition opportunity that the player should have originally acquired. Disappear.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 142, each detailed procedure for the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described.

  Note that the second special symbol control process may be performed by using the same program as that for performing the first special symbol control process described above and changing various values referred to in the program.

[Second special symbol control process]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process on the second special symbol side of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the second special symbol side is on (step S100b). The interlock flag of the second special symbol is a flag that is set to the on state when the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side can proceed simultaneously. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. Therefore, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, an interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on at that time. ing. Here, the interlock flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) (step S505a).

  Main control MPU 4100a does not perform any processing (step S130b to step S240b) according to the second processing flag when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S100b). Then, the second linkage setting process is executed (step S250b). Details of the second linkage setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is OFF in the process of step S100b (NO in step S100b), the game of the second special symbol side is inherent. The state of the second process flag indicating the progress status of the game on the second special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a, among a plurality of processes (steps S130b to S240b) shown in the figure, processes that match the state of the second process flag thus confirmed (game progress on the second special symbol side). By selectively executing the game, the game on the second special symbol side is appropriately advanced.

  More specifically, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b), and if the second processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120b), 2 Fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed. In the second variation start process (step S130b), after setting for starting the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the winning second special symbol lottery (second special determination) or the like is performed, The second processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether or not the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). As a result, if the second process flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) is executed. In the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 (the second special symbol (identification) on the second special symbol display 1186). The second processing flag is updated to “2” after the variation time from the start of the symbol display) to the stop display is determined.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 2 (step S160b). As a result, if the second process flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second changing process (step S170b) is executed. In this second variation process, the variation time set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) is monitored by a timer, and the second special symbol display 1186 displays the second special symbol based on the time-out. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined that the big win is won in the second variation start process (step S130b), an interlock flag for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side with the game on the second special symbol side is set. After the on state, the second processing flag is updated to “3” in order to start the big hit game. In addition, when it is determined that the small win is won, the small hit game is started after the interlocking lag for linking the game on the first special symbol side with the game on the second special symbol side is turned on. Therefore, the second processing flag is updated to “5”. However, the second processing flag is updated to “0” when neither of the big hits or big hits is won (losing). As a result, the current variation is completed, and therefore the second variation start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 3 (step S180b). As a result, if the second process flag is 3 (YES in step S180b), the second big hit game start process (step S190b) is executed. In the second jackpot game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated, or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 4 (step S200b). As a result, if the second process flag is 4 (YES in step S200b), the second big hit game process (step S210b) is executed. In the second jackpot game process, the mode of the big hit game (number of rounds, opening time, maximum number of winnings, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set mode of the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the second process flag is updated to “0” after the process of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. As a result, the current variation is completed, and therefore the second variation start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 5 (step S220b). As a result, if the second process flag is 5 (YES in step S220b), a second small hit game start process (step S230b) for creating an interval period before starting the small hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the second process flag is updated to “6” in the second small hit game start process.

  On the other hand, if the second process flag is not 5 (NO in step S220b), main control MPU 4100a executes the second small hit game process (step S240b) assuming that the second process flag is 6. In the second small hit game process, a small hit game is performed in which the opening and closing member 2106 is opened and closed in a control manner according to the type of the small hit. Further, when the small hit game ends, the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the current variation is completed, and therefore the second variation start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

  Thus, in the process of step S100b, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side is in the off state, the step When any of the processes of S130b, Step S150b, Step S170b, Step S190b, Step S210b, Step S230b, and Step S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second process flag, The second special control process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the second variation start process (step S130b), the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the second variation process (step S170b), the second big hit game start process (step S190b), the second big hit game process ( Step S210b), the second small hit game start process (step S230b), the second small hit game process (step S240b), and the second interlocking setting process (step S250b), the detailed procedure for each Each will be explained.

[Second variation start processing]
First, the second variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second variation start process of the present embodiment. The second variation start process is executed when the second process flag is “0” in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter as the process of step S301b. If it is determined that there is no lottery process for the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter (YES in step S301b), The second variation start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, each time the above-described interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301b, it is determined whether there is a lottery process for the second special symbol that is in a hold state. Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the second special symbol, the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S301b that there is a lottery process for the second special symbol that is on hold (NO in step S301b), the main control MPU 4100a then proceeds to step S302b. As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is zero. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (special symbol fluctuations) that make the winning probability of winning a big hit (probability change state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later. . In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after the completion of all the big hit games. Details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S302b), main control MPU 4100a updates the ST count by 1 as the process in step S303b. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302b), the process proceeds to step S304b without performing step S303b.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs a random number group (for example, the second winning symbol) related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S304b. The random number group stored in the earliest storage area among the random number for determination, the second design random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process of step S305b, a random number group (second winning determination random number) related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. , The second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  More specifically, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the start winnings in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. In the present embodiment, only the first area (digestion area) is valid as the second special symbol reservation storage area. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol of the present embodiment stores the random number extracted according to the start winning that has been generated later, unless the second special symbol corresponding to the previously generated start winning has ended. It will never be done.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the second special holding number counter as the processing of steps S306b and S307b, and draws the lottery processing (first step) based on the read second winning determination random number. 2 special symbol lottery). In addition, in the lottery process for the above winning, if a lottery for whether or not to win a jackpot and whether to win a jackpot based on the second random number for winning judgment, A process of determining a jackpot symbol, that is, a type of jackpot based on the second symbol random number is executed.

  Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state is definitely changed. In the case of a state (high probability state), it is set to win a jackpot with a probability of 1/45. In addition, when the winning probability state is the normal state, the player wins a small hit with a probability of 390/399, and when the winning probability state is a probable state (high probability state), the player wins a small hit with a probability of 44/45. Is set.

  Then, when the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery and a winning information command as processing of step S308b, respectively. To do. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery is also determined. Thereafter, when the second process flag is updated to “1” so that the process shifts to the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) as the process of step S309b, this process is terminated.

  The result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second variation start process is the peripheral control by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the winning information command set in the process of step S308b. It is transmitted to the unit 4140.

[Second variation pattern setting process]
Next, the second variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second variation pattern setting process of the present embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is executed when the second process flag is “1” in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  If the flag indicating that the big win is won is set (YES in step S401b), the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table for the big hit according to the gaming state (step S402b), and wins the big win. If the flag indicating that the game has been performed is set (YES in step S403b), the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit according to the gaming state is selected (step S404b), and the loss is neither the big hit nor the small hit. If it is in the flag state indicating that (NO in step S403b), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S405b).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of starting the operation is set, and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is started (step S407b). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the second variation timer (step S408b). As a result, the variation control is performed in the second special symbol display 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time thus determined. After that, as the process of step S409b, when the second process flag is updated to “2” so that the process shifts to the second changing process (step S170b), this process is terminated.

  The variation pattern set in the second variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. Is done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery (small win lottery) based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. As shown, a display effect is performed.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side proceed at the same time. Through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the display effect on the first special symbol side (decoration of the decorative symbol, etc.) and the display effect on the second special symbol side (variation of the decorative symbol, etc.) appear simultaneously. .

  Of the variation pattern tables used in the processes of steps S402b, S404b, and S405b, the variation pattern table used when in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) A variation time (for example, 600 seconds) having a length 10 times or longer than any other variation time that can be selected on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, a shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected in the variation pattern table used in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode). Details of the setting of the variation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Second variable processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the second variable process (step S170b) executed when the second process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second changing process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second variation timer set in step S408b in the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b) has become 0 as the processing in step S501b. Judgment is made as to whether or not the specified fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the second variation timer is not 0, that is, the set variation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second variation processing (step S170b) is performed. Each time it is performed, the second variation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521b.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501b that the second variation timer has become 0, that is, the set variation time has elapsed (YES in step S501b). ) The main control MPU 4100a displays on the second special symbol display 1186 the stop symbol that has already been determined (stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery) as the processing of step S502b and step S503b. The display control for ending the variable display is performed, and the second definite stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol. It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The second fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  After the process related to the symbol stop is performed in this way, this process ends when various processes corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery are executed.

  When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win (YES in step S504b), the main control MPU 4100a avoids the occurrence of duplicate hits on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned first special symbol interlocking flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is turned on (step S505b). Further, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state (probability variation state) is turned off (step S506b). Thereafter, when the second process flag is updated to “3” in order to start the big hit game (step S507b), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit (NO in step S504b and YES in step S531b), the main control MPU 4100a first hits on the first special symbol side. In order to avoid the occurrence, the above-mentioned first special symbol interlock flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is turned on (step S532b). ). Thereafter, when the second process flag is updated to “5” in order to start the small hit game (step S533b), this process is ended.

  By performing such control, until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlock flag of the first special symbol is turned off (the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later). In step S726b), the game on the first special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the second special symbol side regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost (NO in step S504b and NO in step S531b), main control MPU 4100a first turns on the probability change flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100. Is determined (step S511b). The probability variation flag is set to an on state when the winning probability of winning the jackpot is shifted from a normal probability (normal state) to a high probability (probability variation state). Since the change in the winning probability of the big hit is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game in the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later.

  When the probability variation flag is on (YES in step S511b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S512b). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the probability variation state has ended, and the probability variation flag is set to an off state (step S513b).

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514b when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511b). Even if the probability variation flag is on, if the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S512b), the probability variation state continues, and thus the probability variation flag is kept on and the processing proceeds to step S514b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time reduction function is in operation as the process of step S514b (step S514b). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a time reduction flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in an ON state. The time reduction flag is set to ON when the time reduction function is activated in the time reduction function setting process (step S725b) of the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S514b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether to stop the time reduction function (step S515b). In the present embodiment, the time reduction function is given together with the probability changing function when the first big hit A is generated, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time reduction function is stopped when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state, and it is determined that the time reduction function is continuously operated when the probability variation flag is in the ON state.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time-saving function, assuming that the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is satisfied when the probability variation flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513b described above (step S516b). Then, after the processing related to the time-shortening function is performed in this way, it is assumed that the special symbol is in a processing stage where the special symbol is suspended and the special symbol is suspended as shown in the second processing flag. It is updated to “0” (step S517b), and this process is terminated. Thereby, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second jackpot game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second big hit game start process (step S190b) executed when the second process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (second big hit start interval timer) for measuring the big hit game start interval is already set as the process of step S601b. As a result, if the second big hit start interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S601b), the processing of step S602b activates the condition device, and the processing of steps S603b and S604b reduces time. If the function is operating (YES in step S603b), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are made, at the time when the second jackpot start interval timer is set and the second jackpot interval start command is set as the processing of steps S605b and S606b in order to start the jackpot game pre-start interval. This processing is once ended.

  Note that the second jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has already been set in the process of step S601b each time an interrupt process is performed ( In step S601b, YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit start interval timer is 0 in the next step S611b, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. A determination will be made as to whether or not it has been done. In the processing of step S611b, as long as it is determined that the second jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S611b). ) Every time the second big hit game start process (step S190b) is performed, as the process of step S621b, the second big hit start interval timer is decremented by one.

  As a result of such processing, it is determined in the processing of step S611b that the second jackpot start interval timer has reached 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the jackpot game has elapsed. At this time (YES in step S611b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this process when the second process flag is updated to “4” to execute the big hit game (step S612b).

  For the second jackpot start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of jackpot symbol (the type determined by the second symbol random number).

[Second jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the second big hit game process (step S200b) executed when the second process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second jackpot game process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress is in the ON state as the process of step S701b. The second big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the process of step S703b described later at the start of the second big hit game, and is turned off by the process of step S723b described later at the end. Is set.

  Then, when the second big hit game execution flag is not on (NO in step S701b), the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S702b to start control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. Are set according to the type of jackpot (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round). Note that details of the opening mode corresponding to the type of jackpot will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the big hit game execution mode is set in this way, the main control MPU 4100a performs the second big hit game execution indicating that the control for the big hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S703b and step S704b. When the flag is turned on and the second big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

  That is, after the second big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress ( In step S701b, YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been consumed as the process of the next step S711b. In the process of step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not yet been digested, that is, it is in the middle of control related to the execution of the jackpot game (NO in step S711b). ) Every time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes the control according to the set release pattern as the process of step S712b. Thereby, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) of opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712b. As a result, a jackpot game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is realized.

  When such control is being performed, it is determined in the process of step S711b that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, it has been determined that the control for executing the jackpot game has been completed. (YES in step S711b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, step S742b) for generating a big hit game end interval.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a timer (second jackpot end interval timer) for counting the jackpot game end interval has been set (step S721b). As a result, if the second big hit end interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S721b), the second big hit end interval is processed as a process in steps S741b and S742b to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the second jackpot interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  Note that the second jackpot interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during an end interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit end interval timer is set in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer has already been set in the process of step S721b. In step S721b, YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second jackpot end interval timer is 0 in the next step S722b, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. It will be judged whether or not. In the process of step S722b, as long as it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S722b) ) Every time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a decrements the second big hit end interval timer by 1 as the process of step S731b.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S722b that the second jackpot end interval timer has reached 0, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. On the other hand (YES in step S722b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S723b to step S728b) for ending the jackpot game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the second jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the process of step S723b. Next, as the processing of step S724b, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state (probability variation state) is turned on, and the number of times of special symbol lottery (high probability state) ( Set the number of STs) to 70. The probability variation flag operated in the ON state here is operated in the OFF state when the number of STs is digested (step S513b) or a big hit before digestion (step S506b).

  In this embodiment, the probability changing function is activated for all jackpots. However, if the probability varying function is not activated according to the type of jackpot, the time-shortening function setting process (step S725b) described later is performed. As described above, first, a process for determining whether or not a big hit that activates the probability changing function may be executed. Then, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability variation function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability variation flag to the on state and sets the number of STs as in the process of step S724b described above. In the case of a big hit that activates the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only operates the probability changing flag to the ON state and does not have to set the ST count.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a executes time-shortening function setting processing for setting whether or not to activate the time-shortening function according to the type of jackpot and the gaming state as step S725b. The time-shortening function setting process is the same as the time-shortening function setting process (step S725a) in the first jackpot game process (FIG. 131), and is as described above with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing related to the probability changing function and the time-shortening function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a takes the first special symbol side into consideration in view of the possibility that the big hit game is not duplicated on the first special symbol side. The above-described interlocking flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned off (step S726b). Thereafter, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727b), and the second processing flag is updated to “0” on the assumption that the second special symbol that has been the big hit this time is in the processing stage that has been suspended and digested (step S727). S728b), this process is terminated. Thereby, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

  According to such a jackpot game process, until it is determined in the process of step 711b that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds, the corresponding big prize opening 2103 is opened according to the type of jackpot ( In step S712b), the player is repeatedly released, and the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of jackpot.

[Second small hit game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the second small hit game start process (step S230b) executed when the second process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the second small hit game start process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the timer (second small hit start interval timer) for measuring the interval before the start of the small hit game has been set as the process of step S801b. As a result, if the second small hitting start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S801b), the second small hitting start interval timer is set as the processing in steps S802b and S803b in order to start the pre-start interval of the small hitting game. When the small hitting start interval timer is set and the second small hitting interval start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

  Note that the second small hit interval start command set in the process of step S803b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the small hit game appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second small hitting start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second small hitting start interval timer has been set each time an interrupt process is performed (YES in step S801b). ) The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second small hitting start interval timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S811b, that is, whether the time set as the interval before starting the small hitting game has elapsed. Will be done. In the process of step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hitting start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the small hitting game has not elapsed (in step S811b) NO), each time the second small hit game start process (step S230b) is performed, the second small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821b.

  As a result of such processing, it is determined in the processing of step S811b that the second small hitting start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the small hitting game has elapsed. When this is done (YES in step S811b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this process when the second process flag is updated to “6” in order to execute the small hit game (step S812b).

[Second small hit game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the second small hit game process (step S240b) executed when the second process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the second small hit game process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second small hit game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress is in the ON state as the process of step S901b. To do. The second small hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100. The second small hit game execution flag is set to the on state by the process of step S903b described later at the start of the second small hit game, and is turned off by the process of step S921b described later at the end. Set to state.

  Then, when the second small hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a performs control related to execution of the small hit game using the attacker device 2100 in step S902b. As the processing, an opening mode (opening pattern) corresponding to the type of small hit and a control timer for measuring the time required for executing control according to the opening pattern are set. Note that there is only one type of small hit in this embodiment. Details of the small hit release mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a operates the second small hit game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress to the ON state as the processing of step S903b and step S904b. When the second small hit start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

  That is, after the second small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress each time an interrupt process is performed. (YES in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the timing of the control timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S911b, that is, the timing for ending the control for executing the small hit game has come. Will be judged. In the process of step S911b, as long as it is determined that the control timer is not 0, that is, it is in the middle of control related to the execution of the small hit game (NO in step S911b), the second small hit Each time the game process (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a first executes opening / closing control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set release pattern as the process of step S912b. As a result, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the opening / closing movement of the opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912b, and the attack device 2100 performs the opening / closing operation. Game will be realized.

  When such control is being performed, if it is determined in the process of step S911b that the control timer is 0, that is, it is determined that the control for executing the small hit game has been completed (step S911b). The main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S921b to step S929b) for ending the small hit game.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a operates the second small hit game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress as the process of step S921b. Next, considering that there is no possibility that the big hit game is duplicated on the first special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side should be linked to the game of the second special symbol. The interlock flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922b).

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a probability variation flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in an on state (step S923b). If the probability variation flag is on (YES in step S923b), it is determined whether the ST count is 0 (step S924b). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the probability variation state has ended, and the probability variation flag is set to an off state (step S925b).

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S926b when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S923b). Even if the probability variation flag is on, if the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S924b), the probability variation state continues, and thus the probability variation flag is kept on and the processing proceeds to step S926b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time reduction function is in operation as the process of step S926b. If the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S926b), it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is stopped (step S927b). In the present embodiment, the time reduction function is given together with the probability changing function when the first big hit A is generated, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time reduction function is stopped when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state, and it is determined that the time reduction function is continuously operated when the probability variation flag is in the ON state.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time-saving function, assuming that the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is satisfied when the probability variation flag is set to the off state in the process of step S925b described above (step S928b). Then, after the processing related to the probability changing function and the time-shortening function is performed in this way, the second processing flag is updated to “0”, assuming that the special symbol from which the small hit is derived is in the processing stage of being suspended and digested (step S929b). This process is terminated. Thereby, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second interlocking setting process]
Next, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) of the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second linkage setting process of the present embodiment.

  In the second interlock setting process, when a big hit is derived in the game on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is controlled so as to be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b).

  When the second special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001b), main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) in the second variation start process (FIG. 135). A stop symbol is set to a predetermined loss symbol (step S1002b).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set loss symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 (step S1003b). Further, the second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decoration symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004b). . Note that the processes in steps S1003b and S1004b are the same as steps S502b and S503b performed when the variation time is up in the above-described second variation process (FIG. 137).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same process as the process of steps S511b to S517b, which is executed when the second special symbol is lost in the second changing process (FIG. 137) described above, in the process of steps S1005b to S1011b. After executing, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001b), main control MPU 4100a continues the current second special symbol state (that is, the state where the second special symbol is not changing). (Step S1021b), and this process ends.

  Thus, in the second interlocking setting process, when the big hit is derived by the variation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is in the on state), the second special symbol being forcibly is lost. Stop at. Further, the second special symbol that is not changing is put into a standby state where the change is not started until the second interlocking flag is turned off. This avoids overlapping hits between the game on the second special symbol side and the game on the first special symbol side.

[Normal symbol processing]
Subsequently, the normal control process (step S15) of the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the normal control process, normal symbol variation control (ordinary symbol lottery) based on the passing of the game ball of the normal symbol gate 2301 is executed, and if a hit (per normal symbol) occurs in the normal symbol lottery, a movable piece (normal The winning assist control is executed to operate the electric accessory) 2111 to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b.

[Normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of normal control processing according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the gate sensor 2302 that detects the passing of the game ball to the general gate 2301 is in an ON state (step S2001). If the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal gate 2301 and is in the ON state (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU 4100a uses the normal random number of the normal symbol as a random number counter. And pass through the gate such as storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S2010). Details of the gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs one of five process processes (normal symbol normal process, normal symbol change time determination process, normal symbol change process, normal symbol stop process, normal electric accessory release process) according to the normal symbol process flag. One is selectively executed to end the normal control process.

  First, in the normal symbol normal process of step S2100, the main control MPU 4100a reads the normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped based on the read normal random number. Execute lottery processing.

  Next, in the normal symbol variation time determination process in step S2200, the main control MPU 4100a performs a lottery process on the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol random number. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol variation process in step S2300, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of waiting until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped.

  Next, in the normal symbol stop process in step S2400, the main control MPU 4100a has the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variable control stop is normal. A process of stopping the normal symbol variation display so as to be displayed on the symbol display 1189 is executed.

  Next, in the ordinary electric accessory release process of step S2500, the main control MPU 4100a is movable when the result of the lottery process for the aspect at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol becomes an aspect that suggests “per normal figure”. The piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to execute a process for controlling the game ball to be awarded to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, the gate passing process (step S2010) of the above-described normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate passing process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a obtains the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and the normal symbol holding number is a value less than “4” which is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not (step S2011).

  If the number of normal symbols held is less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), the main control MPU 4100a sets the normal symbol variable display control to a new hold state in step S2012. The process of S2014 is executed. First, as the processing of step S2012, the normal holding number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S2013, a normal random number and a common variable random number are acquired from a random number counter. Next, as the processing of step S2014, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Thereafter, the gate passing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a does not newly hold the normal symbol variable display control when the number of normal symbol hold is the maximum value (NO in step S2011). That is, this gate passage process is terminated without executing the processes in steps S2012 to S2014.

[Normal design normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) of the above-described normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described. The normal symbol normal process is executed when the normal symbol process flag indicates that this process should be performed in the above-described normal control process. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state (YES in step S2101), the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM (step S2102). Then, the normal hold count counter is decremented by 1 (step S2103), and the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is concerned. A random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner (step S2104).

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a stores the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passing of the game ball to the normal gate 2301 in order from the first (first) area of the normal symbol holding storage area having four storage areas. To do. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the normal gate 2301, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (step S2105). If the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state (YES in step S2105), a time-scheduled common figure determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2106), and the current gaming state is a non-short-time gaming state. If so (NO in step S2105), a non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2107). Thereafter, the common figure determination table selected in the process of step S2106 or step S2107 is compared with the ordinary random number read in the process of step S2102 (step S2108).

  Note that the common figure determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is short-time and used when the gaming state is non-short-time. And a non-time-saving common figure determination table. Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, in the short-time gaming state, when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, it is always elected per general-purpose figure and the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to operate the first start port 2101. It is controlled so that a game ball can be awarded to the special prize opening 2101b.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. In addition, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time-saving gaming state, even if a game ball passes to the general-purpose gate 2301, it is not won per normal-purpose figure. Therefore, through the opening operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 There is no control so that the game ball can be awarded to the special prize opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101. As described above, the normal symbol win may be obtained even in the non-short game state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the short-time game state, and the normal symbol lottery result is When winning, the movable piece 2111 of the special prize opening 2101b is opened for a period of time shorter than the short-time gaming state, for example, 0.1 seconds to allow the game ball to be awarded to the special prize opening 2101b and then closed. In this way, it is possible to make it impossible to win a game ball to the special prize opening 2101b.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the normal map is reached as a result of the process of step S2108 described above (step S2109). In the case of a normal symbol (YES in step S2109), after setting the normal symbol flag indicating that the variation of the normal symbol is won per normal symbol (step S2110), A symbol per common symbol is determined as a mode at the time when the variable control is stopped (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S2112).

  On the other hand, if the result of the process in step S2108 is a deviation (NO in step S2109), main control MPU 4100a is configured as a normal symbol variation control stop mode (ordinary symbol stop symbol). A slip-off symbol is determined (step S2111).

  After the process of step S2112 or step S2111 is completed, the main control MPU 4100a updates the above-described normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2200) (step S2113), and ends this process. .

  In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-shortening function does not operate is set to 0%, and the probability of winning the normal symbol in the time-shortening gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated is set to 100%. However, it is not limited to this. In the short-time gaming state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the winning port 2101a. In the state, it is only necessary to use a game specification of a normal symbol that can guide the player to make a right strike instead of a left strike (a winning probability per usual figure, a usual figure variation time, an opening pattern of a normal electric accessory). Specifically, in the short-time gaming state, the normal figure change function that increases the winning probability per normal figure compared to the non-short-time game state, the normal figure fluctuation shortening function that shortens the normal figure change time, and the opening operation by the ordinary electric accessory At least one function is provided among the extension functions for extending the electric power to extend (winning assist control). As a result, in the short-time gaming state, the winning assistance enhancement control that further strengthens the winning assistance control set in the non-short-time gaming state is executed.

[Special game specifications]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 146 (A), the winning winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (A), in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, when the winning probability is a normal state (low probability state), a big win is won with a probability of 1/399. In the case of a probability variation state (high probability state) in which the winning probability is set higher than the normal state, the player wins a big win with a probability of 1/45. In the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, only a big hit where the condition device operates is generated, and a small hit where the condition device does not operate does not occur. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127), the big hit determination is performed with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of lottery execution.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (B), the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the hit in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment includes a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery described above. In the second special symbol lottery, when the big hit winning probability is in the normal state (low probability state), the player wins the small hit with a probability of 390/399, and the big hit winning probability is in a probable state (high probability state). In the case of, it is won with a small hit with a probability of 44/45. The small win winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the gaming state, and does not change between the normal state and the probable change state unlike the big hit winning probability. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 135), a jackpot determination is performed with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of lottery execution. Alternatively, the small hit determination is performed with a winning probability of 44/45.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the small win winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high. In particular, in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, if a big win is not won, it is set so that a small win is always set. Note that if you do not win a big win in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, you do not necessarily have to win a small bonus. If you do not win a big win in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, you lose It is only necessary that the player wins the jackpot with a probability much higher than the probability (for example, the jackpot winning probability is 1/45, the jackpot winning probability is 40/45, the loss probability is 4/45, etc.).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 146 (C), the jackpot type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), the big hit of this embodiment includes the first big hit A and the first big hit B that can be generated in the first special symbol lottery, and the second big hit that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of big hits, A and the second big hit B, are provided.

  The first big hit A is generated with a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol A. Further, the first big hit B is generated with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol B.

  The second big hit A is generated with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol A. The second big hit B is generated with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol B.

  These four types of big hits are probable that the game state after the big hit game is transferred to a probable change state with a probability of 100%, and the probable change state is continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game is executed 70 times. Provided with functions. Further, the first big hit A can be given a time saving function for performing a winning assist control for assisting a winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 by operating the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111. Provided.

  The opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 is set according to the type of the big hit. The first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit A, and the second big hit B are the opening patterns A, B, C, respectively. And D are set. Here, the number of award balls that a player can acquire is changed by the opening pattern to enhance the interest of the big hit game.

  The opening patterns A to C are set so that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is long and the player can acquire a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are jackpot games in which round games are performed four times, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings are set for each round so that the player can acquire 500 balls as winning balls. The opening pattern C is a big hit game in which round games are performed 16 times, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings are set for each round so that the player can acquire 2000 balls as prize balls.

  On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set so that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is short and the player cannot acquire a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern D is a big hit game in which round games are performed 16 times, and is set so that the player cannot substantially acquire a prize ball by repeating high-speed opening with a short opening time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (D), the small hit type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery is provided in the small hit of the present embodiment. The second small symbol C is generated with a probability of 100% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small symbol. At this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol C. In addition, an opening pattern E is set as an opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E is provided such that a single opening time is short and a winning ball can be obtained by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning in which a player hits a game ball in the gaming area in order to win the winning prize opening 2103, but in a gaming area in which the winning prize opening 2103 is arranged. This is a winning that can be obtained when the game ball that has been thrown flows down in a position where it can accidentally win when the grand prize opening 2103 is opened. At the second small hit C, if the player has hit the game ball with the right hand, the number of rounds and one opening time of the big prize opening 2103 so that about 1 to 2 winnings can be expected accidentally. Is set. When about 1-2 balls are won in the big winning opening 2103 by the second small hit C, about 15-30 balls can be obtained.

  In the high-probability non-short game state (rush mode) of the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided so that the player continuously hits the game ball with a right strike to make the rush mode. It is possible to promote an accidental winning based on the second small hit C generated in the middle, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the majority of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode (total number of issued balls). Occupy. In the present embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) of the ST number (70 times) is generated during the rush mode, the above-mentioned winning ball (2000 balls) or more by the big hit is 2100 (maximum 2100 balls). ) Can be hoped for, so there will be no decline in the interest of the game due to the occurrence of small hits where almost no prize balls can be obtained. Rather, since the small hit game that is generated a plurality of times than the single big hit game continues the interest of the player in the game, the interest of the series of games in the rush mode can be enhanced.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 146 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of this embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). When the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 30 to 60 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect, and 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode. Is set. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode.

  Here, the normal mode is a game mode in which the player is urged to win a game ball (that is, “left-handed”) to the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101, and the big winning probability of the special symbol lottery Indicates a normal game state (low probability state) and a normal game state in which the time-shortening function is not given. The rush preparation mode is a game mode that prompts the player to win a game ball in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (that is, “right-handed”). Indicates a probable state (high probability state) and a high-probability time-short game state to which a time-shortening function is provided. The rush mode is a game mode that prompts the player to win a game ball in the second starting port 2102 (that is, “right-handed”), and the special symbol lottery winning probability is a probable change state (high probability) State) and a high-accuracy non-short-time game state in which the short-time function is not given. Note that the high-probability short-time gaming state in the rush preparation mode is a gaming state that can be shifted to when the first big hit A is generated.

  As described above, in the special symbol game provided to the player, the above-mentioned specifications (winning probability, winning type, variation time, etc.) change according to the gaming state. Then, the transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is a special number corresponding to the given number of STs (here, 70 times). Triggered by digestion of symbol lottery (variation).

[Game state transition]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 147 to FIG. 149, the transition of the gaming state and the control of the simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the present embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is a normal game state (normal mode). In the normal gaming state, the game ball is fired at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center object 2500 (so-called “left-handed”), so that the game ball is awarded to the regular winning port 2101a of the first start port 2101. Is the best game method for the player.

  Here, the second start port 2102 of the present embodiment can easily win a game ball that has been launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and only follows the flow path. Is provided. The second special symbol lottery based on winning at the second starting port 2102 has a high winning probability of winning a winning ball (390/399 in the normal state and 44/45 in the probable state). With this, the player strikes right from the start of the game and attempts to win a game ball in the second start port 2102. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (E) described above, the variation of the second special symbol in the gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended. The time is set to a long time fluctuation (600 seconds). Thus, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started in both modes, it takes a long time until the display is stopped (the lottery result is determined), so that it is possible to suppress the player's right strike. .

  Since the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment is always open and easy to win, the second special in the gaming state where the winning is not recommended to suppress the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Although the symbol variation time is set to a long time, the present invention is not limited to this. A state conversion member is provided that can convert the second start port 2102 into an easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state, and in a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) that does not recommend winning of a game ball into the second start port 2102 You may make it set to a difficult state. In this embodiment, in order to avoid the complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state conversion member and to provide a game that is easy to obtain for the player, it is possible for the player to change the variation time according to the game state. Guides you to play in the best way.

  Accordingly, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball mainly into the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a) is executed. When the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the normal gaming state is continued. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, the high probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode, The first advantageous gaming state is entered. Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes the first big hit B, the game shifts to a high probability non-short game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility of finding the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state (occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the player is given a privilege that is advantageous to the player, such as the acquisition of a prize ball and the provision of a probabilistic change function and a time-shortening function due to the occurrence of the first big hit A.

  In the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), by launching a game ball (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center object 2500, a special prize-winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101 is obtained. It is the best game method for a player to win a game ball.

  Here, when the right-handed game ball passes through the general map gate 2301 disposed in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center object 2500, the time shortening function is activated, so that the normal symbol per lot is derived in the normal symbol lottery. (Probability of 100% per common figure in the short-time state). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101. Further, as described above, in the short-time gaming state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the winning port 2101a. Since it is set high, the player hits the right and aims at the special prize opening 2101b.

  Accordingly, the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) is executed in the high probability short-time gaming state. And when the result of special symbol lottery loses 70 times continuously, it shifts to a normal gaming state (normal mode). In addition, if a result of the first big hit A is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST number is reset to 70 times and the gaming state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous gaming state) Continue. Further, when the result of the first big hit B is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the state shifts to the high probability non-short game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be found in the high probability short-time gaming state (occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high probability non-time short gaming state (rush mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the player is given a privilege that is advantageous to the player, such as the acquisition of a prize ball and the addition of a probability changing function, by the occurrence of the first big hit B.

  In the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode), the game ball is fired at the second start port 2102 by launching the game ball (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center object 2500. This is the best game method for the player.

  Here, the second start port 2102 of the present embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. For this reason, the right-handed game ball reaches the second start port 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the special gate 2301 and the special prize opening 2101b, but the time reduction function does not operate, so the normal gate Even if it passes through 2301, the normal figure (that is, the easy winning state of the special winning opening 2101 b by the operation of the movable piece 2111) does not occur. Therefore, the game ball that is hit right in the high-probability non-short game state (rush mode) almost wins the second start port 2102.

  Therefore, in the high-probability non-short-time gaming state, the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is executed. The execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery that is put on hold in the gaming state before the transition when the gaming state transitions. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in this gaming state becomes a result that is not a big hit for 70 consecutive times, the state shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In addition, if a result that is one of the big hits is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST number is reset to 70 times and the gaming state (rush mode, second advantageous gaming state) is changed. continue.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-short-time gaming state, if a big win is not derived with a probability of 1/45, a small winning is always derived. In the small hit game generated at this time, the player can acquire a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a prize ball, although it does not reach the number of game balls that can be acquired by the big hit game. Therefore, if it becomes this game state, a player can acquire the prize ball by a small hit game for every execution of the 2nd special symbol lottery until the next big hit. In this gaming state, up to 70 small hit games can occur continuously. That is, a series of games of the second special symbol until the next big hit occurs becomes a privilege game that can win a prize ball.

  Note that the variation times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high probability non-short game state are both set to a short time (1 second). Since it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery in this gaming state, the first special symbol fluctuation time is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time to find out the result of the first special symbol lottery It is also possible to do. However, in the present embodiment, the probability variation function grant period is controlled by the number of executions of the special symbol (ST number), and the ST number is counted at the start of the variation of the special symbol. For this reason, when the variation time of the first special symbol to which the probability variation function is to be given becomes long, the first special symbol has the probability variation function but the second special symbol has not the probability variation function. Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to the same short time as the second special symbol, an event having a different probability state between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous variation state. Occurrence (obfuscation of the end of the probability variation state) is prevented. As a modification, when the end of the probability variation function grant period is controlled until the next big hit, the variation time of the first special symbol in this gaming state may be set to a long time. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol lottery derives a big hit, it is possible to forcibly stop the other special symbol lottery that is simultaneously changing. It will never happen.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), a winning ball can be obtained in a small hit game of the second special symbol even if the big hit is not derived, and the total number of winning balls Is more than the number of prize balls that can be won in the jackpot game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous gaming state) but the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode, second advantageous gaming state).

  Since the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) is a gaming state that can occur when the first big hit B is derived in the first special symbol lottery, the player must first play the normal gaming state (normal mode) or high A game aiming to win a game ball at the first starting port 2101 is performed in the short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode). Then, when the gaming state shifts to the high probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit B, the player then plays a game aiming to win a game ball to the second starting port 2102 Do.

[Control timing chart for each gaming state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be changed simultaneously. However, the big hit game and the small hit game using the attacker device 2100 cannot be generated in duplicate in both games. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the timing of the simultaneous variation control in each gaming state will be described.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart for explaining the simultaneous variation control of this embodiment. FIG. 148 (A) is an example of the interlock stop control of the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. 148 (B) is the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) in the rush mode. ) Is an example of interlocking stop control.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the game ball wins the second start port 2102 in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high accuracy time short game state), the second special symbol changes. The time (second variation time) is set to 600 seconds, and the long time variation starts to be executed. When a game ball wins the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a or special winning port 2101b), the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds, One special symbol change is executed.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, when the big hit is derived, the fluctuation is stopped at the stop symbol on the first big hit (step S502a), and the game on the second special symbol side is linked to the first special symbol side. The interlock flag (second interlock flag) to be set is set to the on state (step S505a). Then, the first big hit game is executed (steps S190a and S200a).

  Then, in the game on the second special symbol side, in response to the second interlock flag being turned on, the second interlock setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed, and the second special symbol being changed is displayed. The display is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol of detachment (step S1003b).

  Here, the second interlock flag is a big hit game or a small hit where the attack device 2100 is used similarly on the second special symbol side when the first big hit game using the attacker device 2100 is executed on the first special symbol side. Although this flag is provided to avoid the game being executed, it is also a flag necessary for preparing for the rush mode entry.

  Specifically, when the first big hit B occurs in the normal mode (normal gaming state) and the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time gaming state), the gaming state after the end of the first big hit game is the rush mode (high (Probable non-short game state). In the rush mode after the transition, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 becomes mainstream. At this time, if the variation of the second special symbol started before the transition is continued, the game on the second special symbol side waits for the variation to enter a standby state. Therefore, the second interlock flag is a flag necessary for starting the game in the rush mode without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (B), immediately after the transition to the rush mode (high-probability non-short game state), the variation of the first special symbol held in the game state before the transition is executed. The variation time of the first special symbol at this time is set to a short time (1 second). In the rush mode, the game of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 is mainstream. The second start opening 2102 is a winning opening that can be won even if a player is right-handed, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second. Therefore, the variation of the second special symbol frequently occurs. Further, the second special symbol that does not derive the big hit derives the small hit.

  Therefore, in the game on the second special symbol side, the variation of the second special symbol and the small hit game (second small hit game) are alternately repeated until the next big hit occurs. Each time the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502b), an interlock flag (first interlock flag) that links the game on the first special symbol side to the second special symbol side is set to the on state. (Step S532b). Then, the second small hit game is executed (steps S230b and S240b), and when the second small hit game ends, the first interlock flag is returned to the off state (step S922b).

  In the game on the first special symbol side, the first interlock setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed in response to the first interlock flag being turned on. At this time, the first special symbol that has not started to change is put into a standby state so as not to start changing (step S1021a), and when the first interlock flag is turned off, the change is started (step S130a). In addition, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol that is out of place (step S1003a).

  As described above, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which the game on the first special symbol side becomes mainstream, the execution frequency of the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) is high, and the rush mode in which the game on the second special symbol side becomes mainstream. Then, the execution frequency of the first linkage setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In the present embodiment, there is a concern that the hit game may be duplicated between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. When a win is obtained, the game on the other side is controlled at the time by the interlocking setting process.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment.

  When a player starts a game in the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 such as a state in which the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, first, the normal mode starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to strike left and aim at the regular winning opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101. Here, if the launching force of the game ball at the beginning of the shot is too strong and the player hits the right, and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is long. Long time fluctuation is executed.

  After that, when the player adjusts the firing force and makes a left turn, and the game ball wins the regular winning port 2101a of the first starting port 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 to 60 seconds depending on the selected variation pattern. In a game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery for winning a big hit with a probability of 1/399 is executed. When the first big hit A is won, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the big hit symbol A and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the on state, the variation of the second special symbol in the long-time variation state is forcibly removed and is stopped and displayed with the symbol. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlock flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

  In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to strike right and aim at the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a probability changing function of 70 ST times and a time saving function for performing winning assistance control for facilitating winning to the special winning opening 2101b are provided.

  When the player makes a right strike and a game ball wins a special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the first special symbol is changed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 to 60 seconds depending on the selected variation pattern. In a game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery that wins a big hit with a probability of 1/45 is executed. Then, the ST count is decremented by 1 when the first special symbol starts to change. When the first big hit B is won when the ST count is 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the big hit symbol B and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, the second interlock flag is set to the on state, but the state is maintained because the second special symbol is not changed. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlock flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim at the second starting port 2102. Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the probability changing function of the ST number of 70 times is provided. Here, the number of STs whose count value at the end of the rush preparation mode was 68 is counted again from the count value of 70.

  Here, the player continues to make a right turn. The game ball that has been hit to the right does not enter the special winning opening 2101b because the time-shortening function does not operate, and further wins the second starting opening 2102 below. Winning at the second starting port 2102 is easy even for a novice game player, so winning of game balls at the second starting port 2102 occurs frequently. Since the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol at this time is set to 1 second, the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  In a game on the second special symbol side, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a big win is won with a probability of 1/45, and when a big win is not won, a second special symbol lottery is won. Then, the ST count is updated by 1 when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate. As a result of the second special symbol lottery, when a small hit is made, the variation is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, the first interlock flag is set to the on state while the second small hit game is executed.

  In addition, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b generated in the rush preparation mode before the transition is in a suspended state, and the fluctuation of these first special symbols Will be executed.

  In a game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery that wins a big hit with a probability of 1/45 is executed. The variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol at this time is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, since the small hit game frequently occurs in the game on the second special symbol side, the first interlock flag is also frequently set to the on state. Therefore, if the first special symbol is fluctuating when the second special symbol is fluctuated, it is forcibly stopped and displayed with the symbol. And since the 1st interlocking flag is returned to an OFF state with the end of the 2nd small hit game, the change of the following 1st special symbol is started. The ST count is also updated by one subtraction at the start of the first special symbol variation.

  As described above, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are efficiently executed in a short time, so that the subtraction speed of the ST number is also fast. Then, until the count value of the ST number becomes 0 or the next big hit is won, the variation of the second special symbol and the second small hit game are repeatedly executed alternately.

  In the rush mode of the present embodiment, when the big win is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small win is won, so the second small win game occurs frequently. The number of award balls that can be acquired during the rush mode is 2100 balls when the number of ST balls (70 times) wins a small win, assuming that the number of prize balls for the second small hit game is 30 balls. This is larger than the maximum number of winning balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of this embodiment. Therefore, the series of second small hit games in the rush mode can be a privilege game comparable to the big hit game. In addition, since there is a possibility of a big hit game with a probability of 1/45 during the rush mode, the rush mode is the most advantageous (to be aimed at) game mode for the player.

  Note that it is highly likely that the ST count in the rush mode will be beneficial to the player if it is digested by the number of changes in the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable that the first special symbol held in the rush mode is not carried over. Therefore, when the transition to the rush mode is found, that is, when it is found that the first big hit B is won in the game mode before the transition, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 is suppressed. Such control may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled so that the operation of the short-time function for assisting winning in the special winning opening 2101b is stopped or the winning assist function is lowered. In addition, some notification effect may be performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[Peripheral control board side control]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. FIG.

[Sub-main processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of sub-main processing according to the present embodiment. The sub-main process is a process executed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs an initial setting process (step S3001). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” is started (step S3002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. A process of setting the flag T and resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”.

  If the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” (YES in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “0” (step S3003), and then performs 16 ms steady processing. It executes (step S3004). In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 4100 is executed.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a finishes the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns to the process of step S3002, and repeats the processes of steps S3003 to S3004 described above every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms.

  On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set to “1” (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”) (NO in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a continues until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Perform loop processing.

[16ms steady processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 16 ms steady process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process (FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of 16 ms steady processing according to the present embodiment.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a first executes a command analysis process for analyzing a command received from the main control board 4100 (step S3101). Next, the effect control process for controlling the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control command (such as the received variation pattern command) analyzed in the command analysis process is executed (step S3102).

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a executes sound control processing for controlling sounds output from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process for controlling the effects of lamps and LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed (step S3104). In addition, information for performing effects such as processing for transmitting lamp / LED lighting signals to the lamp driving board 3041 and processing for transmitting driving signals to the drive motor for operating various rendering units to the motor driving board 3045 are output. The information output process is executed (step S3105). Thereafter, a random number update process for updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process in step S3102 is executed (step S3106), and the 16 ms steady process ends.

  The 16 ms steady process is normally completed within 16 ms. Even if the peripheral control MPU 4140a takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the 16 ms steady process from the beginning (the process of step S3101) when 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the process. There is nothing. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set (step S3002) in the sub main process, and the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub main process after the end of the 16 ms steady process. Is determined (YES in step S3002), the next 16 ms steady process is started.

  In the present embodiment, the random number update process (step S3106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process (FIG. 150).

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the first based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. 2. A control structure capable of simultaneously changing the special symbol, and a winning area to be aimed by the player according to the gaming state (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b, second start port 2102) and game ball driving operation A plurality of game states are provided so that (right strike (second game state) and left strike (first game state)) are different. In the present embodiment, the game display beginner is provided with a game state display 1183 including an LED capable of clearly informing the player of “right-handed” (second game state) on the function display unit 1180. Also, it is possible to smoothly switch the way of hitting (striking operation) with the transition of the game state without making a mistake in hitting “left-handed” and “right-handed”.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a control signal for controlling the gaming state display 1183 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, whereby “right-handed” is given to the player in the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may notify. Normally, a liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in front view of the player (front line of sight). Therefore, when “right-handed” is notified in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can switch to an appropriate driving method (driving operation) without moving his / her line of sight to the left end (function display unit 1180) when viewed from the front. It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of gaming states include a normal gaming state (normal mode), a high-accuracy short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), and a high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state (rush mode). In the rush mode, each time the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 that is easy for a game beginner to win is performed, the player is given an opportunity to acquire a prize ball (small hit game or Jackpot game) is awarded. Further, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player in the rush mode tends to be higher than the ratio of game balls that can be acquired in the big hit game. Thereby, since a series of small hit games in the rush mode can be expected to be able to give more game balls than a big hit game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game related to the small hit game.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the rush mode (second advantageous game state) of the high-accuracy non-short-time game state (second advantageous game state) is a high-accuracy short-time game state (rush preparation) that activates a time-short function generally advantageous to the player. The game state is more advantageous to the player than the mode and the first advantageous game state. If the current game mode is the rush mode (high-probability non-short-time gaming state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time-saving function, Control to continue the rush mode without operating. Since the game that overturns the existing concept that it is more advantageous for the player to operate (provide) the time-shortening function can be provided by the small hit game of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 When the second special symbol based is changed at the same time, when one hit (big hit, small hit) is derived, the other in the change is forcibly discontinued and displayed in a stopped manner. This avoids overlapping hits between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and before and after the transition when transitioning to another gaming state triggered by the big hit In addition, it is possible to prevent the other variation from being executed.

(Second Embodiment)
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention has the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the game ball to the second starting port 2102. A control structure that can simultaneously vary the second special symbol based on the winning of the prize. In such control that can be varied simultaneously, in order to avoid the occurrence of a specific game (small hit game, big hit game) overlapping between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. Control is required. In the first embodiment described above, when one special symbol stops changing with a stop symbol indicating a specific result (small hit, big hit), if the other special symbol is changing, the stopped symbol is replaced with the off symbol. By controlling so that the other special symbol does not fluctuate during a specific game, a control structure that can be fluctuated simultaneously is formed.

  In the second embodiment, various control patterns of a control structure that can be changed simultaneously will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 186.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Members having the same functions as those of the game board 4 (see FIG. 114) of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. Here, the characteristic structure in the game board 4 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated.

  In the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment, a general gate 2301, a second starting port 2102, a special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, and a big winning port 2103 are arranged in order from the upstream. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right passage 2545 first reaches the usual gate 2301. Then, when the game ball passes through the ordinary gate 2301, the normal symbol lottery is executed. Further, a second start port 2102 is disposed below the usual gate 2301. The second starting port is provided so as to be able to accept game balls that have passed through the usual gate 2301 and those that have not passed through. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2102, the second special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied.

  A special prize-winning port 2101 b of the first starting port 2101 is disposed immediately below the second starting port 2102. The special prize opening 2101b is provided with a pair of movable members (ordinary electric accessories) 2111 that open in the shape of an inverted “c” at the top and convert the game ball into a state in which it is easy to receive a game ball (an easy reception state). The pair of movable members 2111 normally maintain a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. Since the special winning opening 2101b is provided with the second start opening 2102 above, the special winning opening 2101b is configured not to accept a game ball when the movable member 2111 is closed. The movable member 2111 is converted from the closed state to the easy-to-accept state when the normal symbol lottery is won, thereby allowing the game ball to be accepted into the special prize opening 2101b. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, below the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the winning of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery becomes an opening operation opportunity, and at the time of operation, the game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 can be received. An attacker device 2100 is provided. The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is a so-called combi-attacker device that opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 by opening and closing operations of two opening and closing members (first opening and closing member 2106a and second opening and closing member 2106b) that slide in the front-rear direction. Details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is disposed on the lower left part of the front surface of the front component member 1110 and outside the outer rail 1111. In the first embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with an LED that can clearly notify the timing of “right-handed” (second gaming state) on the gaming status indicator 1183. In this embodiment, the gaming status display 1180 is displayed. A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the device 1183. Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a 7-segment display 1920 is disposed in the upper right part of the center accessory 2500 and in the upper right part of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The 7-segment display 1920 is display-controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920 according to the gaming state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment and the gaming board 4 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 114) are different in configuration as described above, but their gaming characteristics (recommended gaming mode transitions). The recommended driving operation in the game mode is the same.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 (A) to 153 (C), configurations of the attacker device 2100, the function display unit 1180, and the 7-segment display 1920 according to the second embodiment will be described.

[Attacker device]
FIG. 153 (A) is a simplified structural diagram of an attacker device 2100 provided in the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

  The attacker device 2100 has an extra prize opening 2103, a first opening / closing member 2106a and a second opening / closing member 2106b operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 for opening and closing the two opening / closing members (FIG. 118). Reference). The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is characterized in that two opening / closing members (a first opening / closing member 2106a and a second opening / closing member 2106b) are provided for one big winning opening 2103.

  The first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b normally maintain a closed state in which the grand prize opening 2103 is closed so that a game ball is not received in the big prize opening 2103. The game ball that has flowed down the game area on the right side is configured as a part of the guide channel 2110 that guides the game ball to the game area below the center accessory 2500.

  Then, when winning occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, after the variable display related to the lottery is finished, the drive control of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 is performed, and the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member The sliding opening / closing operation of the member 2106b in the front-rear direction is performed. The opening / closing operations of the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b are controlled at the same timing.

  Here, the first opening / closing member 2106 a and the second opening / closing member 2106 b are arranged in parallel with an interval between the upstream side and the downstream side of the guide channel 2110. In other words, the special winning opening 2103 has two openings that can receive a game ball when being opened. Note that the special winning opening 2103 is configured so that the game balls are merged inside regardless of the opening from which the game balls are received, and the reception of the game balls is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

  As described above, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 with two openings formed by the upstream first opening / closing member 2106a and the downstream second opening / closing member 2106b. A combination tacker structure is provided that allows a plurality of game balls rolling in the guide channel 2110 from upstream to downstream by being opened once to be received in the special winning opening 2103.

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153 (B) is an enlarged front view of the function display unit 1180 provided in the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The function display unit 1180 of this embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 made up of two LEDs for informing that it is time to perform “right-handed” above the display unit 1181. Below the right-handed state indicator 1192, four LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2103 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win”. And a first special symbol memory display 1184 comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the reception of the game ball to the first start port 2101 disposed below the round indicator 1190. The lottery result (first special lottery result) of the first special symbol placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by accepting a game ball into the first starting port 2101 is used as the first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 made up of eight LED groups for display is provided. Also, below the first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol storage indicator 1187 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of game balls to the second starting port 2102; For displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol placed on the left side of the special symbol memory display 1187 and drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2102 as the second special symbol. A second special symbol display 1186 made up of eight LED groups is provided.

  Also, below the display unit 1181, a game state indicator 1183 composed of two LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and a normal symbol composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the passage of the general gate 2301. A memory display 1188 and a normal symbol display 1189 composed of two LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the general gate 2301 as a normal symbol are provided side by side. Yes.

  The right-handed state indicator 1192 of this embodiment turns on the LED when it is time to perform “right-handed” (second gaming state) to notify the player of “right-handed”. Note that the LED is turned off when it is time to perform “left-handed” (first gaming state).

  In the present embodiment, when the passing of a game ball to the general gate 2301 that is generated by “right-handed” is detected at the timing of “left-handed”, a signal that warns the player is a main control board. 4100 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a message for warning that the liquid crystal display device 1900 returns to the left-handed and sounds an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). Thereafter, if “right-handed” is detected, penalty control is performed so as to impose a predetermined penalty that is disadvantageous to the player.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 153 (C) is an enlarged front view of a 7-segment display 1920 provided in the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010.

  The 7-segment display 1920 displays information regarding the fluctuation display (lottery process) and the number of holds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The 7-segment display 1920 displays a first special symbol display unit 1921 including a 7-segment LED for displaying a variation display (lottery result) of the first special symbol, and a number for holding the first special symbol. A first special symbol storage display unit 1922 composed of two LEDs, a fourth symbol display unit 1923 composed of one LED for displaying a variation of the first special symbol, and a variation of the second special symbol. A second special symbol display unit 1924 composed of a 7-segment LED for displaying a display (lottery result), and a second special symbol storage display unit 1925 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserved second special symbols; A fourth symbol display unit 1926 including one LED for displaying the fourth symbol related to the variable display of the second special symbol is provided.

  The 7-segment LED constituting the first special symbol display unit 1921 and the second special symbol display unit 1924 indicates that the variable display is being performed by sequentially turning on and off (that is, blinking) of each segment, The change result (lottery result) is displayed by lighting the segment. During standby, the same segment is lit as when the lottery result is off.

  The two LEDs constituting the first special symbol memory display unit 1922 are turned off when the number of holding is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of holding is “1”, and the lower LED is turned off, When the number of holds is “2”, both LEDs are lit, when the number of holds is “3”, the upper LED blinks, the lower LED is lit, and when the number of holds is “4”, both LEDs are lit. Flashes.

  The two LEDs constituting the second special symbol memory display unit 1925 are turned off when the number of holding is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of holding is “1”, and the lower LED is turned off, When the number of holds is “2”, both LEDs are lit. In the present embodiment, it is possible to store “1” hold of the second special symbol.

  One LED constituting the 4th symbol display section 1923, 1926 can emit light in red and green instead of single color light emission, and is repeatedly turned on and off in red during fluctuation display, and in green when the fluctuation results are out of sync. Lights up and lights up in red when the fluctuation result is a hit (big hit, small hit).

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, and the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is done.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the display device that displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is switched according to the gaming state. The transition of the gaming state is triggered by the winning of the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the end of the given number of STs. When the big hit is triggered, the special symbol that the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 display is switched after the big hit game ends. Also, when the end of the ST number is triggered, when the ST final variation ends and the probability variation flag is set to OFF (step S513a in FIG. 129, step S513b in FIG. 137), the liquid crystal display devices 1900 and 7 The special symbol to be displayed by the segment display 1920 is switched.

[Special game specifications]
Subsequently, FIG. 154 is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, a description will be given of a spec different from the game spec (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment described above.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 154 (A) and 154 (B), in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation state is 1/51 for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Also, the small win winning probability is always 1/3.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), there are four types of jackpot types, which are not changed, but the presence / absence of the time saving function varies depending on the winning game state. In the present embodiment, a time reduction function is given to the big hits other than the big hit B of the first special symbol. Therefore, in order to enter the rush mode, the big hit B of the first special symbol can only be triggered. Further, as shown in the above-mentioned time-shortening function setting process (FIG. 132), the time-shortening function is not given to the big hit that occurs in the rush mode.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (D), in this embodiment, the number of small hits increases. In this embodiment, the second small hit D is provided in addition to the second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C and the second small hit D are different in the manner of opening the big winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) and is opened only once, whereas the opening pattern F has a shorter opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds). ) Opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, the second small hit C or the second small hit D is generated with a probability of 50%.

  Note that, in the opening pattern E and the opening pattern F, the opening pattern F can be expected to win the big winning opening 2103. As described above, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment includes the big winning opening 2103 that is open at two places upstream and downstream of the guide channel 2110 where the game ball flows down and can receive the game ball. Even if the opening time is short, the opening pattern F, which is opened twice, has a higher expectation of winning the game ball.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation time of the second special symbol varies depending on the variation result. The fluctuation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a win is a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time when it is off is a long-time fluctuation of 600 seconds. When the game mode is the rush mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is a shortened variation having a width of 1 to 30 seconds.

[Game state transition]
Subsequently, FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game state transition (FIG. 147) in the first embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment described above, the rush preparation mode can be shifted when the first big hit A (FIG. 146) occurs, but in the present embodiment, the first big hit A, the second big hit A, and the second big hit A in the normal mode. Transition can be triggered by the occurrence of two big hits B (FIG. 154). The transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode is due to the transition to the normal mode due to the variation of the ST number or the transition to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first big hit B. In addition, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) is due to the fluctuation of the ST number. In the rush mode, the mode does not change regardless of which big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode derives a win (small hit, big hit), the fluctuation time is reduced by 1 second. Originally, the game mode that promotes the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the rush mode, but in this case, there is a high possibility that the winning to the second starting port 2102 is targeted in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol lottery derives a deviation, it is set to a long time fluctuation (600 seconds), or even if the game ball is launched toward the attacker device 2100 after the small hit result is confirmed, it is small. In the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, it is possible to set the opening timing so as not to be in time for the opening of the big prize opening 2103 in the winning game or to make it difficult to guess the opening pattern by providing a plurality of opening modes. Reduce the execution efficiency of special symbol lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the rush preparation mode in which the first start opening 2101 is awarded to the special winning opening 2101b, that is, “right-handed” is recommended. In the first embodiment, even if a game ball is won at the second starting port 2102 after being “right-handed”, the second special symbol changes for a long time, so that the interest can only be found in the first special symbol change. There wasn't. However, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode is a short time when the hit result is derived, and the short-time fluctuation occurs with a probability of 1/3 or more. And if it becomes a big hit result by the 2nd special symbol lottery, ST number will be newly given and a time shortening function will also be continued. For this reason, interest can be found in the variation of the second special symbol, and the game performance in the rush preparation mode is improved.

[Control pattern]
Next, referring to FIG. 156, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 The outline of the control pattern in the control structure capable of simultaneously changing the second special symbol based on the above will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure. Hereinafter, an outline of the four control patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (A) to (D).

  First, FIG. 156 (A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. As described in the first embodiment, the basic control pattern is to stop the fluctuation by forcibly replacing the special symbol in the other variation with the result of the deviation when the special symbol is a hit result. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops at the small hit stop symbol, the first special symbol being changed is changed from the determined big hit stop symbol to the predetermined off stop symbol. Replaced and stopped fluctuating at the stoppage symbol.

  Specifically, according to the control process of the first embodiment, in the second variation processing (FIG. 137) related to the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is timed up, and the small hit stop symbol varies. Is stopped, the interlock flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (YES in step S501b → step S502b → step S503b → NO in step S504b → YES in step S531b → S532b). Thereby, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) regarding the first special symbol, the first interlock setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the variation of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a). Step S250a).

  In the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133), the changing first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a predetermined off symbol (YES in step S1001a → step S1002a → step S1003a). Here, the process of determining whether or not the first special symbol is a win (a hit determination process) is a step of a first variation start process (FIG. 127) executed when the first special symbol starts to vary. This is executed in S307a, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the fluctuation starts. Therefore, in the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133), the determined stop symbol (here, the big hit symbol) is replaced with a predetermined off symbol.

  As described above, in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, the interlock flag that links the game on the other special symbol side to the one special symbol side is turned on at the timing when one special symbol for deriving the hit stops. Set to state. For this reason, the other special symbol that occurs during the fluctuation of one special symbol is forced to be disengaged by the interlock stop control, but the presence / absence of the interlock stop control cannot be determined at the start of the variation, so the hit determination process (Lottery process) had to be executed.

  In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, the interlock flag is set to the on state at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the hit starts to change, and the other special symbol is set to the interlock flag at the start of the change. An example will be described in which, if is in the ON state, the change determination is stopped without executing the hit determination process (without lottery) with the off symbol.

  Details of the control process of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166.

  Next, FIG. 156 (B) is a timing chart showing a priority control pattern. The priority control pattern is to preferentially execute a special symbol for deriving a result advantageous to the player by comparing the results derived from both special symbols, and to variably stop the other special symbol by detaching it.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when the variation for deriving the big hit with the second special symbol is executed, if the variation for deriving the big hit with the first special symbol occurs, both lotteries As a result of the comparison, the first special symbol for deriving the jackpot advantageous for the player is variably stopped at the jackpot symbol. The second special symbol replaces the determined small hit stop symbol with a predetermined loss stop symbol, and variably stops at the loss stop symbol.

  In this way, in the priority control pattern, the special symbol to be prioritized is determined among the special symbols that change simultaneously according to the lottery result derived by the special symbol, that is, the special symbol that derives a more advantageous result for the player is given priority. Can be executed. In the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, even if a special symbol that is a big hit in the hit determination at the start of fluctuation, if the other special symbol that is the other small hit first fluctuates first, it is forcibly disengaged. It has been set, but you will not miss this special symbol that will be a big hit. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the gaming nature inherent to the gaming machine rather than the basic control pattern.

  Details of the priority control pattern control process in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175.

  Next, FIG. 156 (C) is a timing chart showing an interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern is one in which the other special symbol is suspended while the other special symbol is interrupted while the winning game based on the winning result derived by one special symbol is performed, and the remaining special symbol is resumed after the winning game is finished. It is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), when a variation for deriving a big hit with the second special symbol is executed and a variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is a small hit When the fluctuation is stopped at the symbol, the first special symbol interrupts the temporary fluctuation. Then, a small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol interrupts the fluctuation. When the small hit game ends, the first special symbol resumes the interrupted variation.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably executed as a result based on the acquired random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates simultaneously is forcibly set regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the result of the special symbol obtained by the player ( The hit determination result based on random numbers) is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the gaming nature inherent in the gaming machine more than the above-described priority control pattern. In addition, it is possible to make it seem that the winning game by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is related by the effect at the time of resumption, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Details of the control process of the interruption control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181.

  Next, FIG. 156 (D) is a timing chart showing a reset control pattern. The reset control pattern is for resetting the remaining variation time when restarting the other special symbol that has been interrupted based on the above-described interrupt control pattern.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), when a variation for deriving a big hit with the second special symbol is executed and a variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is a small hit When the fluctuation is stopped at the symbol, the first special symbol interrupts the temporary fluctuation. Then, a small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol interrupts the fluctuation. Up to this point, the control is the same as the lottery control pattern described above. In the reset control pattern, when the small hit game is completed and the first special symbol is resumed from the suspended variation, the variation is resumed after a new variation time is set.

  Thus, in the reset control pattern, since the degree of freedom increases in the effect in the change at the time of restart than the above-described interruption control pattern, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. In addition, a recommended game can be provided by setting the variable time at the time of restart according to the game situation.

  Details of the control process of the reset control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Basic control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. In the following, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, the forcible detachment flag of the other special symbol is set to the on state at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the hit starts to change, and the forcible detachment flag is set for the other special symbol at the start of the change. If it is in the ON state, it is characterized by a control structure that fluctuates and stops with a symbol without executing the hit determination process (without lottery).

[First variation start processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of first variation start processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st fluctuation start process (FIG. 127) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After executing the process of step S306a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the first special symbol forced off flag that sets the first special symbol to be off in the case of no lottery is on. (Step S311a). If the forcibly missed flag of the first special symbol is not on (NO in step S311a), the processing of steps S307a and S308a for performing lottery of the first special symbol and setting lottery result information is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308a described above indicates a winning result (step S313a). If it is a flag indicating a winning result (YES in step S313a), the second special symbol forced-off flag for making the second special symbol variation generated during the first special symbol variation into a deviating result. Is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if the flag is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, a flag indicating a loss result (NO in step S313a), the process proceeds to step S309a without executing the process in step S314a.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a result of detachment of the first special symbol and a deviation information command when the forced detachment flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S311a) (step S311a). S312a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S309a.

  As described above, in the first variation start process, when the first special symbol derives the hit result, the second special symbol forced off flag is set to the on state, and the first special symbol is generated after the first special symbol variation starts. The second special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a deviation result without lottery.

[First jackpot game processing]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st big hit game process (FIG. 131) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the second special symbol interlock flag and the forced off flag to the OFF state when the first big hit game is finished (step S751a).

[First linked setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of first interlock setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the first symbol that has been determined in step S312a of the first change start processing (FIG. 157) described above. Display on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004a.

[Second variation start processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second variation start processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd fluctuation start process (FIG. 135) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After executing the process of step S306b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the second special symbol forced off flag that sets the second special symbol to be off in the case of no lottery is on. (Step S311b). If the forcibly missed flag of the second special symbol is not on (NO in step S311b), the processing of steps S307b and S308b for performing lottery of the second special symbol and setting lottery result information is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the process of Step S308b described above indicates a hit result (Step S313b). If it is a flag indicating a winning result (YES in step S313b), the first special symbol forced-off flag for making the first special symbol variation generated during the second special symbol variation into a deviating result. Is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if the flag is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, a flag indicating a miss result (NO in step S313b), the process proceeds to step S309b without executing the process in step S314b.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a result of detachment of the second special symbol and a detachment information command when the forced detachment flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S311b) (step S311b). S312b). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S309b.

  As described above, in the second variation start process, when the second special symbol derives the hit result, the first special symbol forced off flag is set to the on state, and the second special symbol is generated after the variation start of the second special symbol. The first special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a deviation result without lottery.

[Second jackpot game processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd big hit game process (FIG. 139) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced off flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second big hit game is finished (step S751b).

[Second small hit game processing]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a procedure of second small hit game processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd small hit game process (FIG. 141) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced off flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second small hit game is finished (step S951b).

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second interlocking setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the second symbol that has been determined in step S312b of the second change start processing (FIG. 160) to the second. Display on the special symbol display device (step S1101b). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004b.

[Right-hand penalty setting processing]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of right-handed penalty setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 regarding the warning and penalty for “right-handed” at the timing of “left-handed”.

  In this process, when “right-handed” is made in a gaming state where “left-handed” is recommended, a warning is given first, and if “right-handed” is made after the warning, a penalty is imposed. Is set.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (the low probability non-short-time state) (step S1201). If the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether or not “right-handed” is detected (step S1202). Here, “right-handed” detection means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Note that it is possible to detect the acceptance of a game ball at the second start port 2102.

  The main control MPU 4100a ends this process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S1201) or when “right-handed” is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S1202). To do.

  Then, when the “right-handed” is detected (YES in step S1202), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to “left-handed”. Whether or not the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking whether or not a warning executed flag that is set when a warning timer to be described later times up is in an on state.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a sets a warning time (warning timer) (step S1204). When the warning timer expires (YES in step S1205), the warning execution completion flag is set to the on state (step S1206), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the warning has been executed (YES in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a determines that “right-handed” is continued despite the warning, and thus penalizes for a predetermined period.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a sets a penalty timer which is a penalty period (step S1211), and sets the second special symbol forced off flag to an on state (step S1212). Until the penalty timer expires (NO in step S1213), the second special symbol forced off flag is turned on.

  When the penalty timer expires (YES in step S1213), main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol forced off flag and the warning executed flag to the off state (step S1214), and ends this process.

  As described above, when “right strike” is detected in the normal mode in which “left strike” is recommended, first, the player is warned to return to “left strike”. If the “right-handed” is still continued, even if a “right-handed” and a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2102 occurs, a penalty period is given that results in a non-lottery result. Then, since the player is notified (suggested) that a penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be guided to perform an appropriate driving operation according to the game mode.

  Next, a characteristic process for the control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[LCD processing]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (highly accurate non-short-time state) (step S3201). When the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, when the current mode is the normal mode (the low probability non-short state) or the rush preparation mode (the high probability short time state) (NO in step S3201), the main control MPU 4100a performs the second operation. It is determined whether or not the hit variation for deriving the hit result is executed on the special symbol side (step S3202). If the hit variation is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display on liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit variation is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), a normal display effect is performed on liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3204).

  Here, the blackout refers to a display effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is dark and noise is applied. The blackout is started when a special symbol to be displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 starts a change that derives a hit result, and continues until the hit symbol is determined by the change. Note that the special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 is due to the winning of a game ball at the starting port not recommended to the player in the game mode. Therefore, it can be said that the blackout is a hit announcement effect for notifying that a hit variation due to a special symbol not recommended in the game mode has occurred.

[Right-hand penalty notification processing]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of right-handed penalty notification processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty notifying process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 with respect to the warning and penalty notification for “right-handed” at the timing of performing “left-handed”. One. Further, it is an effect process corresponding to the right hand penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low-probability non-short-time state) (step S3301). If the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether or not “right-handed” is detected (step S3302). Here, “right-handed” detection means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Note that it is possible to detect the acceptance of a game ball at the second start port 2102.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a ends this process if the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or if “right-handed” is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302). To do.

  If the “right-handed” is detected (YES in step S3302), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the warning has been executed (step S3303). Whether or not the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking the state of the warning executed flag set on the main control MPU 4100a side.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a warning time (warning timer) (step S3304). Note that the warning timer may acquire timer information from the main control MPU 4100a. Then, a warning notification for displaying a message “please return to the left” is executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3305). At this time, a warning sound may be sounded for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) as long as a warning is suggested. Until the warning timer expires (NO in step S3306), a warning notification is given (step S3305). When the warning timer expires (YES in step S3306), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the warning has been executed (YES in step S3303), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that “right-handed” is continued despite the warning, so the main control MPU 4100a determines the predetermined value. A period penalty is imposed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a penalty timer (step S3311). Then, a penalty notification for notifying that a penalty has been imposed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed (step S3312). The penalty notification is continued until the penalty timer expires. When the penalty timer expires (YES in step S3313), this process is terminated.

<Effects of basic control pattern>
As described above, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the interlock stop control is determined at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the hit starts to fluctuate. Without executing the determination process (with no lottery), it is possible to stop variably with the off symbol. Even if the hit determination process is executed, useless processing can be omitted in the other special symbol in which the result of forcibly setting the deviation is set, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. In the following, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the priority control pattern, the special symbol for deriving the result advantageous to the player is compared by comparing the results derived from the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the other special symbol is variably stopped. Characterized by structure.

[First variation start processing]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of first variation start processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st fluctuation start process (FIG. 127) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S307a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current variation of the first special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player as compared to the variation of the second special symbol. A first priority determination process for determination is executed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308a and ends this process.

[First priority determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of first priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the first change start process (FIG. 167) described above.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (step S361a). If there is no second special symbol that is changing (NO in step SS361a), there is no object to be compared and the process is terminated.

  If there is a second special symbol that is changing (YES in step S361a), main control MPU 4100a acquires the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol that is changing (step S362a). The result of the hit determination process in step S307a of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 167) is compared (step S363a).

  When the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (YES in step S364a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second special symbol is a result of disconnection (step S365a). If the result is an outlier (YES in step S365a), the process ends. On the other hand, if the result is not a missed result, that is, if the result is a small hit or a big hit (NO in step S365a), the forced miss flag that forcibly removes the second special symbol is set to ON (step S366a). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the first special symbol hit determination process to be out of step (step S367a). ), This process is terminated.

  Thus, in the first priority determination process, if there is a second special symbol that is changing when the change starts with the first special symbol, it is determined which change result is advantageous to the player, If the first special symbol is advantageous, the second special symbol is taken as a result of the disengagement, and if the first special symbol is not advantageous, the first special symbol is taken as a result of the disengagement. Avoid duplicate games with special symbols.

[First change processing]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the first fluctuating process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st change process (FIG. 129) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the first special symbol forced-off flag is on after determining that the variation time of the first special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501a. (Step S551a). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S551a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with off and sets the off flag off state. Setting is made (step S552a).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502a on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the changing first special symbol is replaced with the deviation result by the second special symbol that has started to vary later, the stop symbol that was determined at the time of variation start at the variation stop timing of the first special symbol is removed. replace.

[First linked setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of first interlock setting processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forced release flag of the first special symbol is on (step S1111a). ). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S1111a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the first special symbol with off and sets the off flag off. Setting is made (step S1112a). If the first special symbol forced off flag is not on (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of fluctuation (step S307a of the first fluctuation start process). It is the result.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a displays the detachment stop symbol determined in the process of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, when the first special symbol being changed is replaced with the result of the deviation by the second special symbol started to change later, the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is made earlier than the change stop timing of the first special symbol. When the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the second special symbol is replaced with an outlier.

[Second variation start processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second variation start processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd fluctuation start process (FIG. 135) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S307b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current variation of the second special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player compared to the variation of the first special symbol. A second priority determination process for determining is executed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308b and ends this process.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 171).

  First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S361b). If there is no first special symbol that is changing (NO in step SS361b), there is no object to be compared and the process is terminated.

  If there is a changing first special symbol (YES in step S361b), main control MPU 4100a obtains the result of the hit determination process for the changing first special symbol (step S362b), and the second control symbol described above. The result of the hit determination process in step S307b of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 171) is compared (step S363b).

  When the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (YES in step S364b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first special symbol is a result of disconnection (step S365b). If the result is an outlier (YES in step S365b), the process ends. On the other hand, if the result is not a miss result, that is, if the result is a big hit result (NO in step S365b), the forced miss flag for forcibly breaking the first special symbol is set to the on state (step S366b). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the second special symbol hit determination process to be out of step (step S367b). ), This process is terminated.

  In this way, in the second priority determination process, if there is a first special symbol that is changing when the change starts with the second special symbol, it is determined which change result is advantageous to the player, If the second special symbol is advantageous, the first special symbol is taken as a result of the separation, and if the second special symbol is not advantageous, the second special symbol is taken as a result of the separation, so that the first special symbol and the second that change simultaneously are changed. Avoid duplicate games with special symbols.

[Second variable processing]
FIG. 173 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second variation processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd change process (FIG. 137) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the second special symbol forced-off flag is on after determining that the variation time of the second special symbol has timed out in the process of step S501b. (Step S551b). The second special symbol forced off flag is set to the on state in the process of step S366a of the first priority determination process (FIG. 168) described above.

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S551b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with off and sets the off flag off state. Setting is made (step S552b).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502b on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the changing second special symbol is replaced with the result of losing by the first special symbol starting to change later, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the second special symbol replace.

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second interlock setting processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (step S1111b). ). The second special symbol forced off flag is set to the on state in the process of step S366a of the first priority determination process (FIG. 168) described above.

  Then, if the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S1111b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with off and sets the off flag off. It sets (step S1112b). If the second special symbol forced off flag is not on (NO in step S1111b), the second special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of variation (step S307b of the second variation start processing). It is the result.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the detachment stop symbol determined in step S307b or step S1112b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113b). Therefore, when the second special symbol being changed is replaced with the result of losing by the first special symbol started to change later, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is made earlier than the change stop timing of the second special symbol. When the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the first special symbol is replaced with a deviation.

  Next, a characteristic process for the control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

  As described above, the special symbol for which the forcible deviation flag is set to the on state is replaced with the deviation stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. In such special symbols, the stop symbols before replacement are hits (small hits, big hits), so the display contents (such as reach effect) of characters and the like displayed during the change in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the change stop There is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur with the display content (out of). For example, it is unnatural to suddenly switch to defeat even though the player's character is dominant in the battle performance and is just before the victory. Many players recognize the variation result by the effect display of the character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and therefore want to avoid the unnaturalness (uncomfortable feeling) that occurs in the transition of the effect display.

  Therefore, in the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, a process for delaying the special symbol variation result notification timing (effect display indicating disparity) by the effect display of characters or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 rather than the special symbol variation stop timing. Run.

[Forcible off-stage production addition processing]
FIG. 175 (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the forced off effect addition process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The forced off stage effect addition process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 with respect to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (step S3321). Here, the forcible deviation flag is set to an on state for a special symbol in which the winning stop symbol is replaced with the off-stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. If the forcibly removed flag of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the OFF state (NO in step S3321), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (YES in step S3321), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set to on It is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is subject to variable display (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. If the special symbol for which the forcible deviation flag is set to the on state is not a target to be variably displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), this process ends.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4140a adds to liquid crystal display device 1900 when the special symbol for which the forcible deviation flag is set to the on state is an object to be variably displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322). A miss notification effect is set (step S3323), and this process is terminated.

  Here, the additional error notification effect is an effect of notifying a shift in a predetermined period by an effect display of a character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, an effect that a player's character loses due to a character battle effect). Show. It should be noted that display contents excluding decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

  FIG. 175 (B) is a timing chart of special symbol variation and effect display in the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional error notification effect is set in the aforementioned forced error effect addition process.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol that switches from the hit stop symbol to the stop stop symbol at the change stop timing is selected based on the hit result, and the changing effect is a game. There is a high possibility that it is an effect expected by the player (a character on the player side is dominant in the battle effect). Despite the fact that such an effect has been executed, it is unnatural if an offending confirmation effect (defeat of the player's character) is suddenly performed at the timing of the change stop. Therefore, an additional error notification effect is executed after the special symbol fluctuation stop timing. Thereby, it is possible to make an effect transition that does not feel uncomfortable from the expected effect (dominance) to the confirmed effect (defeat), and it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable (unnatural).

<Effects of priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are compared and the special symbol for deriving a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is Since the fluctuation is stopped by the off symbol, the special symbol for deriving the big hit at the fluctuation stop timing as in the basic control pattern is not processed into the off result. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the gaming nature (game nature) inherent to the gaming machine rather than the basic control pattern.

  In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the special symbol for deriving the result advantageous to the player is compared by comparing the results derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Not limited to. In case of deriving a big hit, priority may be given to a special symbol that has started to fluctuate first, or priority results may be ranked according to the game mode, and a special symbol to be given priority may be determined according to the ranking. .

  In addition, when the special symbol effect that is forcibly removed from the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed, the additional deviation notification effect is set so that the character display effect ends after the change stop timing of the special symbol. Thereby, even if it is the production | presentation display accompanying a winning result, it can be changed to the production | presentation display which derives | leads-out a result, Therefore The player who reads a result from production | presentation displays, such as a character, can recognize a deviation without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to a sense of strange display.

<Interrupt control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. In the following, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  The interruption control pattern is characterized by a control structure that interrupts the fluctuation of the other special symbol while the winning game is performed based on the winning result derived by one special symbol, and resumes the remaining fluctuation after the corresponding game ends. To do.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is on in the processing of step S100a. In the first embodiment described above, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) for forcibly detaching the first special symbol from the symbol and stopping the variation is executed. However, in the interrupt control pattern of the present embodiment, the first 2 While the hit game is being played on the special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second special symbol control processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the process of step S100b. In the first embodiment described above, the second special setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed in which the second special symbol is forcibly disengaged and stopped by the symbol. In the interrupt control pattern of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is changed. While the hit game is being played on the 1 special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  Next, a characteristic process for the control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

  As mentioned above, in the interruption control pattern, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted with the occurrence of the hit game on one special symbol side, but if the effect that was performed before the interruption is continued as the effect after the restart, the corresponding game There is a possibility that it is not appropriate as a later production.

  Therefore, in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the resumption effect changing process is executed in which the effect after the resumption of the interrupted special symbol is changed from the specified effect that was selected at the start of the change and performed before the interruption.

[Resume effect change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a resumption effect change process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The restart effect change process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a game is currently being played (step S3331). In the present embodiment, the interlock flag is set to the on state at the start of the winning game, and is set to the off state at the end. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlock flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the on state. If no winning game is being played (NO in step S3331), the process ends because there is no interrupted variation that is the target of the effect change.

  Next, peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is a suspended change (step S3332) when the winning game is being played (YES in step S3331). This may be determined by determining whether the first process flag or the second process flag is “2”. When the first changing process (FIG. 129) or the second changing process (FIG. 137) is executed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing), the first processing flag or the second The 2-processing flag is set to “2”. If there is no interrupted variation (NO in step S3332), the present process is terminated because there is no effect change target.

  Next, when there is a suspended change (YES in step S3332), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the change is a hit (step S3333). If it is a win (YES in step S3333), it is determined whether or not the win is more advantageous for the player than the hit game currently being executed (step S3334). Here, the determination of winning that is advantageous to the player is based on the benefits that the player can acquire, the specified priority order, etc., as in the determination of which special symbol is prioritized in the above-described priority control pattern. Done accordingly.

  Then, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a derives a winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the currently executed winning game (YES in step S3334), the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a step-up effect as an effect after the restart. Is set (step S3335), and the process is terminated.

  Further, peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a bonus effect as an effect after resumption when deriving a winning game whose interrupted variation is not as large as the currently executed winning game (NO in step S3334) (step S3334). S3336), the process is terminated.

  In addition, when the interrupted variation derives a deviation (NO in step S3333), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a related effect as an effect after resumption (step S3337), and ends this process.

[Resume production example]
FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an effect example after restart in the restart effect changing process (FIG. 178). Here, an example is given of a case in which the variation of the second special symbol for which the winning is derived first is executed, and the variation of the first special symbol to be executed later is interrupted with the remaining time t at the stop timing of the variation. Explained.

  Case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, a small hit C is generated by the second special symbol, and then a big hit B is generated by the first special symbol. In this case, as an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a step-up effect that seems to have developed from the small hit C to the big hit B is set to be executed. . Specifically, the effect is that the wave after the small hit game changes into a rough wave and a big hit comes.

  Case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, the big hit A is generated by the second special symbol, and then the big hit B is generated by the first special symbol. In the big hit A of the second special symbol and the big hit B of the first special symbol, the bonus that is advantageous to the player is given to the big hit A of the second special symbol. In this case, it seems as if the first special symbol jackpot game was given as an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the variation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, accompanying the jackpot game of the second special symbol. Set so that the bonus effect shown in is executed. Specifically, after the big hit game, the rough wave is once settled and changed into the rough wave again, and the effect that the big hit comes is performed. In the bonus effect, particularly when the interruption fluctuation leads to a small hit, the opening timing of the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit game is notified by a countdown display of the remaining time t. A small hit game can be shown as an additional privilege added to the hit game executed when the change is interrupted.

  Thus, in the step-up effect and the bonus effect, the winning game on the first special symbol side and the winning game on the second special symbol side are a series of hits (the operation of the attacker device 2100 in the two-hit game is a series of operations). The production is performed as if it were present. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the effect after the resumption becomes an effect that is not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to show the consecutive hits as a series of hits and enhance the fun, so the game property is high A game can be provided.

  Case (C) is a case for explaining the related effects (step S3337). Here, the small hit C is generated by the previous second special symbol, but the first special symbol that is interrupted at this time is the result of losing. In this case, as an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after resumption, a related effect such as the afterglow of a small hit game (expecting development from the small hit game) Is set to be executed. Specifically, after the small hit game, a temporary wave is generated, but it returns gently, and an effect that ends without shifting to a new hit game is performed.

  In addition, when the interrupted fluctuation is derived as in the case (C) described above, the effect of giving the relevance to the previous and subsequent hit games such as the step-up effect and the bonus effect cannot be obtained. , The resumption of fluctuation may be stopped.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, as a modified example of the interruption control pattern, characteristic control processing in a pattern in which the fluctuation is terminated without ending when the interruption is derived as a result of outliers will be described. To do. Different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

[First linked setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the first interlock setting process in the modified example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the stop symbol determined at the start of the change of the first special symbol is out of place. (Step S1121a). If it is out of place (YES in step S1121a), the determined out-of-order symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122a). Then, the process concerning the change stop of the first special symbol is executed in the processes after step S1004a.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a continues the current state when the determined stop symbol of the first special symbol that is changing is not out of position, that is, is a hit (NO in step S1121a), that is, the above-described interruption. As shown in the control pattern, the process is temporarily stopped (suspended) (step S1021a), and the process is terminated.

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second interlocking setting processing in a modification of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the stop symbol determined at the start of the change of the second special symbol is out of place. (Step S1121b). If it is out of place (YES in step S1121b), the determined out-of-order symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122b). Then, the process concerning the change stop of the second special symbol is executed in the processes after step S1004b.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state when the determined stop symbol of the second special symbol being fluctuated is not out of position, that is, is a hit (NO in step S1121b), that is, the above-described interruption. As in the control pattern, the process is temporarily stopped (suspended) (step S1021b), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the variation of the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the control for forcibly detaching and stopping the other special symbol at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one hit in the basic control pattern described above, and the interruption Combination control is performed in combination with a control in which the other special symbol is temporarily stopped and resumed after the corresponding game at the timing when the special symbol for deriving one hit in the control pattern is stopped.

  In the modification, the shift is stopped only when the other special symbol comes off at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one hit, and is interrupted when the win comes. Thereby, the above-mentioned related effect (case (C) in FIG. 179) is not executed. For this reason, the resumption effect due to the change interruption is either a step-up effect or a bonus effect, and the execution of the resumption effect itself can be a highly anticipated notice effect (hit-fixed effect).

<Effects of interruption control pattern>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably executed as a result based on the acquired random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates simultaneously is forcibly set regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the result of the special symbol obtained by the player ( The hit determination result based on random numbers) is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the gaming nature inherent to the gaming machine further than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  Further, in the interruption control pattern, while the winning game based on the winning result derived from one special symbol is being performed, the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining fluctuations are resumed after the corresponding game ends. At this time, an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the resumed variation is newly set according to the preceding and following game situations (the winning game on one special symbol side and the game derived from the variation). Thereby, even if the interrupted variation is resumed, it is possible to provide an effect that does not feel strange. In addition, when the interrupted variation leads to a winning game, it can be shown that the game is related to the winning game on one special symbol side by the resumption effect, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

<Reset control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. In the following, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the reset control pattern, while the winning game based on the winning result derived from one special symbol is performed, the other special symbol interrupts the change, and the interrupted change is reviewed according to the game state after the corresponding game ends. It features a control structure that resumes after a short time.

[First change processing]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the first fluctuating process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st change process (FIG. 129) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521a until the variation time of the first special symbol times up in the process of step S501a. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to an off state before the process of step S521a (step S561a).

  Here, the reset flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S1134a of the first interlock setting process (FIG. 183) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to an on state when a reset setting process for resetting the variation time of the interrupted variation according to the gaming state is executed.

[First linked setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the first interlock setting process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a (step S1131a). If the reset flag is on (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended) as in the above-described suspension control pattern (step S1021a). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the reset flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1131a), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the first variation timer (step S1132a). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the gaming state (step S1133a), the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134a), and this process ends. Here, the process from step S1132a to step S1134a is a reset setting process. The target to be reset in the interrupted variation is not limited to the remaining variation time of the variation, but may be the entire control content related to the variation time, such as a variation pattern.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the variation after the restart is executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlock flag is released to the off state. Become. Then, when the first interlock flag is released to the off state and the execution of the first variation processing is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, the variation) Will be resumed).

[Second variable processing]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second changing processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd change process (FIG. 137) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521b until the variation time of the second special symbol times up in the process of step S501b. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to an off state before the process of step S521b (step S561b).

  Here, the reset flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S1134b of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to an on state when a reset setting process for resetting the variation time of the interrupted variation according to the gaming state is executed.

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of second interlock setting processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b (step S1131b). If the reset flag is on (YES in step S1131b), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended) as in the above-described suspension control pattern (step S1021b). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the reset flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1131b), main control MPU 4100a obtains the timer value of the second variation timer (step S1132b). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the gaming state (step S1133b), the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134b), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted, the reset setting process for the variation after the restart is first executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlock flag is released to the off state. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the second variation processing is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, the variation Will be resumed).

<Effects of reset control pattern>
According to the reset control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated in the same manner as the interruption control pattern described above can be variably executed as a result based on the acquired random numbers. Therefore, the reset control pattern can maintain the gaming nature inherent to the gaming machine further than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  The reset control pattern changes the remaining variation time of the interrupted special symbol according to the gaming state. Here, the variation interruption of the special symbol is caused by a hit game on the other special symbol side. For this reason, there is a possibility that the game mode after the corresponding game has shifted to another game mode. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable if the variation due to the variation pattern set based on the game mode before the transition is resumed. Therefore, according to the reset control pattern, the control contents such as the change time are reviewed for the change restarted after the hit game, and the change according to the game state to be executed is provided without giving the player a sense of incongruity. be able to. In addition, since the degree of freedom increases in the effect of the change at the time of restart than the above-described interruption control pattern, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Specifically, it may be reviewed in accordance with the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (FIG. 154 (E)). For example, if the variation that derives the result of the second special symbol outage is interrupted, if the game mode after the transition is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, it is reset to the long-term variation, and the game mode after the transition is the rush If it is a mode, it may be reset to a short time fluctuation.

  In addition, when the game mode is the rush mode, it is desirable to digest the ST count and frequently generate the small hit C and the small hit D of the second special symbol. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 186, the reset setting in the case where the first special symbol for deriving the big hit occurs in the rush mode with the ST number remaining will be described.

  FIG. 186 is a timing chart for explaining the reset setting process for interruption variation in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. As described above, in the rush mode, when the first special symbol for deriving the big hit is generated with the ST number remaining, after digesting the ST number given in the current game as much as possible, I want to win a big hit game (that is, give a new ST number).

  Therefore, if the big hit fluctuation occurs in the first special symbol when the remaining ST count is less than the predetermined number (here, less than 5), the big hit fluctuation is interrupted by the small hit game of the second special symbol. Is set to a long time t1. The long time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and a time during which a small hit game can be expected.

  Then, while the big hit variation of the first special symbol has resumed the fluctuation of t1 for a long time, the small hit variation of the second special symbol occurs and the stop timing of the small hit variation comes. Then, the big hit fluctuation is interrupted again. Since the variation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short variation of 1 second (FIG. 154 (E)), the ST count is digested with a good tempo.

  Then, when the remaining number of STs becomes 1, the variable time after restarting to be reset is set to a short time t2. The short time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time that does not end even if a fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the number of STs becomes zero during that time. is there. Thus, the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol that is frequently interrupted is effective for the ST count, that is, the fluctuation can be stopped in the probability variation state determined to be the big hit result, thus disturbing the gaming nature of the gaming machine. There is nothing.

  In this way, according to the reset control pattern, the variation time after resuming the variation of the special symbol to be suspended can be adjusted according to the gaming state, so not only the variation control of the special symbol to be suspended, The variation efficiency of special symbols in the gaming state can also be adjusted. Accordingly, it is possible to flexibly cope with a wide variety of assumed game characteristics, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Also, in the reset control pattern, similarly to the above-described interruption control pattern, the game situation before and after the effect corresponding to the resumed change (restart effect) (the game that the special game side wins and the game derived from the change) If a new setting is made according to the above, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a strange feeling. In addition, when the interrupted variation leads to a winning game, it can be shown that the game is related to the winning game on one special symbol side by the resumption effect, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

  As described above, according to the present invention, the control structure adopting any one or combination of the basic control pattern, the priority control pattern, the interruption control pattern, and the reset control pattern mentioned in the first and second embodiments is provided. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a specific game (small hit game, big hit game) overlapping between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and to change simultaneously. Here, even if game balls enter the winning area at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are placed in the standby state. As a result, there is a difference between the winning tempo of the game balls (that is, the player's game tempo) and the lottery game tempo, leading to a decrease in the interest of the game. In the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game as described above by the simultaneous variation control.

(Third embodiment)
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the game mode is changed from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode when the jackpot game ends. However, the rush preparation mode can be started without triggering the end of the jackpot game. You may make it transfer to rush mode. Such an example will be described below as a third embodiment.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game area 1100 into which the game is inserted, and a plate-like game panel 1200 are provided.

  The gaming panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A and having an outer shape smaller than the front component member 1110A. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A while holding the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side. An opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  Further, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a left end of the front end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 disposed at a position that is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and is visible from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) which is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. Board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear of the gaming panel 1200, and on the rear face of the substrate holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIG. 187, in the game area 1100, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position in the middle thereof. A center accessory 2500 is disposed at a substantially central position of the game area 1100. The design of the center accessory 2500 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

  In addition, an effect display device 1900 that provides an effect display with a large area in front view so as to attract attention from the player is provided behind the center accessory 2500. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1900.

  Above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a display area smaller than the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may display image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the game area 1100, the second big prize opening 2103b and the second start opening 2102 of the second attacker device 2100b are provided in order from the upstream side to the lower side area of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, in the game area 1100, from the left area to the lower area of the center character 2500, the normal gate 2301, the first start opening 2101 (the regular winning opening 2101a, the special winning opening 2101b), the first attacker in the order from the upstream. A first big prize opening 2103a of the device 2100a is provided. In the game area 1100, a plurality of general winning ports 2201 are provided in the lower left area of the center accessory 2500.

  Here, the first start port 2101 is a normal winning port 2101a in which a game ball can always be won, and a movable piece (ordinary) in the horizontal center of the game area 1100 and below the liquid crystal display device 1900. And a special winning opening 2101b in which a game ball can be won only when the electric accessory 2111 is operated. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), the first starting port sensor 3131 (see FIG. 188) receives the game ball (wins). Detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the first special symbol random number that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range is described below. A first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for a hit that triggers the operation of one attacker device 2100a, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 varies for a predetermined time. Is displayed. When winning the winning combination, after the change display is completed, drive control of a first attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 188), which will be described later, configured with a solenoid or the like is performed, whereby the first attacker is controlled. The device 2100a is opened and closed. After the first attacker device 2100a is opened and closed in this way, the transition to the short game state can be controlled when the ease of winning the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is improved. .

  Note that the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is started by starting the variation of the second special symbol. The symbol variation according to the symbol lottery result cannot be set to the variation start waiting state.

  The general gate 2301 is provided above the special prize opening 2101b, and is configured to allow a game ball driven into the left area of the center accessory 2500 to pass therethrough. When the game ball is received (passed) to the normal gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 188).

  At this time, if a predetermined normal start condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normally) is determined based on a random number for a normal symbol that is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A determination process (ordinary determination) is performed on the normal hit that triggers the operation of the electric accessory) 2111, and the normal symbol dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. When the normal winning is won, after the change display ends, drive control of a normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 188) configured with a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, the pair of movable pieces 2111 are allowed to receive the game ball into the special prize opening 2101b of the first start port 2101 through an opening operation in which the upper end is rotated outwardly around the lower end.

  In other words, the special prize opening 2101b is a game only when there is an opening operation by the movable piece 2111 (a rotation operation of the upper end outside the center of the lower end of the movable piece 2111) according to the normal winning. It is provided so that a ball can be won. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 has a mode (rejected ball mode) that makes it impossible to enter a game ball into the special winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101 and a mode that allows the same ball (permitted). It can be said that it is maintained in the rejected ball mode unless the drive control of the normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, basically, at the special winning opening 2101b, when the player is in the normal gaming state (non-temporary gaming state), the winning of the game ball hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the short-time game state, the game ball is driven into the left area of the center bonus 2500 in the game area 1100 as in the normal game state (non-short-time game state) (left-handed). The gameability centering on the game (first special symbol lottery) according to the reception of the game ball to the special prize opening 2101b in which the improvement of the ease of accepting the game is realized.

  The second starting port 2102 is provided below the second big prize opening 2103b of the second attacker device 2100b, and is driven into the right region of the center accessory 2500, and the second large port of the second attacker device 2100b. A game ball that has not been accepted into the winning opening 2103b is configured to be able to enter. When a game ball enters the second start port 2102, the second start port sensor 3132 (see FIG. 188) detects the game ball winning (winning). At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the second attacker is based on a random number for the second special symbol that is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100b, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time. The Then, when the winning is obtained, after the display of the fluctuation is finished, drive control of a second attacker drive mechanism 2121b (see FIG. 188) described later configured with a solenoid or the like is performed. The two-attacker device 2100b is opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is below the first start port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), and in the open state, the left side of the center bonus 2500 in the game area 1100. The first attacker device 2100a capable of accepting a game ball to be shot into the area, and a game ball to be shot into the right area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 above the second start port 2102 when in the open state. And a second attacker device 2100b that is capable of receiving.

  The first attacker device 2100a includes a first big prize opening 2103a, a first opening / closing member 2106a operable between a closed state and an open state, and a first attacker driving mechanism 2121a (opening / closing drive of the first opening / closing member 2106a). 188) and is normally closed by the first opening / closing member 2106a so that the game ball is not received in the first grand prize winning opening 2103a.

  The second attacker device 2100a includes a second big prize opening 2103b, a second opening / closing member 2106b operable between a closed state and an opened state, and a second attacker driving mechanism 2121b (opening / closing drive of the second opening / closing member 2106b). 188) and is normally closed by the second opening / closing member 2106b so that the game ball is not received in the second big prize opening 2103b. When the drive control of the second attacker drive mechanism 2121b is performed, the second opening / closing member 2106b moves the upper end of the game ball to the second start port 2103b through an opening operation in which the upper end rotates rightward (clockwise). Acceptance is allowed.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the first lottery is performed as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game balls at the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b). When the 1st grand prize opening 2103a is opened (the first special symbol side hit game), as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102, the 2nd big prize opening 2103b is At the time of opening (the second special symbol side hit game), the number of game balls that can be received is adjusted by changing the control modes for releasing them.

  That is, the first attacker device 2100a allows the player to open the first big prize opening 2103a by opening / closing the first opening / closing member 2106a when a big hit is obtained as the determination result of the first special determination. A big hit gaming state as an advantageous privilege is generated. Further, the second attacker device 2100b opens the second big prize opening 2103b by opening / closing the second opening / closing member 2106b when the big hit or the small hit is obtained as the determination result of the second special determination. A big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player. Accordingly, three game balls are paid out when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 (first start port sensor 3131) or the second start port 2102 (second start port sensor 3132). When game balls win the first big prize opening 2103a (count sensor 2122a) and second big prize opening 2103b (count sensor 2122b) used for execution of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, 15 game balls are It is to be paid out. In addition, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), ten gaming balls are paid out.

  By the way, in the short-time gaming state (the rush preparation mode in the third embodiment), the variation time of the normal symbol is “0.08 seconds”, and the movable piece 2111 is in the open state (the special prize opening) after the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The time maintained at 2101b at the outer position where the game ball can be won) is “5.5 seconds”. That is, when a game ball passes through the normal gate 2301, the normal ball is always won, and a time shorter than the time until the passed game ball reaches the movable region of the movable piece 2111 (0 .08 seconds), the change of the normal symbol is stopped, so that the game ball that has been a chance to win the normal hit can be won as it is in the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101.

  In addition, after the movable piece 2111 is maintained for “5.5 seconds” in the open state (position where the game ball can be received in the special prize opening 2101b), the movable piece 2111 is closed (the game ball is placed in the special prize opening 2101b). The position is set to be unacceptable.

  Therefore, in the short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the probability of winning the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special prize opening 2101b is maintained at the outer position for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this case, winning the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b is facilitated by left-handing. Therefore, in the short-time game state (rush preparation mode), the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center object 2500 (so-called “right” so that many game balls win the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101). It is considered advantageous for the player to hit “

  On the other hand, in the non-short-time gaming state (the normal mode and the rush mode in the third embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 1 Second), it becomes impossible to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  It should be noted that, even in the non-short-time game state, whether or not it is advantageous for the player to launch the game ball aiming at the left or right of the center accessory 2500 differs depending on whether or not it is in the probability variation game state. In the normal game state (normal mode) that is a non-time-saving game state and not a probability change game state, the left side of the center accessory 2500 is placed so that a large number of game balls win the regular winning port 2101a of the first start port 2101. It is considered advantageous for the player to aim at launching a game ball (so-called “left-handed”). Also, in the non-short-time gaming state and the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than the normal gaming state, there are many game balls at the second start port 2102. It is advantageous for a player to launch a game ball (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center actor 2500 so as to win a prize.

  In addition, the time-shortening function includes control for increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol as compared to the non-time-short gaming state, control for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol than that for the non-time-short gaming state, Control for extending the movable piece 2111 of the special prize opening 2101b at the outer position (open position) longer than the non-temporary gaming state, and the number of times the movable piece 2111 is operated to the outer position (open position) in the non-temporary gaming state Any one or any combination (all may be sufficient) of the control which increases more may be performed.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010 in which 3010b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back effect unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box The back bottom rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010b in the 3010, and the bottom right bottom disposed between the back bottom rendering unit 3400 and the front front decoration unit 3100 in the bottom right front corner in the back box 3010. The production unit 3600 is mainly provided. The front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Further, a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 188) having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 is provided on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. Yes.

  The game board 4 of the third embodiment is a wide area where the game ball can sufficiently roll between the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). In the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board 1210 in the left area of the center accessory 2500.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a strength of a predetermined strength or more), the game ball is upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. The right side passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500 flows down from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one. After the game balls that have flowed down the right passage 2545 are decelerated at the stop 1114, first, the second attacker device 2100b. The second opening / closing member 2106b is guided to the movable region. Note that the game ball flowing down to the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding portion 2901 and converted in the flowing direction, and then guided to the movable area of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b. Therefore, when the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b is in the open state, the game balls that have flowed down the right passage 2545 are received by the second grand prize opening 2103b with a probability close to 100%.

  In the movable region of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b, the game balls that have not been received by the second opening / closing member 2106b into the second big prize opening 2103b are decelerated again by the second guiding portion 2902, and then To the second start port 2102. A game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second start port 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless it enters the second grand prize port 2103b.

  As described above, in the highly probable non-short game state (rush mode), a game ball that is hit right and flows down the right passage 2545 is received by the second start port 2102 with a probability of almost 100%. The right-handed game ball is not limited to being accepted by the second start port 2102 with a probability of almost 100%, but may be received by the second start port 2102 at a rate less than that, For example, the second start port 2102 may be accepted at a rate of about 1/8.

  As a result of such a right-handed game, when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 and a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of any of the second special judgments, the second attacker By opening / closing the second opening / closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, the second big prize opening 2103b is opened, thereby generating a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state as a privilege advantageous to the player.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. Below, a different control structure is demonstrated among the control structures of the pachinko machine of the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment.

  The attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is driven below the first start port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and into the left side area of the center game 2500 in the game area 1100 when in the open state. The first attacker device 2100a that can accept the game ball to be received and the second start port 2102 can receive the game ball that is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 when in the open state. And a second attacker device 2100b. Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first count sensor 2122a for detecting a game ball received in the first big prize opening 2103a of the first attacker device 2100a, and a second big prize of the second attacker device 2100b. The detection signal from the detection signal from the second count sensor 2122b that detects the game ball received in the mouth 2103b is sent via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It comes to input.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the first attacker device via the panel relay board 3040. Drive signals are output to a first attacker drive mechanism 2121a that opens and closes the first opening and closing member 2106a of the 2100a and a second attacker drive mechanism 2121b that opens and closes the second opening and closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100a. Yes.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the third embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is on in the processing of step S100a. In the first embodiment described above, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) for forcibly detaching the first special symbol and stopping the variation with the symbol is executed, but the third embodiment is the same as the second embodiment. As with the interrupt control pattern, while the hit game is being played on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (paused) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  In addition, while the winning game is being performed on the second special symbol side, the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted. In other words, while the winning game is performed on the second special symbol side, the process (step S521a) for subtracting the first variation timer that was performed in the first variation process (FIG. 129) is not performed. When the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted in this way, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is controlled to be in a non-display state (light-off state), or the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. The change of the first special symbol may be interrupted by temporarily interrupting the variation of the first special symbol, or the control content of the first special symbol indicator 1185 corresponding to the variation pattern may be The control of the first special symbol display 1185 is repeatedly executed by interrupting the switching of the control data shown in time series and based on the control data being executed, so that the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is in a non-display state (lights off) The current fluctuation (fluctuation speed or the like) may be continued without being controlled to the state) or being stopped on the first special symbol display 1185. In addition, when the change of the first special symbol is stopped while the winning game is performed on the second special symbol side, the decoration which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and fluctuates corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. The change of the decorative design (first decorative design) may be temporarily interrupted by changing the design (first decorative design) to the non-display state or stopping the display with the off design. Then, the control content of the first special symbol display 1185 is interrupted and the control of the first special symbol display 1185 is repeatedly executed based on the control data being executed by interrupting the switching of the control data indicated in time series. The current change (fluctuation speed, etc.) is continued without controlling the LED of the special symbol display 1185 to the non-display state (light-off state) or causing the first special symbol display 1185 to stop and display the shifted symbol. In other words, switching of control data is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the control mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900 related to the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) that changes in response to the change of the first special symbol is shown in time series. By repeatedly executing the control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 related to the decorative design (first decorative design) based on the control data being executed while the operation is interrupted, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and corresponds to the variation of the first special design Thus, the current variation (variation speed, etc.) may be continued without changing the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol) that is changed to the non-display state or without stopping and displaying the symbol in the non-display state. In addition, while the winning game is performed on the second special symbol side, an effect related to the second big hit game is performed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the decoration varies in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol. The design (first decorative design) is reduced and displayed on the upper left part of the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the change of the decorative design (first decorative design) executed in response to the change of the first special design is displayed. You may make it perform control that it becomes difficult to notice that the game by the side of the 1st special symbol is interrupted (pause).

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the third embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the process of step S100b. In the first embodiment described above, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed in which the second special symbol is forcibly deviated and stopped by the symbol. As with the interrupt control pattern, while the hit game is being played on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (paused) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  In addition, while the winning game is performed on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side may be interrupted by stopping the variation of the second special symbol, By interrupting the measurement and interrupting the switching of the control data in which the control content of the second special symbol indicator 1186 is shown in time series, the current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) is stopped without stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It may be continued. Further, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped while the first special symbol side is being played, the decoration symbol executed in response to the variation of the second special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may make it stop the fluctuation | variation of (2nd decoration symbol), and stop the measurement of 2nd fluctuation time, and also interrupt the switching of the control data by which the control content of the 2nd special symbol indicator 1186 is shown in time series. Thus, when the current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) is continued without stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the decoration symbol (corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900). The current variation (variation speed or the like) may be continued without stopping the variation by interrupting the switching of the control data in which the variation control mode of the second decorative symbol) is shown in time series. In addition, while the winning game is performed on the first special symbol side, an effect related to the first big hit game is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while being executed in response to the variation of the second special symbol. The variation of the decorative design (second decorative design) is reduced and displayed on the upper left part of the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the variation of the decorative design (second decorative design) executed in response to the variation of the second special design. Control that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the change of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) executed in response to the change of the second special symbol is interrupted by interrupting the display of May be executed.

[First variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first variation pattern setting process in the third embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 128) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects a variation pattern table at the time of jackpot according to the gaming state if the flag indicating that the jackpot is won (YES in step S401a) (step S402a). ), It is determined whether or not the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (step S408a). The rush preparation mode in the third embodiment indicates a gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the short-time function are operating (high-probability short-time gaming state). Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is in the on state and the time reduction flag is in the on state.

  If the current game mode is not the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time gaming state) (NO in step S408a), main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S404a without operating the short-time flag. In this case, when the big hit game is started by the processes of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130), the hourly flag is set to the off state.

  On the other hand, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-short game state) (YES in step S408a), main control MPU 4100a operates the time-short flag in the off state to stop the time-shortening function. After (step S409a), the process proceeds to step S404a.

  Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time gaming state), if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol based on the result starts to be displayed ( The time reduction function is stopped (triggered by the start of the variable display) and the mode is changed to the rush mode (high probability non-time reduction state). The probability variation flag is set to an off state when the first special symbol display 1185 is displayed with the first special symbol stop symbol by the processing of step S506a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129). That is, in the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state), the first special symbol lottery display is started based on the result of the first special symbol lottery which is a big hit, and then the big hit game based on the result of the first special symbol lottery is started. Will continue until.

[Special game specifications]
FIG. 192 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the third embodiment. Here, a description will be given of a spec different from the game spec (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment described above.

  First, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the big hit of the third embodiment can be generated in the first special symbol A and the first big bonus B that can be generated in the first special symbol lottery and in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of big hits, the second big hit C and the second big hit D, are provided.

  The first big hit A is generated with a probability of 12% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol A. Further, the first big hit B is generated with a probability of 88% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit.

  The second big hit C is generated with a probability of 5% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol C. The second big hit D is generated with a probability of 95% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol D.

  These four types of big hits are probable that the game state after the big hit game is transferred to a probable change state with a probability of 100%, and the probable change state is continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game is executed 70 times. Provided with functions. In addition, a time reduction function is given to big hits other than the big special hits (second big hit C, second big hit D) of the second special symbol. That is, the time-shortening function is not given to the big hit of the second special symbol generated during the rush mode. As described above, when a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) of the second special symbol occurs during the rush mode, the game shifts to the rush mode again even after the big hit gaming state.

  Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening mode of the jackpot 2103 (the jackpot 2103a, the jackpot 2103b) is set, the first jackpot A, the first jackpot B, the second jackpot C, and the second The big hits D are set to open patterns A, B, C, and D, respectively. Here, the number of award balls that a player can acquire is changed by the opening pattern to enhance the interest of the big hit game.

  The opening patterns A to D are set so that the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 (the big winning opening 2103a and the big winning opening 2103b) is long and the player can acquire sufficient prize balls. For example, the opening pattern A is a big hit game in which round games are played 15 times, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings of each round are set so that the player can obtain 2000 balls as a winning ball. In a big hit game in which round games are played four times, the opening time and the maximum number of winnings for each round are set so that the player can acquire 500 balls as prize balls. In the jackpot game, the opening time and the maximum number of winnings for each round are set so that the player can acquire 1500 balls as a winning ball, and the opening pattern D is a jackpot game in which the round game is performed seven times. Opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings are set so that 1000 balls can be obtained as winning balls.

  As will be described in detail later, in the high probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) of the third embodiment, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is set to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short-time state; normal mode). ) And high probability time-short state (rush preparation mode), the second small hit C is made to occur frequently by changing to a variation time (second variation time) that is shorter than that. In addition, the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103b in the small hit game is provided so that a single opening time is short and a winning ball can be obtained by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning in which a player hits a game ball in the gaming area in order to win the winning prize opening 2103b, but in the gaming area in which the big winning opening 2103b is arranged. This is a winning that can be obtained when the game ball that has been thrown flows down in a position where it can accidentally win when the grand prize opening 2103b is opened. At the second small hit C, if the player has hit the game ball right-handed, the number of rounds and one opening time of the big prize opening 2103b so that about 1-2 winnings can be expected accidentally. Is set. When about 1-2 balls are won at the big winning opening 2103b by the second small hit C, about 15-30 balls can be obtained.

  Also, in the rush mode, it is possible to promote an accidental winning based on the second small hit C generated during the rush mode by continuously making the player hit the game ball with a right strike, and an award that can be obtained The number of balls occupies most of the number of winning balls (total number of issued balls) that can be acquired during the rush mode. In the third embodiment, since the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) frequently occurs during the rush mode, it is possible to expect award balls (maximum 2100 balls) of the above-mentioned big hit (2000 balls) or more. There will be no decrease in the interest of the game due to the small hits where a ball cannot be obtained. Rather, since the small hit game that is generated a plurality of times than the single big hit game continues the interest of the player in the game, the interest of the series of games in the rush mode can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the third embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). When the game mode is the normal mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 to 120 seconds depending on the presence or absence of reach production, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost in the rush preparation mode If so, 3 seconds is set, and if it is a big hit, 300 seconds or 600 seconds is set. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 5 seconds when the game mode is the rush mode. Note that when the game mode is the rush mode, the variation of the first special symbol is not newly started, so the variation time is not set.

  As described above, in the special symbol game provided to the player, the above-mentioned specifications (winning probability, winning type, variation time, etc.) change according to the gaming state. Then, the transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is a special number corresponding to the given number of STs (here, 70 times). Triggered by digestion of symbol lottery (variation).

  In addition, you may make it change the number of prize balls which can be acquired during rush mode by varying the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol at the time of rush mode entry. For example, in the above-described example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit, the fluctuation of either 300 seconds or 600 seconds depending on the fluctuation pattern determined regardless of the type of the first big hit Although what is set for the time is shown, the variation time may be associated with each type of first big hit in advance. Specifically, when the first big hit is A, the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is determined for the first big hit A, while for the first big hit B, the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is determined. As determined, a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of the first big hit may be provided. In this case, about 500 prize balls less than the first big hit A that can obtain about 2000 prize balls. Even in the case of the first big hit B that can be obtained, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the rush mode that is executed over a long period of time. In this way, the smaller the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (the lower the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game), the longer the fluctuation time is selected and the longer the duration of the rush mode is controlled. Thus, a larger amount of prize balls may be obtained during the rush mode than a big prize (a big prize with a high expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the big hit game) having a large number of prize balls that can be obtained by the big hit game.

  If the first big hit is A, the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is determined for the first big hit A, while the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is determined for the first big hit B. A variation pattern table corresponding to the type of the first big hit may be provided in this case. In this case, when the first big hit A that can obtain about 2000 award balls is obtained, the variation pattern table is executed for a longer period of time. Since a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the rush mode, the first special lottery result is only the first big hit A, and a lot of prize balls can not be obtained in one big hit game. It becomes and can improve game entertainment. That is, as the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is larger (the higher the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is, the longer the variation time is selected, the duration of the rush mode is controlled to be longer. Thus, the value (the degree of advantage over the player) of the big hit (the big hit with a high expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the big hit game) having a large number of prize balls that can be obtained by the big hit game may be further increased.

  In addition, as described above, according to the type of the big hit game, the player can obtain about 2000 winning balls in the big hit game executed when the first big hit A is achieved in this example. In the jackpot game executed when the first jackpot B is reached, it can be predicted in advance that about 500 prize balls can be obtained, but as described above, for each type of the first jackpot By associating the fluctuation time in advance, it becomes impossible to determine the degree of advantage only by the big hit type, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest by paying attention to the duration of the rush mode. That is, since the duration of the rush mode is proportional to the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode, the duration of the rush mode can be noted.

  In addition to the control for changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode by changing the variation time of the first special symbol at the time of rush mode entry as described above, or at the time of rush mode entry as described above. Separately from the control for changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode by changing the variation time of the one special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the rush mode (the second special symbol You may make it vary the number of prize balls which can be acquired during a rush mode by performing control which varies the variation pattern table of the 2nd special symbol to which variation time was set. For example, in the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state), the change time of the second special symbol is always set to 5 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is always 10 It can be controlled to either one of the rush mode B (high probability non-short-time state B) set to seconds, or can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds as the variation time of the second special symbol. Rush mode A (high probability non-time-short state A), which is more likely to be set to 5 seconds than the second (for example, set to 5 seconds with an 80% probability and 10 seconds with a 20% probability); As the change time of the second special symbol, it can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds similarly to the rush mode A, and is likely to be set to 10 seconds rather than 5 seconds (for example, 80% probability to 10 seconds) Set it to 5 seconds with a 20% probability) And Yumodo B (high probability non-time reduction state B), may be controlled in one of. As described above, by making it possible to control the transition to a plurality of types of rush modes having different variation times of the second special symbol or different occurrence rates of the second special symbols, it is advantageous only in the duration of the jackpot type or the rush mode. Since the degree cannot be judged and the degree of advantage can be judged only by comprehensively judging the jackpot type, the duration of the rush mode, and the variation time of the second special symbol, it is possible to make the game more attention Can improve the game entertainment.

  Also, when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds, the transition control to the rush mode B is performed, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds. In order to shift to the rush mode A, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the variation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. A variation pattern in which the first special symbol variation time is 600 seconds can be provided with a difference in the degree of advantage of each of the two types of rush modes (rush mode A and rush mode B) generated when the variation of one special symbol starts. A lot of prize balls can be obtained when the rush mode continues for a long period of time (in this example, rush mode A). To become, it can suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest by paying attention to the occurrence of rush mode.

  Also, when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds, the transition control to the rush mode A is performed, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds. In order to shift to the rush mode B, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the variation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. The same prize ball can be obtained regardless of which of the two types of rush modes (rush mode A, rush mode B) that occurs when a special symbol starts to fluctuate. In addition to improving the game entertainment in the event of an occurrence, the variation time of the second special symbol in the above two types of rush modes is the same Duration which is disadvantageous for the player if it is possible to enhance the advantageous degree of short rush mode A. That is, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each of the two types of rush modes is approximately the same, the rush mode A that is executed in a shorter time increases the number of prize balls obtained per unit time and is more for the player. Since it becomes an advantageous state, the advantageous degree of rush mode A with a short duration can be raised.

  Also, if the first big hit A (15 rounds), the transition control to the rush mode A is performed, while if the first big hit B (four rounds), the transition control to the rush mode B is performed. As the variation pattern table, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the first jackpot type, that is, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the release mode (number of rounds) determined by the jackpot type may be provided. In this case, when the first big hit A that can obtain about 2000 award balls can be obtained, the number of times the second special symbol can be changed during the rush mode can be increased. A lot of prize balls can be obtained, and the result of the first special lottery is only the first big hit A, which is not enough for one big hit game. The gaming interest becomes possible win of the winning balls can be improved. In other words, as the number of winning balls that can be obtained from the first big hit is large as the first big hit (the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is high), the second change is made with a shorter variation time. By executing the control to increase the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol in the rush mode by executing the special symbol variation display and to frequently cause the second big hit or the small hit based on the second special symbol lottery, Among them, the value of the jackpot (the degree of advantage over the player) of the type having a large number of winning balls (the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be won in the jackpot game is high) may be further increased.

  In addition, when the first big hit A (15 rounds), the transition control to the rush mode B is performed, while when the first big hit B (fourth round), the transition control to the rush mode B is performed. As the variation pattern table, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the release mode (number of rounds) determined by the first jackpot type, that is, the big hit type may be provided. In this case, even if the first big hit B, which can obtain about 500 prize balls less than the first big hit A which can obtain about 2000 prize balls, can be executed during the rush mode. (2) Since a large number of prize balls can be acquired during the rush mode by increasing the number of times that the special symbol is displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. Thus, as the number of winning balls that can be obtained as the first big hit is small (the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is low), the shorter the variation time is, the more the first big hit is determined. By executing the control to increase the number of times of variation of the second special symbol in the rush mode by executing the variation display of the second special symbol and to execute the second big hit and the small hit frequently based on the second special symbol lottery, The number of winning balls that can be won out of the jackpot is small (the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be won in the jackpot game is low). You may make it suppress the fall of the game interest based on having become a big hit of the type with few prize balls (the expected value of the number of prize balls which can be acquired by a big hit game is low).

[Game state transition]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the transition of the gaming state according to the third embodiment and the control of the simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state will be described. FIG. 194 is a diagram illustrating transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the third embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is a normal game state (normal mode). In the normal gaming state, the game ball is fired at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center object 2500 (so-called “left-handed”), so that the game ball is awarded to the regular winning port 2101a of the first start port 2101. Is the best game method for the player.

  Here, the second start port 2102 of the third embodiment can easily win a game ball that has been launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, following the flow path. It is provided as possible. The second special symbol lottery based on winning at the second starting port 2102 has a high winning probability of winning a winning ball (390/399 in the normal state and 44/45 in the probable state). With this, the player strikes right from the start of the game and attempts to win a game ball in the second start port 2102. Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192 (E) described above, the second special symbol in the gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended. The fluctuation time is set to long-time fluctuation (600 seconds). Thus, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started in both modes, it takes a long time until the display is stopped (the lottery result is determined), so that it is possible to suppress the player's right strike. .

  In addition, since the 2nd starting port 2102 of 3rd Embodiment is always open | released state and it is easy to win a prize, in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting port 2102, it is the 2nd in the gaming state which does not recommend the winning. Although the variation time of the special symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member is provided that can convert the second start port 2102 into an easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state, and in a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) that does not recommend winning of a game ball into the second start port 2102 You may make it set to a difficult state. In the third embodiment, in order to avoid the complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state conversion member and to provide a game that can be easily obtained by the player, the player can be changed by changing the variation time according to the game state. Guides them to play in the best way for them.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), the first special symbol lottery based mainly on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a) is executed. If the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the normal gaming state is continued, while the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) After the jackpot game based on the first jackpot is over, the game shifts to a high probability short game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), the variation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility of finding the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state (occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the player is given a privilege advantageous to the player such as the acquisition of a prize ball and the provision of a probability variation function and a time-shortening function by the occurrence of the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B).

  In the high probability short-time game state (rush preparation mode), as in the normal game state (normal mode), the game ball is launched (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center object 2500, It is the best gaming method for the player to win a game ball in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  Here, when the left-handed game ball passes through the general map gate 2301 disposed in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center object 2500, the time shortening function is activated, so that the normal symbol per lot is derived by the normal symbol lottery. (Probability of 100% per common figure in the short-time state). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101. Further, as described above, in the short-time gaming state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the winning port 2101a. Since it is set high, the player makes a left turn and aims at the special prize opening 2101b.

  Therefore, in the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery based mainly on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) is executed. And when the result of the 1st special symbol lottery loses 70 times continuously, it shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In addition, if the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, a high probability is triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Transition to a non-time-short state (rush mode, second game state). This high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) is continued until the big hit game based on the first big hit is started.

  As described above, in the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the variation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, it is very unlikely that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be found in the high probability short game state.

(Rush mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state is shifted from the high probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high probability non-time short gaming state (rush mode) will be described.

  In the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode), the game ball is fired at the second start port 2102 by launching the game ball (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center object 2500. This is the best game method for the player. It should be noted that the second attacker will be able to determine whether the big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or the small hit is derived in the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Since the second big winning opening 2103b is opened by the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, the player makes a right-hand hit in the same way as when the game ball is won at the second starting opening 2102. In other words, in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), it is only necessary to maintain the right hand strike. On the other hand, in gaming states other than the high-probability non-short game state (rush mode) (normal game state (normal mode) and high-probability short time game state (rush preparation mode)), the first is achieved by left-handing as described above. It is the best gaming method for a player to win a game ball at the start opening 2101, and when a big win is derived in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 2101, Since the first big winning opening 2103a is opened by the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member 2106a of the first attacker device 2100a, the left strike is performed in the same way as when the game ball is won at the first starting opening 2101. In other words, it is only necessary to keep left-handed in a gaming state other than the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode). Therefore, it is necessary to switch from left-handed to right-handed at the time of transition to the high-probability non-time-short gaming state (rush mode) and to switch from right-handed to left-handed at the end of the high-probability non-time-short gaming state (rush mode).

  Here, the second start port 2102 of the third embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the right-handed game ball in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode) is approximately The second starting port 2102 is won.

  Therefore, in the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode), the second special symbol lottery based mainly on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is executed. In the high-probability non-short-time gaming state, the first special symbol based on the first jackpot is being changed. Therefore, the first special is newly added based on the game ball entering the first start port 2101. The symbol lottery is not executed, and even if the player makes a left strike, a prize ball cannot be obtained in the game of the first special symbol.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode), if a big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, a small hit is always derived. In the small hit game generated at this time, the player can acquire a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a prize ball, although it does not reach the number of game balls that can be acquired by the big hit game. Therefore, if it becomes this game state, a player will acquire a prize ball by a small hit game every time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first big win ends. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), a high probability non-short time is obtained because the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the high probability short-time state (rush preparation mode). When starting the change of the first special symbol that triggers the transition to the gaming state (rush mode), the change pattern table and the first change start at the big hit selected in the first change pattern setting process (step S170a) One of 300 seconds and 600 seconds is set as the variation time (first variation time) of the variation according to the variation pattern determined by comparing the first variation random number read in step S304a in the process. The Further, in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery, but the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. In the third embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol based on the first jackpot when the variation time of the second special symbol ends. When the special symbol variation display is interrupted and the small hit game generated when the big hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol or the big hit game generated when the big hit is derived, the first big hit is executed. The state where the variation display of the first special symbol based on is continued, and the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol is resumed when the small hit game or big hit game ends. Yes. For this reason, in the high-probability non-short game state, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed 60 to 120 times at the maximum, so that the maximum 60 to 120 times of the small hit game and the big hit game are continuously generated. Can do. In other words, a series of games of the second special symbol from the start to the end of the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot become a bonus game in which a prize ball can be obtained. The longer the variation time of the first special symbol that triggered the transition to the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode), the longer the variation number of the second special symbol that can vary during that period. Therefore, the number of times that a small hit game or a big hit game can be generated continuously increases, and the number of prize balls that a player can acquire increases. In this example, the high probability non-short-time game between the case where the change time of the first special symbol that triggered the transition to the high-probability non-short-time game state (rush mode) is set to 600 seconds and the case where it is set to 300 seconds. Different duration of state (rush mode). As a result, the number of prize balls that a player can acquire during the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) is varied, and when the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 600 seconds, The number of prize balls that a player can acquire is increased compared to the case where the time is set to 300 seconds.

  Thus, in the third embodiment, the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) is a series of first games regardless of derivation of the second big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) in the second special symbol lottery. Two special symbols can be won in a small hit game, and the total number of winning balls is equal to or more than the number of prize balls that can be acquired in a big hit game. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous gaming state) but the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode, second advantageous gaming state).

  Since the high probability non-short game state (rush mode) is a game state that can be generated when the first special symbol lottery is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high-accuracy short time game state (rush preparation mode), the player First, a game aimed at winning a game ball at the first start port 2101 is performed. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the high probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) triggered by the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot, the player then plays the game ball to the second start port 2102 Play games aiming to win.

  When the first special symbol lottery is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the highly accurate time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the high probability non-short time triggered by the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the first big hit After shifting to the gaming state (rush mode), the gaming state (rush mode) is continued unless the variation time of the first special symbol ends. Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot ends, the jackpot game based on the first jackpot is executed. For this reason, when the first special symbol lottery is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the state shifts to the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode). In addition to being able to win a prize ball by a series of second special symbol games from the start to the end of the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot, the jackpot game based on the first jackpot Since it is possible to obtain prize balls, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls. At this time, since the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot is the duration of the rush mode (high probability non-short state), the liquid crystal display device 1900 has changed from the game mode to the rush mode. The elapsed time, the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol (remaining time that can be controlled in the rush mode), etc. are displayed so that the player recognizes that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit It is like that.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot ends in the high probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode), after executing the jackpot game based on the first jackpot, the high-probability short-time game again Transition to the state (rush preparation mode). For this reason, as long as the result of the first special symbol lottery in the high probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) is not lost for 70 consecutive times, there is no transition to the normal gaming state (normal mode). That is, as long as the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times in the high probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the high-probability short-time gaming Since the transition from the state (rush preparation mode) to the high probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) is repeated, the transition from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high probability time-short gaming state (rush preparation mode) The player can expect to win a large number of prize balls.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 194 is an example of a timing chart showing ideal game mode transition in the third embodiment.

  When the player starts a game in the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 such as a state in which the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, first, a normal mode (normal state: low probability non-short-time state) starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to strike left and aim at the regular winning port 2101a or the special winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101. Here, when the game ball at the beginning of the shot is too strong to hit the right and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the variation of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 192 (E). Long time fluctuation (600 seconds) with a long time (second fluctuation time) is executed. Therefore, when the game mode is the normal mode and the game ball wins the second start port 2102, a display for prompting the player to make a left strike (please make a left strike! Etc.) is performed.

  After that, when the player adjusts the firing force and makes a left turn, and the game ball wins the regular winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the first special symbol is changed and the first is changed. In response to the change in one special symbol, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the change in the first decorative symbol. As described above, in the normal mode, since the left-handed game is the best for the player, the change of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the change of the second special symbol is hardly executed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed in the center portion, and an effect corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is executed. It is displayed and it is difficult for the player to notice its existence. During the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the second decorative design is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at all so as to make it difficult to notice the presence of the second decorative design, or during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 1186 may be turned off so that the second special symbol is not displayed at all, thereby making it difficult to notice the presence of the second special symbol.

  Further, the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol in the normal mode is set to any one of 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the selected variation pattern. In a game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery for winning a big hit with a probability of 1/399 is executed. Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and a decorative symbol that varies in accordance with the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. After the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlock flag is set to the on state, the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted. When the first big hit game ends, the second interlock flag is returned to the off state, the interrupted variation of the second special symbol is resumed, and the game mode is changed from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state). Migrate to

  Even in the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time state), it is best for a player to strike left and aim for the regular winning port 2101a or the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 as in the normal mode. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a probability changing function of 70 ST times and a time saving function for performing winning assistance control for facilitating winning to the special winning opening 2101b are provided. In the rush preparation mode, when a game ball wins the second start port 2102, a long-time variation (600 seconds) with a long variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 192 (E). In order to be executed, when the game mode is the rush preparation mode and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the player is prompted to make a left strike (please left strike! Etc.). .

  When the player makes a left turn in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), and the game ball wins the regular winning port 2101a or the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. At the same time, the first decorative symbol is changed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the change in the first special symbol. At this time, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is off, the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol is set to any one of 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the variation pattern to be selected. If the symbol lottery result is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol is either 300 seconds or 600 seconds depending on the variation pattern selected. It is said. In a game on the first special symbol side in the rush preparation mode (high probability short time state), a first special symbol lottery that wins a big hit with a probability of 1/45 is executed. Then, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the ST count is decremented by 1, and when the ST count count is 70 or less, the first special symbol big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won. As shown in 192 (E), long-time fluctuations (300 seconds or 600 seconds) with a long fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol and the first decoration symbol are executed. Then, when the long time variation of the first special symbol starts, the time flag is set to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode (high probability short time state) to the rush mode (high probability non-time short state).

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to strike right and aim at the second start port 2102. Therefore, when the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, the liquid crystal display device 1900 notifies the player that the rush mode has been switched to, and a display prompting the player to make a right turn (rush mode has entered! Etc.). Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the probability changing function of the ST number of 70 times is provided. Here, the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is reset, and the ST count is counted again from the count value of 70.

  The game ball that has been hit to the right wins the second starting port 2102. Winning at the second starting port 2102 is easy even for a novice game player, so winning of game balls at the second starting port 2102 occurs frequently. Since the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol at this time is set to 5 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  In this way, the right-handed game is best for the player in the rush mode, and the variation of the second special symbol is executed frequently, while the first special symbol is changed for a long time and stopped during the rush mode. Is never displayed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed at the center, and an effect corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the first decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left part of the device 1900 and the player is less likely to notice its presence. The present invention is not limited to the above as long as it makes it difficult to notice the presence of the first decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the rush mode. For example, the second decorative design is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the rush mode. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol may not be displayed at all, and the first decorative symbol may be displayed while the second decorative symbol is not displayed at all when the rush mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. Similarly, during the rush mode, the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 can be turned on to display the second special symbol, while the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is turned off and the first special symbol is not displayed at all. When the rush mode ends and the normal mode is entered, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 can be turned on to display the first special symbol, while the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 is turned off. The second special symbol may not be displayed at all.

  In the game on the second special symbol side, if the big win is won with a probability of 1/45, and if the big win is not won (probability of 44/45), the second special symbol lottery that wins the big win is executed. Then, the ST count is updated by 1 when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate. As a result of the second special symbol lottery, when a small hit is made, the variation is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hit game is executed, the first interlock flag is set to the on state and the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the first interlock flag is in the off state at the end of the second small hit game. The suspended change of the first special symbol is resumed.

  Note that the ST count is also updated by one subtraction at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. When the ST count becomes 0, the probability variation flag is set to the off state and the game mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode. That is, the rush mode ends when the number of STs becomes 0 without winning the big win of the second special symbol. In addition, the rush mode can be used when the long time variation of the first special symbol has passed, or when the second special symbol has not been won without winning the jackpot of the second special symbol. Even if a big win is won, it will end and shift to normal mode. However, if the second special symbol jackpot is won, the probability change flag is set to OFF when starting the second jackpot game and the rush mode ends, but again when the second jackpot game ends. The probability change flag is set to the on state, and the rush mode is resumed after the second big hit game is over (continuous rush mode). Thus, in the rush mode, the variation of the second special symbol and the second big hit game or the second small hit game are repeatedly executed alternately. Note that the ST count may be subtracted and updated only due to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol without subtracting and updating the ST count due to the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. In this case, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery does not become a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) during the rush mode, until the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses. Since the rush mode can be continuously controlled, it is possible to prevent the rush mode from being ended during the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol and the decrease in the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 70, whereas the winning probability of the second special symbol in the probability variation state (high probability state) is set to 1/45. Will cause a big hit of the second special symbol once before the ST count becomes zero. In addition, when the second special symbol big hit is made during the rush mode, the rush mode is temporarily stopped, but the rush mode is resumed after the second big hit game ends, so the rush mode is substantially continued. It is in a state. In other words, the largest factor for ending the rush mode is that the long time fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses. Therefore, when shifting to the rush mode, the elapsed time after the game mode shifts to the rush mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol (remaining time controllable to the rush mode) Etc. are displayed so that the player can recognize that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, the jackpot symbol (symbol A, symbol B) is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the variation time of the long-term variation of the first special symbol has elapsed, and the probability variation flag is set to the off state. After setting the second interlock flag to the on state, the first big hit game is started. As a result, the rush mode is terminated and the normal mode is shifted, and the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted. When the first big hit game is finished, both the probability variation flag and the short time flag are set to the on state, and after the first big hit game is finished, the mode shifts to the rush preparation mode.

  In addition, when the variation time of the long-term variation of the first special symbol elapses during the variation of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted together with the start of the first big hit game, and the first big hit game ends. At the same time, the suspended change in the second special symbol is resumed. That is, the second big hit game or the second small hit game is executed according to the result of the change of the second special symbol resumed during the rush preparation mode after the end of the first big hit game. If the second special symbol big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) in the rush mode (high probability non-time short state), the rush mode (high probability non-time short state after the second big hit game) However, when the second big hit game is executed in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the state shifts to the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state) after the second big hit game ends. That is, the big special hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) of the second special symbol is made to vary the game mode after the end of the second big hit game according to the game mode at the time of starting the second big hit game. It has become. Specifically, if the time reduction function is active at the time of starting the second big hit game, the time reduction function is activated even after the end of the second big hit game, and the time reduction function is stopped at the time of starting the second big hit game. Then, even after the end of the second big hit game, the state is stopped without operating the time saving function. As a result, it is possible to suppress the transition to the rush mode again immediately after the transition from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, and it is possible to suppress an excessive improvement in euphoria.

  If the second special symbol big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D), it may be made to shift to the rush mode (high probability non-time short state) after the second big hit game, In this case, it is possible to focus attention on the variation of the second special symbol that is resumed immediately after the transition from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, and it is possible to improve the expectation for re-entry into the rush mode.

  Further, in the rush mode of the third embodiment, when the big win is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small win is always won, and the probability is 44/45, so that the second small hit game frequently occurs. Become. In addition, since the second variation time during the rush mode is 5 seconds, if the variation time of the long-term variation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is approximately 120 times during the rush mode. If the variation time of the long-term variation of the first special symbol is 300 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is performed about 60 times during the rush mode. The ST number is set to 70 as described above, and during the rush mode, the ST number is subtracted and updated due to the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. For this reason, assuming that the remaining number of STs is 69, the rush mode is entered, and during the rush mode, assuming that the second special lottery result is not a big hit, but a small win, the second special symbol changes. When the game is performed 69 times, the game mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode. That is, when the variation time of the long-term variation of the first special symbol becomes 600 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is executed 120 times unless the big win is won at least once in the second special symbol lottery. Since the rush mode will be ended before, when the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, at least one jackpot and a maximum of 119 times to continue the rush mode over this entire period It is necessary to generate small hits. On the other hand, when the change time of the long time variation of the first special symbol is 300 seconds and the remaining number of STs is 69 and the rush mode is entered, the rush mode ends in the middle of the long time variation of the first special symbol. Without hitting, a maximum of 60 small hits occur. Here, about 30 prize balls can be obtained in one second small hit game, and about 1000 to 1500 prize balls can be obtained in one second big hit game. That is, when winning a big hit once in the rush mode and winning 119 small wins, it is possible to obtain about 4570-5070 prize balls, and when winning a small hit of 60 times during the rush mode, 1800 balls are won. It becomes possible to win the prize ball. This is equal to or more than the maximum number of winning balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of the third embodiment. Therefore, the game entertainment can be improved by shifting to the rush mode. In addition, as described above, in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state (especially in the rush mode (high probability non-short state state)), it is not always necessary to win the small bonus. 2 If you do not win a big win in the special symbol lottery, it is sufficient if you win a small win with a probability much higher than the probability of losing, but in this case too small a small hit game By setting the winning probability (for example, a winning probability of 80% or more), a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the rush mode.

  Further, after the end of the rush mode, the first big hit game is started. Since it is possible to win about 500 to 2000 prize balls in one first big hit game, it is possible to win about 2300 to 7070 prize balls by winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode. Become. Therefore, even if it is the first big hit B where only about 500 winning balls can be obtained by executing the big hit game in which the round game is performed four times, the winning balls won during the rush mode are added up. If the round game is executed 15 times, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than the first big hit A that can win about 2000 prize balls, and the discouragement due to the first big hit B Can be deterred, and the decline in the amusement interest can be suppressed. Also, in addition to the prize balls that were won during the rush mode, you can get a number of prize balls that are many times the number of prize balls that can be earned in one first big hit game by earning the first big hit A prize ball. The expectation for mode and 1st big hit A can be raised, and the fall of amusement entertainment can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to win a big win as a second special symbol lottery and whether or not to win a small bonus. However, as a second special symbol lottery, A lottery process for determining whether or not to win the game may be performed, and the lottery process for determining whether or not to win the jackpot may not be executed so that the game on the second special symbol side is not executed. Also, at least during the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state), only the lottery process for determining whether or not to win the jackpot without executing the lottery process for determining whether or not to win the jackpot as the second special symbol lottery is executed. Thus, in the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode, it may be controlled so that the small hit game can be executed while the big hit game cannot be executed. In this way, in the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode, control is performed so that only the small hit game can be executed, so that the change of the second special symbol and the small hit game are repeatedly executed in the rush mode. A game mode other than the rush mode in which a large number of prize balls are acquired at once (or 100% may be obtained) at once, and a rush mode in which the number of prize balls acquired by the execution of the small hit game is gradually increased. Since one pachinko machine 1 can provide different game characteristics, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in the game interest. In addition, a large number of prize balls (1000 to 1500 prize balls) cannot be obtained all at once (in a short time) because the big hit game is not executed during the rush mode, and the prize balls gradually obtained. Therefore, the game can be concentrated on the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode with the aim of generating more small hits, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  In addition, even if a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to win a big hit as a second special symbol lottery and whether or not to win a small bonus, if a lottery is won if a lottery is won as a second special symbol lottery Similar to the winning game (opening mode of the big winning opening 2103b that opens and closes the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b with the opening pattern E), the main winning game is mainly (even at 100%). (Good) You may make it distinguish into game mode other than the rush mode which acquires a collective prize ball at once, and the rush mode which increases the prize ball to acquire gradually. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit only at least during the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state), the same as the small hit game (the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b with the opening pattern E) The big hit game of opening the big winning opening 2103b that opens and closes may be executed. In this way, when the big win is won as the second special symbol lottery, it is the same as the small win game (the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103b for opening / closing the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b with the opening pattern E) ) Is also possible to execute the small hit game in the game on the second special symbol side in the above-described rush mode, while performing the same operation and effect as in the case of controlling not to execute the big hit game. It becomes possible to play.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is displayed before the first big symbol is stopped and displayed. To change to the rush mode where the expected value for winning a prize ball is higher than the normal mode (low probability non-short-time state) at the time of starting the change of the special symbol (in response to the start of the change of the first special symbol) The player can be surprised and surprised by suddenly shifting to the rush mode (the rush mode occurs) at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol executed in response to the change of the symbol and the first special symbol. In addition, since it is possible to focus attention on the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol while expecting the occurrence of the rush mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. Also, not only the first big hit game executed according to the result of the first special symbol lottery, but also the game motivation by controlling to an advantageous state where a large amount of prize balls can be obtained by shifting to the rush mode. In addition to being able to be improved, the game can be played with attention other than the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, so it corresponds to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol Even in the period before the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In the third embodiment, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S502a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129), the probability variation flag is set to the off state. The rush mode is ended. However, the rush mode may be ended at least before the first attacker device 2100a opens and closes in the first big hit game. For example, the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130) is performed. ), The probability variation flag may be turned off when the time reduction flag is set to the off state in step S604a. In other words, in this example, the first special symbol based on winning the big win in the first special symbol lottery is controlled in the rush mode as a trigger, but within the first special symbol variation time (first variation time) The rush mode is not limited to the rush mode, and the rush mode is continued until at least the first attacker device 2100a is opened / closed even after the first special symbol fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) has elapsed. You may make it control.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery). (2 fluctuation time) is a long time fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time) of 600 seconds, so in the first special symbol lottery (the first big hit A, the first Before winning the big hit B), the game is directed to execute only the game on the first special symbol side. That is, in the first special symbol lottery, the state before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of the pachinko machine 1) ) Is restricted. Then, when the first special symbol lottery is won and the first special symbol starts to change before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol when the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won. In order to improve the expected value of winning a prize ball than in the normal mode by canceling the restriction (triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol) and shifting to the rush mode that allows the execution of the game on the second special symbol side. , It becomes possible to realize a novel game in which the rush mode is suddenly changed (the rush mode occurs) at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol executed in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, As a result, the player can be surprised and surprised, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by focusing on the establishment of the start condition while expecting the occurrence of the rush mode.

  In the third embodiment described above, the variation time of the second special symbol until the big win (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The second special symbol stop display frequency is set to the second special symbol stop display frequency by making the long-time fluctuation much longer than the first special symbol fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of (second fluctuation time) of 600 seconds. By reducing it significantly compared to the frequency, by directing only the game on the first special symbol side before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery Although it is configured to substantially restrict the game on the second special symbol side, until the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) In such a case, the strength of the game ball emitted by the hitting ball launching device 500 is weakened to less than a predetermined strength so that it cannot be hit to the right, or the game ball hit by the hitting ball launching device 500 with a strength higher than the predetermined strength Blocking by a member or the like, or stopping detection by the second start port sensor 3132 so as not to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2102, or entering the second start port 2102 Even if the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132, the detection signal is ignored (in the first special symbol lottery in step S201 of the first and second start port winning process (FIG. 125)). (If the flag indicating that the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won is set, it is determined that there is no winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102) In this way, the game on the second special symbol side can not be executed, and the first special symbol is awarded when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. At the time of starting the change of the first special symbol (before the start of the change of the first special symbol) before the stop display with the big hit symbol, the mode is changed to the rush mode (high probability non-short state). The game on the second special symbol side may be executed during the probability non-short-time state. Thus, the main game (game on the first special symbol side or game on the second special symbol side) can be switched reliably between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won (the first special symbol lottery). (2 fluctuation time) is a long time fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time) of 600 seconds, so in the first special symbol lottery (the first big hit A, the first Before winning the big hit B), it can be said that the suspension of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is substantially restricted. When the first special symbol lottery wins the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), the frequency at which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed when the first special symbol starts to change (the second special symbol In order to increase the frequency at which the variation is started), the second special symbol and the second special symbol are suddenly changed when the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is started. Thus, it is possible to realize a novel game in which the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the game frequency increases, thereby giving the player surprise and surprise. Moreover, the second decorative symbol is increased by increasing the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol (frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started). Since it is possible to improve the expectation that the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol corresponding to the second special symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol corresponding to the second special symbol can be improved, the first special symbol And the fall of a game entertainment charm can be suppressed by making it pay attention to the fluctuation | variation start of the 1st decoration symbol which fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol. That is, even when the first decorative symbol is not displayed as a big hit symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol that changes in accordance with the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol per unit time by increasing the stop display frequency and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol or the second big symbol In addition to improving the game motivation by increasing the probability of stop display at the small hit symbol corresponding to the special symbol small hit symbol, it fluctuates in response to fluctuations in the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be played, but also whether or not the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is increased Can The first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol are jackpot symbols (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol It is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest even in the period before the stop display in the symbol.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery). (2 variation time) is substantially longer than the variation time of the first special symbol (the first variation time) of 600 seconds (first variation time), thereby substantially restricting the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol, the first special symbol Frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol when the first special symbol change starts when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the symbol lottery (the second special symbol change starts) Frequency) is increased, but the second special symbol and until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Second special figure The second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the above is regulated so as not to be stopped, and the first special symbol is a big hit symbol when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. Before the stop display and at the time of starting the change of the first special symbol (triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol), the mode is changed to the rush mode (high probability non-short state) and the rush mode (high probability non-short state) Only during the (state), the restriction may be released so that the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol can be stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined in step S501b of the second variation processing (FIG. 137) that the second variation time has elapsed (the second variation timer has become 0), the state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag is confirmed and rushed. If the game mode (normal mode (low probability non-time short state), rush preparation mode (high probability short time state)) other than the mode (high probability non-time short state), it will change according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol The second special symbol that changes based on the fact that the process ends without displaying the second decorative symbol to be stopped and shifts to a game mode other than the rush mode, and the second special symbol that changes in accordance with the second special symbol. Two decorative symbols may be displayed in a stopped manner. Thus, the main game (game on the first special symbol side or game on the second special symbol side) can be switched reliably between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery). (2 fluctuation time) is a long time fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time) of 600 seconds, and in the first special symbol lottery (big hit A, first big hit B) In response to the first special symbol and the first special symbol in order to shorten (change) the variation time of the second special symbol (second variation time) to 5 seconds triggered by the start of the variation of the first special symbol The change time (second change time) until the second decorative symbol that suddenly changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol that changes in a short time (change) Can realize a novel game Next, whereby it is possible to provide surprise and unexpected to the player. In addition, since the variation time until the second decorative symbol that varies according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is shortened (changed), it corresponds to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest by paying attention not only to the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that changes in the first but also to the first special symbol and the start of change of the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the first special symbol. That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol) Even if it is not displayed in the big win symbol), the variation time until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol are stopped (changed) is shortened. The stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, and thereby the second special symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol per unit time. The decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol) or the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the second special symbol) Corresponds to the small hit pattern of Since the probability of stop display at 2 small decorative symbols) is improved, the time required to stop and display the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol is shortened (changed) ) Can improve game motivation. Thus, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the change in the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second that changes in response to the change in the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The first decorative symbol that can be played while paying attention to whether or not the variation time (second variation time) of the decorative symbol is shortened, and varies in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment in the period before the symbol is stopped and displayed on the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol).

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( The second variation time) is 600 seconds, which is a long time variation that is much longer than the variation time of the first special symbol (first variation time). In the first special symbol lottery, the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) ) When the first special symbol changes start, the second special symbol change time (second change time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds, and then the rush mode is entered. In the game mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the above, the one that shortens the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is shown, but at least when the rush mode is entered Any game mode other than the rush mode can be used as long as it changes to the rush mode (second change time) than the game mode other than the game mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode). You may extend the fluctuation | variation time (2nd fluctuation | variation time) of a 2nd special symbol rather than (normal mode, rush preparation mode). In this case, the change time until the second decorative symbol which changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is changed to correspond to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The stop display frequency of the fluctuating second decorative symbol changes, and accordingly, the second special symbol which fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol per unit time is a jackpot symbol (of the second special symbol). A big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the big hit symbol and the second special symbol) or a small hit symbol (the second hit symbol of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol) The probability of being stopped and displayed at the small bonus symbol) is improved or decreased, so that the variation time until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that varies in accordance with the second special symbol are stopped and displayed is changed. To change the willingness to play It can be. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decoration symbol that changes in response to the change of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that changes in response to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the symbol variation time (second variation time) is changed, and the first decorative symbol that varies in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is provided. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest even in a period before the big hit symbol (the first special symbol big hit symbol and the first decorative symbol big hit symbol corresponding to the first special symbol big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  Also, as described above, in the third embodiment, the state before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, And part of the functions of the pachinko machine 1) are limited, so if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first The control of the second big hit game can be started when the change of the special symbol starts. That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the control of the first big hit game is started when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol (first big hit A, first big hit B). On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first special symbol lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Since the control of the second big hit game can be started by shifting to the rush mode as an opportunity, it becomes possible to realize a novel game where the second big hit game or the small hit game is suddenly started after the first special symbol change starts. This can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, it is possible to focus on the start of change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the first special symbol while expecting the occurrence of the second big hit game, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest. In addition, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) The control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started not only in the case of stop display at the big hit symbol) but also at the start of the change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the first special symbol. In addition to being able to acquire a prize ball by obtaining, in addition to being able to play with attention other than the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol , Can improve the willingness to play, and can suppress a decrease in the interest of gaming.

  In the third embodiment described above, the second special symbol side game is substantially limited before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery. If the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the second special event will be triggered by the start of a change in which the first special symbol lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. In order to be able to start control of big hit games and small hit games, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or small hit, the first special The control of the second big hit game or the small hit game can be started without being triggered by the start of the fluctuation in which the result of the first special symbol lottery of the symbol becomes a big hit, but the big hit (first big hit A, Before winning the first big hit B) In other words, the result of the second special symbol lottery can be obtained by preventing the second special symbol side game from being executed or by restricting the second special symbol from being stopped and displayed. When a big hit D) or a small win, the result of the first special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is always changed to the rush mode triggered by the start of a change that becomes a big hit, so that the second big hit game or the small hit game You may enable it to start control. As a result, if the second special symbol lottery result is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started. Control of the first big hit game is always started, and in order to obtain double joy by continuously generating hits (big hits, small hits), the game motivation is improved and the gaming interest is lowered Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game mode is changed to the rush mode before the control of the first big hit game is started. In order to make it possible to acquire a prize ball by a game on the second special symbol side, a first decorative symbol that changes in response to changes in the first special symbol and the first special symbol during the execution of the game on the first special symbol side Is controlled by the first jackpot game based on the fact that the game is stopped and displayed on the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) It is possible to provide a new game that breaks the conventional common sense that can be acquired, and can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition to the first big hit game, since a prize ball can be obtained by shifting to the rush mode, the game willingness is improved and the first decorative symbol that varies in accordance with the first special symbol and the first special symbol is changed. Since the game can be played while paying attention not only to the stop symbol, the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the big special symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol) Even if it is not stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol jackpot symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot symbol), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the third embodiment, during the rush mode, the second special symbol lottery result is controlled to be a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode before starting the control of the first big hit game, and the second special symbol side When the game is executed, the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit. Will be. That is, the second special symbol side game is executed during the rush mode, or the second special symbol side lottery based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit When the control of the game or the small hit game is started, the player subsequently changes the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the first special symbol to the big hit symbol (big hit of the first special symbol) It can be inferred that the display is stopped at the first jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the symbol and the first special symbol or is controlled by the first jackpot game. As described above, the second special symbol side game is executed during the rush mode, or the second special symbol lottery result is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit based on the second. When control of big hit games or small hit games is started, it is possible to recognize that hits (big hits, small hits) occur continuously, and to improve the game motivation by obtaining double joy, Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the game on the second special symbol side can be executed even in a game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode), so a game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode) In the rush preparation mode), when the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit There is. In other words, the second special symbol side game is executed, or the second special symbol lottery result is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, or a second big hit game or small Even if control of the hit game is started, there is a case where the first big hit game is not controlled thereafter. In other words, the second special symbol side game based on the fact that the game on the second special symbol side is executed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit. The start of the hit game control suggests the control of the first big hit game, and does not necessarily indicate that it is executed. Before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol side can not be played as described above, or the second special symbol side can not be executed. When the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started by restricting not to stop display, the first big hit game may always be controlled thereafter.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the first special symbol change display During the first special symbol variation display (during the period of the first special symbol variation time) from the start of the game until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (expectation of the winning ball than the normal mode (low probability non-short state)) During the variable display of the first decorative symbol executed corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol by controlling to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) which is high in value and advantageous to the player Suddenly, a rush mode occurs, which can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, even before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the rush mode occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol so that the player can advance the game advantageously. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In the third embodiment, the time reduction flag is set to the off state when the first special symbol display 1185 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in step S409a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). In this way, the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) is started. However, it is sufficient that the rush mode is started at least after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the big special symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S502a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129), the rush mode is ended by setting the probability variation flag to the off state. However, the rush mode may be terminated at least before the change display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (before the change time of the first special symbol elapses). For example, in step S501a of the first variation process (FIG. 129), the rush mode is started by setting the time flag to the off state before the variation time of the first special symbol elapses. The rush mode may be terminated by setting the probability variation flag to the off state before the variation time has elapsed. In other words, in this example, the rush mode is controlled from the start of variable display of the first special symbol based on winning the big win in the first special symbol lottery until the stop display with the big win symbol. It is only necessary to display the fluctuation display (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol). The rush mode is started in the middle of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, or the rush mode is activated in the middle of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Or it may be terminated.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big win (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( Since the second variation time) is a long time fluctuation that is much longer than the first special symbol variation time (first variation time) of 600 seconds, the big special (first big hit A, Before winning the first jackpot B), the game is directed to execute only the game on the first special symbol side. That is, in the first special symbol lottery, the state before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of the pachinko machine 1) ) Is restricted. Then, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to the stop display with the big hit symbol During the change display (during the period of change time of the first special symbol), the restriction is lifted by shifting to the rush mode and the game on the second special symbol side is allowed to be executed, and a prize ball is obtained than in the normal mode. The expected value is improved. For this reason, it is restricted by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the display of the first special symbol and the variation of the first decorative symbol executed corresponding to the first special symbol (during the period of the variation time of the first special symbol). Since the game is permitted to be executed on the second special symbol side, the player can be surprised and surprised. In addition, during the change display of the first special symbol (during the period of the first special symbol change), the restriction is lifted by shifting to the rush mode to allow the execution of the game on the second special symbol side It is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests by executing a simple game.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Time change (second variation time) is 600 seconds and the first special symbol is stopped by changing the display frequency of the second special symbol significantly longer than the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol. By reducing it significantly compared to the display frequency, the game will be executed so that only the game on the first special symbol side is executed before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery. In the first special symbol lottery, the game is shifted to the rush mode until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won. Ma ) Weakens the launching strength of the game ball by the hitting ball launching device 500 to less than a predetermined strength so that it cannot be hit to the right, or the game ball that has been hit by the hitting ball launching device 500 at a predetermined strength or more enters the right area of the center accessory 2500 By stopping the detection by the second start port sensor 3132 so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 2102, or the game ball enters the second start port 2102 Even if the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132, the detection signal is ignored (the first special symbol lottery in step S201 of the first / second start port winning process (FIG. 125)). If the flag indicating that the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) has been set is set, it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 2102. In the case where the game on the second special symbol side cannot be executed by doing so, and the big special (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol During the fluctuation display (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the game on the second special symbol side may be executed by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state). Thus, the main game (game on the first special symbol side or game on the second special symbol side) can be switched reliably between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big win (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( Since the second variation time) is a long time fluctuation that is much longer than the first special symbol variation time (first variation time) of 600 seconds, the big special (first big hit A, Prior to winning the first big hit B), it can be said that the suspension of fluctuation of the second special symbol is substantially restricted. Then, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (first special symbol) The frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol (frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started) is increased by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) . That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol) Even if the stop display is not performed in the big win symbol), the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, so that 2 Probability that special symbol is displayed as a big hit symbol or small hit symbol and the second decorative symbol is a big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol or a small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol Improves the probability of stop display. In this way, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the variation display of the first decorative symbol executed in correspondence with the first special symbol and the first special symbol (during the period of variation time of the first special symbol). Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, the player can be surprised and surprised. In addition, by executing a novel game in which the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is increased by shifting to the rush mode during the first special symbol variation display (during the first special symbol variation time period). It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( The second special symbol is substantially limited to the second special symbol by stopping the fluctuation for a long time that is much longer than the first special symbol variable time (first variable time) of 600 seconds. In the special symbol lottery, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won, the rush mode (high probability of non-probability) during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol) It is configured to increase the frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol (frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started) by shifting to the short-time state), but in the first special symbol lottery, A, first big hit B Until the prize is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol are restricted from being stopped and displayed, and in the first special symbol lottery When winning big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), during rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) during the first special symbol change display (during the first special symbol change time period) By shifting, the restriction may be released and the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined in step S501b of the second variation processing (FIG. 137) that the second variation time has elapsed (the second variation timer has become 0), the state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag is confirmed and rushed. If the game mode (normal mode (low probability non-time short state), rush preparation mode (high probability short time state)) other than the mode (high probability non-time short state), it will change according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol The second special symbol that changes based on the fact that the process ends without displaying the second decorative symbol to be stopped and shifts to a game mode other than the rush mode, and the second special symbol that changes in accordance with the second special symbol. Two decorative symbols may be displayed in a stopped manner. Thus, the main game (game on the first special symbol side or game on the second special symbol side) can be switched reliably between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big win (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time state), the long-time variation is much longer than the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol (second variation time) is 600 seconds. When winning big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), during rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) during the first special symbol change display (during the first special symbol change time period) By shifting, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol) Even if it is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol), the variation time until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol are stopped (changed) is reduced. The stop display frequency of the second special symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, so that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol per unit time. The probability that the probability and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol or the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is improved. In this way, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the variation display of the first decorative symbol executed in correspondence with the first special symbol and the first special symbol (during the period of variation time of the first special symbol). Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, the player can be surprised and surprised. In addition, by executing a novel game in which the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is increased by shifting to the rush mode during the first special symbol variation display (during the first special symbol variation time period). It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol until the big win (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The first special symbol lottery (the first big hit A, the first big hit) is performed for a long time that is much longer than the first special symbol fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of 600 seconds (second fluctuation time). B) When winning, change the second special symbol by changing to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) while the first special symbol is changing (during the first special symbol fluctuation time) The time (second fluctuation time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, when the mode is shifted to the rush mode, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is shortened as compared with the game modes other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode). When changing to the rush mode, it is only necessary to change the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol from the game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode). You may extend the fluctuation | variation time (2nd fluctuation | variation time) of a 2nd special symbol rather than game modes (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than rush mode. In this case, the change time until the second decorative symbol which changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is changed to correspond to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The stop display frequency of the changing second decorative symbol changes, and accordingly, the probability that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol per unit time and the second decorative symbol is the second special symbol. Since the probability of stopping and displaying the small hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small special symbol corresponding to the small special symbol of the second special symbol is improved or decreased, it varies corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The willingness to play can be changed by changing the variation time until the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decoration symbol that changes in response to the change of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that changes in response to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the symbol variation time (second variation time) is changed, and the first decorative symbol that varies in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is provided. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming entertainments even if the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) is not stopped and displayed.

  Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the second special symbol until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol lottery is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the first special symbol variation time (first variation time). The control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the fact that it becomes is rarely started. On the other hand, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being displayed (first special symbol) In order to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) to 5 seconds by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) during the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery The control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the fact that the result is a big hit or a small hit can be started frequently. In other words, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the rush mode is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol). By shifting to the (high probability non-short-time state), the probability of starting control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is improved. In this way, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the variation display of the first decorative symbol executed in correspondence with the first special symbol and the first special symbol (during the period of variation time of the first special symbol). Since the start frequency of the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game is increased and the opportunity for the player to win a prize ball is increased, the player can be surprised and surprised. In addition, during the first special symbol variation display (during the first special symbol variation time period), the transition to the rush mode increases the frequency of starting the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game. By executing the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the game on the second special symbol side is substantially limited before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, Although the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery becomes the big hit or the small hit is configured, the second big hit game or the small hit game is configured. The control may not be started. For example, before winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol side game cannot be executed as described above, or the second special symbol is not executed. If the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit by restricting not to stop the display, the start of the change that the result of the first special symbol lottery of the first special symbol will always be a big hit As a trigger, the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game may be started by shifting to the rush mode. As a result, when the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being the big hit or the small hit, the control of the first big hit game is always started after that. As a result, hits (big hits, small hits) are continuously generated, so that a double joy is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the first special symbol change display By shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) in the middle (during the period of change time of the first special symbol), it is possible to obtain a prize ball by the game on the second special symbol side. That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol corresponding to the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol) The second decorative symbol that changes in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit symbol (the big special symbol of the second special symbol and the second special symbol). Big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the special symbol) and small hit symbol (the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small bonus symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the small bonus symbol of the second special symbol) A prize ball can be obtained by controlling to the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the stop display at. In this way, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first special symbol corresponding to the big special symbol of the first special symbol and the big special symbol of the first special symbol) Even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed, the player can start control of the second big hit game or the small hit game by suddenly shifting to the rush mode. Can be given. In addition, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) In the case of stop display with a big hit symbol), not only the control of the first big hit game is started, but also during the variability display of the first special symbol (during the period of change time of the first special symbol), the rush mode (high probability) Even in the case of transition to a non-time-saving state, the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game can be started, thereby increasing the opportunity for the player to win a prize ball, thereby suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest. be able to.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big win (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time state), the long-time variation is much longer than the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol (second variation time) is 600 seconds. When winning big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), during rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) during the first special symbol change display (during the first special symbol change time period) By shifting, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses, the rush mode is ended, and the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) The control of the first jackpot game is started in response to the stop display at the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the jackpot symbol and the first special symbol. That is, when the change time (second change time) of the second special symbol is shortened by shifting to the rush mode, the big bonus (the first big hit A, the first big hit is always made after the first special symbol lottery). It can be recognized that the game is controlled by the first big hit game based on winning of B). For this reason, even when the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (during the period of variation of the first special symbol), the second decorative symbol that varies in accordance with the variation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. By executing a novel game in which it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the variation time (second variation time) is changed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the third embodiment described above, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the time-shortening function is stopped when the first special symbol variation starts and the rushing function is stopped. Although it is configured to shift to the preparation mode (high probability non-short-time state), the timing for stopping the time-shortening function (occurrence time of the rush mode) is not limited to the start of fluctuation, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. It may be possible to appropriately set the timing for stopping the time-saving function within the period up to (the generation time of the rush mode). For example, the time reduction function may be stopped after 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit in the rush preparation mode, and the transition to the rush mode may be controlled, or the first special symbol may be controlled in the rush preparation mode. When the lottery result is a big win, a plurality of types of time (for example, 0 seconds) determined in advance by starting the change of the first special symbol according to the type of the first big hit or the type of the first special symbol change pattern When the time determined from 5 seconds and 10 seconds has elapsed (at the start of fluctuation), the time reduction function may be stopped and the transition control to the rush mode may be performed.

  In the first to third embodiments described above, when the transition control to the rush mode is performed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs a display for notifying that effect, and thus has an advantageous state different from the big hit or the small hit. The player recognizes the occurrence of the occurrence, but the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not display the notification to shift to the rush mode. By continuously performing the effect display during the big hit game executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in relation to the first big hit game when the big hit is made in the preparation mode (first output) In the effect display during the jackpot game, the number of rounds is added and updated until the rush mode is finished (for example, the rush mode is opened after executing 16 rounds of the first jackpot game). When the second big hit game or the small hit game is started in the rush mode, the number of rounds added to the first big hit game is displayed.) End of the first big hit game and start of the rush mode The rush mode may be made to be integrated with the first jackpot game so that the number of award balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game is much higher than that of a conventional gaming machine ( In the above example, it is possible to improve the value of the jackpot by making the illusion that it has been increased by a factor of about 2). When a special symbol lottery results in a big win, a game ball is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 during the variation of the decorative symbol executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the lottery result. It may be possible to execute an effect that makes the rush mode appear integrally with the reach effect by executing a reach effect that allows the player to win a prize ball while the reach effect is being executed. In the third embodiment, the first jackpot game is started when the rush mode is started as the rush preparation mode based on the fact that the first special symbol lottery has been won. After the notification is made, the effect display during the first jackpot game is started and is continued until the first jackpot game is finished (the first jackpot game is displayed at the first jackpot game executed together with the start of the rush mode). The rush mode and the first jackpot game may be shown together by adding and updating the number of rounds until the game is finished. As the number of prize balls that can be won in a jackpot game is greatly increased compared to conventional gaming machines (about twice in the above example), the value of the jackpot can be improved and the value of the jackpot can be improved. Can be improved. In addition, when starting the first big hit game, an effect of notifying the start of the first big hit game and switching to the right hit is executed, and in the first big hit game, a game ball is shot into the right area of the center bonus 2500 It comes to let you. Therefore, even when the effect display during the first jackpot game is executed at the start of the rush mode, or even when the effect display during the first jackpot game is continued until the rush mode is ended after the first jackpot game. It is possible to cause a player to place a game ball in the right area of the center character 2500 and to win a game ball in the second big prize opening 2103b, and thereby a prize ball can be obtained, so there is no disadvantage. . As described above, in the present example, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the rush mode, either the small hit or the big win results, and there is no loss. Therefore, whenever the second special symbol lottery is performed during the rush mode, the small hit game or the first big hit game is executed and a prize ball can be obtained. That is, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, a state in which a winning ball can be obtained by controlling the transition to the rush mode after the first big hit game is finished (the first big hit game and the second big hit game or the small hit in the rush mode). (Game) occurs continuously, and in the third embodiment, a state in which a winning ball can be acquired by continuously shifting to the rush mode before the start of the first big hit game occurs. The first big hit game and the second in the rush mode are performed by executing a series of effects (for example, playing a video composed of a series of stories, for example) over a state where the continuously generated prize balls can be acquired. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between big hit games and small hit games. In addition, as a reach effect that is executed over the period from the start to the end of the rush mode in the third embodiment, for example, after the battle mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second big hit game in the rush mode or When a small hit game is started, a message such as “Right-handed to shoot a bullet into the enemy army!” Is displayed to cause the player to hit the right and the player hits the right to enter the second big prize opening 2103b. In response to the game ball being received, the enemy army may be shot with a shell to reduce the number of enemy forces. In addition, as described above, in order to execute the effect that causes the player to hit the game ball in the right area of the center character 2500 as an effect that makes the first big hit game and the rush mode appear integrally, A game ball can be driven into the right side area of 2500 so that the game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 2103b, and a winning ball can be obtained, so there is no disadvantage.

  In the third embodiment, when a big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the first variation pattern setting process ( In step S409a of FIG. 191), when the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol indicator 1185, the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) is started by setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state. However, the rush mode may be started after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the time flag is set to the off state before the variable time of the first special symbol elapses in step S501a of the first changing process (FIG. 129). You may comprise so that the rush mode may be started during the change display of 1 special symbol (during the period of change time of the 1st special symbol). That is, in the third embodiment, when winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, either one of 300 seconds or 600 seconds is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the time for controlling to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) is set differently by setting the hourly flag to the OFF state. Even when the start timing of the rush mode is changed by changing the time from when the display is started until the time flag is set to the off state, the rush mode is started and ended (the first special symbol change) The time until the time elapses) changes, and the time for controlling to the rush mode can be varied.

  A specific example in the case where the start timing of the rush mode is changed during the first special symbol variation display (during the first special symbol variation time period) as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. FIG. 195 is an example of a variation pattern table selected in the high-probability short-time state (rush preparation mode), and FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing the contents of effects executed when the start timing of the rush mode is changed. It is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the variation pattern table selected in the high probability short-time state (rush preparation mode) is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B). A variation pattern table and a variation pattern table that is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost are set. In the variation pattern table selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), four types of fluctuation patterns A to D at the big hit are set. In the variation pattern table selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, two types of variation patterns A and B when lost are set. If the big win (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability short-time state (rush preparation mode), the step of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191) In S402a, the variation pattern table when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is selected as the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the high probability short-time state (rush preparation mode), and the big hit fluctuation Any variation pattern of patterns A to D is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol lottery is lost in the high-probability short-time state (rush preparation mode), the high-probability short-time state (rush preparation mode) in step S403a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). As a variation pattern table corresponding to the above, the variation pattern table when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost is selected, and either variation pattern A or B is determined.

  In the big hit hour variation patterns A to D, the variation time of the first special symbol from the start to the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is set, and the timing for setting the time reduction flag to the off state ( Rush mode start timing) is set. In this example, 70 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol for the big hit hour variation patterns A to D, and after the variation time of the first special symbol elapses, it is won in the first special symbol lottery. The first big hit game based on the above is executed. In addition, in the big hit hour variation patterns A to D, the timing for setting the hourly flag to the OFF state (the start timing of the rush mode) is different. First, in the big hit hour variation pattern A, the first special symbol fluctuation display Since the transition to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) is made by setting the hour / short flag to the off state when starting the operation, 70 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is the time to control the rush mode. ing. In the big hit hour variation pattern B, since the shift to the rush mode is made by setting the hour / short flag to the OFF state 20 seconds after the first special symbol variation display is started, the variation time of the first special symbol The remaining time of 50 seconds is the time for controlling to the rush mode. In the big hit hour variation pattern C, the first special symbol variation time is changed because the shift to the rush mode is made by setting the hourly flag to the OFF state after 40 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol. The remaining time of 30 seconds is the time for controlling to the rush mode. In this way, in this example, the time for controlling to the rush mode becomes longer as the timing for setting the time reduction flag to the off state (the start timing of the rush mode) is faster, even though the variation time of the first special symbol is the same. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode is increased, and the number of executions of the second small hit game based on the fact that the small special is won in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode is also achieved. As the number increases, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode can be increased.

  In the big hit hour variation pattern D, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the time-short flag is set to the OFF state so that the rush mode (high probability non-time-short state) does not occur. In this way, when the big hit time variation pattern D is executed, the second small hit game based on the fact that the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery can be executed without shifting to the rush mode. It has become difficult. That is, only the first big hit game based on winning the big win in the first special symbol lottery after the variation time of the first special symbol has passed can be executed, and the winning ball can be obtained only by the first big hit game. .

  In the loss variation patterns A and B, the variation time of the first special symbol from the start to the end of variation display of the first special symbol is set. In this example, 70 seconds, which is the same as the big hit time fluctuation patterns A to D, is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for the loss fluctuation pattern A, and the first special symbol is set for the loss fluctuation pattern B. 3 seconds is set as the symbol variation time. Also, in the lost-time fluctuation patterns A and B, the time reduction flag is not set to the OFF state, and the rush preparation mode (high probability time reduction state) is continued even after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. Yes.

  Next, the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the big hit variation patterns A to D and the loss variation pattern A are executed will be described. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the big hit time fluctuation patterns A to D and the loss time fluctuation pattern A, the rush mode (high probability non-time reduction state) is set by setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state. ) Is executed, and if it does not shift to the rush mode, the effect that is notified whether or not to execute the first big hit game is executed. More specifically, “pounding effect 1” is executed as an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the rush mode at a stage of 0 to 20 seconds out of 70 seconds that is the variation time of the first special symbol, and 20 to 20 In the stage of 40 seconds, “pounding stage production 2” is executed as an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the rush mode, and in the stage of 40 to 70 seconds, the first special symbol change time has elapsed and the first The “pounding effect 3” is executed as an effect to notify whether or not the big hit game is executed.

  Specifically, when the big hit hour fluctuation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (A), when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, the hour flag is set to the OFF state to set the rush mode. Since the transition to the (high probability non-short-time state), during the variation display of the first special symbol, as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect of notifying that the rush mode is in effect is executed. Yes. Also, when the big hit hour fluctuation pattern B is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (B), the rush mode is set by setting the hour / short flag to the OFF state 20 seconds after the first special symbol fluctuation display is started. (High probability non-short-time state), but at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, the hero character attacks the enemy character as a successful production of “pounding production 1” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect of notifying the transition to the mode is being executed. Then, the effect which is notified that it is in rush mode is performed as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the remaining time in the variation time of the first special symbol.

  Also, when the big hit hour variation pattern C is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (C), the rush mode is set by setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state 40 seconds after the first special symbol variation display is started. (High probability non-short-time state), but at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, the enemy character attacks the hero character as a failure effect of “pounding effect 1” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. At the stage of 40 seconds, as a success effect of “pounding effect 2” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect is notified that the main character is notified of the transition to the rush mode by avoiding an enemy character attack. Yes. Then, the effect which is notified that it is in rush mode is performed as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the remaining time in the variation time of the first special symbol.

  Also, when the big hit hour fluctuation pattern D is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (D), the hourly flag is turned off when the fluctuation display ends 70 seconds after the first special symbol fluctuation display is started. Although it is set to the state, as a failure production of “pounding production 1” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, the enemy character attacks the hero character, and at the stage of 20 to 40 seconds, As a failure effect of “pounding effect 2” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main character eats an enemy character's attack, and the “pounding effect 3” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the stage of 40 to 70 seconds. As a successful performance, an effect is provided in which a notice that the first big hit game is to be executed after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed due to the hero character standing up. In this way, until the successful effect is executed in any of “pounding effect 1”, “pounding effect 2”, and “pounding effect 3” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the rush mode (high probability non-short state) ) Or whether the first big hit game is executed after the first special symbol variation time has elapsed, so pay attention to the effects that the player expects to display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can do.

  In addition, when the loss variation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (E), the hourly flag is not set to the OFF state, but 0 out of 70 seconds which is the variation time of the first special symbol. As a failure effect of “pounding effect 1” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of ˜20 seconds, the enemy character attacks the hero character and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of 20 to 40 seconds. As the failure production of “pounding production 2”, the hero character eats the enemy character's attack, and as the failure production of “pounding production 3” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the stage of 40 to 70 seconds, the hero character falls down. In this way, an effect of notifying that the first big hit game is not executed is executed. In this way, even during the variable display of the first special symbol based on the fact that the first special symbol lottery has been determined to be lost, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays “pounding effect 1”, “pounding effect 2”, “pounding effect”. By performing the “effect 3”, the player can focus on the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 until the end.

  In the case where the loss variation pattern B is executed immediately before the first special symbol variation display based on any one of the big hit variation patterns B to D and the loss variation pattern A, the first pattern based on the loss variation pattern B is the first. As the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the variation display of the special symbol, a preceding effect that the hero character meets the enemy character may be executed. For example, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the loss variation pattern B, there is a hold waiting for the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the next first special in the hold state. It is determined in advance whether to execute any one of the big hit variation patterns B to D or the loss variation pattern A as the symbol variation display (so-called pre-reading), and the next big variation variation display of the first special symbol When it is determined in advance that any one of the fluctuation patterns B to D and the loss variation pattern A is executed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 precedes the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the loss variation pattern B. What is necessary is just to perform a production. Then, when the preceding effect is executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, in the first special symbol change display executed thereafter, it is based on either the big hit change pattern B to D or the loss change pattern A. It is possible to recognize that the production of “pounding production 1”, “pounding production 2”, “pounding production 3”, etc. is executed, so that the player's expectation can be increased before the execution of such production. .

(Fourth embodiment)
In the third embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the control is performed to shift the game mode to the rush mode when the first special symbol starts to change. When the result of the symbol lottery does not become a big win, control to shift to the rush mode triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol at a predetermined rate (before starting the first big win game after starting the change of the first special symbol) May be executed as long as the control to shift to the rush mode is executed. For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost during the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the first variation pattern is selected and the first variation pattern is selected. The game mode may be shifted to the rush mode when the special symbol starts to change. By configuring in this way, the chances of winning a prize ball increase, so that when the first special symbol starts to change, attention can be paid to the occurrence of the rush mode, and the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed. Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described.

[First variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first variation pattern setting process in the fourth embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 191) of 3rd Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection according to the gaming state (step S403a) if the flag indicating that the big hit is won is not set (NO in step S401a). The variation pattern is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a ′).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the determined fluctuation pattern is a specific fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern of 180 seconds and a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds corresponding to the first special symbol deviation in the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198E described later). (Step S408a ′), and if it is a specific variation pattern, the time reduction flag is turned off to stop the time reduction function (step S409a), and then the process proceeds to step S405a.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the determined variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern of 180 seconds and a variation pattern of 300 seconds corresponding to the first special symbol deviation in the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198E described later). ) (NO in step S408a ′), the process proceeds to step S405a without operating the time reduction flag.

  Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time gaming state) and the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, at the time when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result is started (triggered by the start of the variable display), the time-saving function is stopped and the rush mode (high probability non-time-short state) is entered. As described above, the probability change flag is set to the off state when the total number of changes between the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game reaches 70. That is, the rush mode (high probability non-short state) is continued until the total number of changes between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 70 after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the probability variation flag is set to the off state when the variation is stopped based on the specific variation pattern of the first special symbol, or the time reduction flag is set to the on state again when the variation of the specific variation pattern of the first special symbol is halted. You may make it transfer to rush mode until the fluctuation | variation based on the specific fluctuation pattern of a 1st special symbol stops, In this case, the fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol is carried out by the 2nd fluctuation | variation start process performed in rush mode. The rush mode may not be terminated until the fluctuation based on at least the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped by not subtracting the number of STs when starting.

[Special game specifications]
FIG. 198 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the fourth embodiment. Here, specs different from the game specs (FIG. 192) in the third embodiment will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 198 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). When the game mode is the normal mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 to 120 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect. In the rush preparation mode, the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost. If it is, one of 3 seconds, 180 seconds, and 300 seconds is set, and if it is a big hit, 300 seconds or 600 seconds is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost in the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state), the specific variation pattern (300 seconds) as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. , 600 seconds), the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state) is entered. That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the variation time of the first special symbol is made different according to the type of the variation variation pattern of the first special symbol. Note that the player's degree of advantage over the rush mode that occurs when the first special symbol lottery result is lost and the specific fluctuation pattern is executed is a big hit. Is set to be low. Specifically, in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, it continues for 180 seconds or 300 seconds, whereas it is a big hit In the rush mode that occurs when it becomes, it continues for 300 seconds or 600 seconds. In other words, in the rush mode that occurs when a big hit is made, the value of the first special symbol lottery results in a loss, and the value is equal to or higher than the rush mode that occurs when a specific variation pattern is executed. It is designed to be given to players. In addition, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the rush mode that occurs when a specific variation pattern is executed, the same value (300 Second or 600 seconds duration), and in this case, the expectation for the rush mode can be further improved.

  In addition, the probability that the specific variation pattern is executed is set to be lower than the winning probability in the high probability state (for example, about 1/500). In this way, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of place, it is possible to generate a state advantageous to the player (rush mode), so that the player has an increased chance of winning a prize ball. In some cases, the expectation for the occurrence of the rush mode can be improved. In recent years, the fluctuation time has been prolonged, but when the above-mentioned reach effect is executed for a long period of time and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit is made with the expectation for the big hit gradually increased. It can be generated, so it is effective for improving the game entertainment, but when the off-line symbol is stopped, not only is the disappointment from the state that the expectation for the big hit is gradually increasing, it is also wasteful for a long period of time. Recognizing that he spent a lot of time, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol is changed over a long period of time when the result of the first special symbol lottery is off, which is advantageous to the player within the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Since the state (rush mode) is generated and the winning ball can be acquired, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest based on the fact that the result of fluctuation over a long period of time is lost.

  In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed, control is performed to vary the variation time of the second special symbol that is executed during the rush mode. By doing so, you may make it vary the number of prize balls which can be acquired in rush mode. For example, the variation time of the second special symbol is always 10 as the rush mode (high probability non-short state) that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of sync and the specific variation pattern is executed. Rush mode C (high probability non-time short state C) set to seconds, or rush mode D (high probability non-time short state D) where the variation time of the second special symbol is always set to 15 seconds Or the second special symbol variation time can be set to 10 seconds and 15 seconds, and is more likely to be set to 10 seconds than 15 seconds (for example, 10 seconds with a probability of 80%) Set to 15 seconds with a probability of 20%) and set the second special symbol variation time to 10 seconds and 15 seconds as in the rush mode C. Yes, 10 seconds Is likely to be set to 15 seconds (for example, set to 15 seconds with a probability of 80%, and set to 10 seconds with a probability of 20%), and rush mode D (high probability non-short state D) You may make it control to either. As a result, it is not possible to determine the degree of advantage only by the type of the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the duration of the rush mode, and the type of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the duration of the rush mode, and the second special symbol. Since the degree of advantage can be determined only by comprehensively determining the fluctuation time of the game, it is possible to draw more attention to the game and improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the second special symbol in the rush mode that occurs when the big hit occurs in the rush mode that occurs when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. It is set so that the player's advantage is lowered by changing the second special symbol with a change time (10 seconds or 15 seconds) longer than or equal to the change time (5 seconds or 10 seconds). In other words, in the rush mode that occurs when a big win is reached, the result of the first special symbol lottery is off and the value is equal to or higher than the rush mode that occurs when a specific variation pattern is executed. Is given to the player. In addition, the second special symbol in the rush mode that occurs when the first special symbol lottery result is out of order and the rush mode that occurs when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed is also a big hit. The second special symbol may be changed with a change time (5 seconds or 10 seconds) equivalent to the change time of, and in this case, the expectation for the rush mode can be further improved.

  In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, and when it is determined to be a specific variation pattern, the variation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode for which the transition control is performed is the variation variation of the first special symbol. You may make it differ according to the kind of pattern. For example, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the variation time of the first special symbol is determined as a variation pattern of 180 seconds as a specific variation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed. On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined as the variation pattern of 300 seconds as the specific variation pattern, the first special symbol variation pattern table is controlled so as to shift to the rush mode C. A plurality of variation pattern tables according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol may be provided. In this case, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed. Difference in the degree of advantage of each of the two types of rush modes (rush mode C, rush mode D) that occur in some cases. More prize balls can be obtained when the rush mode continues for a longer period of time (in this example, rush mode C) when the symbol lottery result is out of sync and a specific variation pattern is executed Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest by focusing on the occurrence of the rush mode.

  Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined as a variation pattern of 300 seconds as a specific variation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed. On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined as the variation pattern of 180 seconds as the specific variation pattern, the first special symbol variation pattern table is controlled to shift to the rush mode C. A plurality of variation pattern tables according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol may be provided. In this case, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed. Earn the same amount of prize balls regardless of which of the two types of rush modes (rush mode C, rush mode D) occurs. Therefore, if the rush mode occurs, not only can the game enjoyment be improved, but if the variation time of the second special symbol in the above two types of rush modes is the same, it is disadvantageous to the player The advantageous degree of the rush mode C having a short duration can be increased. That is, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each of the two types of rush modes is approximately the same, the rush mode C that is executed in a shorter time increases the number of prize balls obtained per unit time and is more for the player. Since it becomes an advantageous state, the advantageous degree of rush mode C with a short duration can be raised.

[Game state transition]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 199, a transition of the gaming state according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, a different part from 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated and it does not duplicately explain.

(Rush preparation mode)
As in the third embodiment, in the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball mainly at the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) is executed. Based on a variation pattern other than the specific variation pattern described later (non-specific variation pattern; in this example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 3 seconds is set), the result of the special symbol lottery is 70 times consecutively off. When the first special symbol fluctuates 70 times consecutively (when it is not specified), the game moves to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In the third embodiment, the first special symbol change is triggered only when the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times. As a transition to the high probability non-short-time state (rush mode, second game state), in this embodiment, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of sync, based on a specific variation pattern When the first special symbol fluctuates (when it is not specified), the first special symbol is shifted to a high probability non-short-time state (rush mode, second game state) when the first special symbol fluctuates. When the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the high probability non-short game state (rush mode) continues until the big hit game based on the first big hit is started. When the special symbol lottery result is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed, the number of variations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is continued until the total number reaches 70 times. It has become.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the occurrence chance of the rush mode is increased as compared with the third embodiment. That is, in the third embodiment, the rush mode is generated only when the big hit is generated in the rush preparation mode. However, in the fourth embodiment, a specific variation pattern is generated even if the big hit is not generated in the rush preparation mode. The rush mode is generated when the is selected. When the rush mode is generated, specifically, when the first special symbol based on the specific variation pattern starts to be changed, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, “rush mode has entered! ) And sound output from the speaker (for example, “rush mode rush. Please make a right strike”), lighting mode of the lamp and LED (lighting mode that encourages the right stroke, for example, a door that surrounds the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 The lamp and the LED provided in the frame 5 are controlled to shift to the rush mode and to the right-handed mode by a mode in which light moves from the launch rail 660 toward the right region of the center accessory 2500). The player is notified.

  The rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of sync and the specific variation pattern is executed is the number of variations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. Since it continues until the total reaches 70 times, during the rush mode, the remaining number of fluctuations that can be stayed in the rush mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a chance time has occurred to the player, To recognize that there is a time limit. Further, when the rush mode is terminated when the variation of the first special symbol based on the specific variation pattern is stopped, the elapsed time after the game mode is shifted to the rush mode in the liquid crystal display device 1900, , Display the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol (remaining time that can be controlled in the rush mode), etc., so that the player recognizes that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit Also good.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first special symbol lottery result is lost, and the first special symbol is changed based on a specific variation pattern (when the specific difference is lost). Although the transition control to the rush mode is shown when the change of the special symbol starts, the transition control to the rush mode is caused by the fact that the first special symbol is fluctuated by a specific variation pattern and the symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be. For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, when the variation of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern is stopped, the specific variation pattern is set in step S515a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129). It is determined whether or not the first special symbol has been changed based on the result, and when it is determined that the first special symbol has been changed based on the specific fluctuation pattern, the time reduction flag is turned off to stop the time reduction function. It may be. In this case, since the transition control to the rush mode is performed after the change of the first special symbol, the relationship between the change time of the specific change pattern (180 seconds or 300 seconds in the above example) and the duration of the rush mode is lost. It is not necessary to change the first special symbol over a long period of time (180 seconds or 300 seconds) as described above.

  In this case, the rush mode is continued until the ST number becomes 0, but after the transition control to the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state), the first special symbol lottery is performed before the ST number becomes 0. When the result is a big hit, the rush mode is terminated and the transition control to the rush preparation mode (high probability time-short state) is made after the first big hit.

  In the rush mode in which the first special symbol lottery result is out of order and the transition control is performed due to the fact that the first special symbol is changed based on the specific fluctuation pattern and the off symbol is stopped and displayed. Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed. As described above, since the result of the second special symbol lottery will not be lost during the rush mode, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed only during the rush mode. The number of award balls that a player can acquire is larger than the case where both are changed. In this example, as described above, the first start port 2101 is disposed in the left region of the center accessory 2500, while the second start port 2102 is disposed in the right region of the center accessory 2500. A game ball can enter the first start port 2101, but no game ball can enter the second start port 2102, and if it hits the right, a game ball can enter the second start port 2102. A game ball cannot enter the 1 start port 2101. Therefore, if the shift is controlled to the rush mode and only the right strike is made without making a left strike, the first special symbol variation is executed and the ST count is subtracted until the first reserved number counter becomes zero. However, after the first number-of-holds counter reaches 0, the first special symbol does not start to change, and the winning ball can be obtained by generating a small hit or a big win in the remaining number of STs. .

  In the above-described example, the pachinko machine 1 that performs so-called sequential fluctuation control that changes the first special symbol and the second special symbol each time a start prize is generated is used. However, the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol. Even if it is a pachinko machine 1 that performs so-called priority fluctuation control that fluctuates in priority, the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, and the first special symbol varies based on a specific fluctuation pattern. Then, it may be possible to control to the rush mode in which the transition control is performed based on the fact that the off symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the rush mode for controlling the transition based on the fact that the first special symbol is changed based on a specific fluctuation pattern and the off symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to always change the second special symbol and not to start the first special symbol change by right-handing in, so that the number of STs at the time when the transition control to the rush mode is controlled The winning ball can be obtained by changing the second special symbol in all remaining times to generate a small hit or a big hit.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, the rush occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost and a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Although the transition control is performed in the mode, the transition control may be performed in the rush mode when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific failure. Specifically, a first off symbol random number for determining a off symbol is provided as a random number related to the lottery process of the first special symbol, and the first off symbol random number is obtained when the result of the first special symbol lottery is off. Based on the above, it is configured to draw a specific out-of-design or non-specific out-of-design, and when a lottery result indicating that a specific out-of-design is obtained, the transition control to the rush mode is performed. May be.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the third embodiment described above, the variation time of the special symbol is varied according to the game mode (game state), and when the game mode is the normal mode (normal state) and the rush preparation mode (high probability short-time state). Is set to 600 seconds as the variation time of the second special symbol, and is set to 5 seconds as the variation time of the second special symbol when the game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short-time state). That is, the change time of the second special symbol is changed with the transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, but the change time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is changed from the start of the rush preparation mode. Depending on the number of changes in the special symbol required before shifting to the rush mode (since the game on the first special symbol side is performed in the rush preparation mode, the number of changes mainly in the first special symbol) may be varied. In this example, differences from the third embodiment will be described below as a fifth embodiment.

  First, in the fifth embodiment, after the first big hit game based on the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is completed in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode, the game mode is changed to the rush preparation mode (high probability). After the transition to the rush preparation mode, every time the special symbol variation display is executed, 1 is added to the special symbol variation count counter, and the special symbol variation count in the rush preparation mode is added. Counting. In the rush preparation mode, since the game on the first special symbol side is performed, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is mainly counted. Then, in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode, after the first special symbol variation display based on the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is started, the game mode is changed to the rush mode (high probability non-short time) State), the number of changes in the special symbol counted until the transition to the rush mode is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (50 in this example) or less than the predetermined number. 2 The variation pattern table used for determining the variation time of the special symbol is different.

  As shown in FIG. 200, in the variation pattern table used during the rush mode, two types of variation patterns in which 5 seconds and 10 seconds are set as the variation time of the second special symbol are set. Some of the two types of variation patterns are determined. Further, in the variation pattern table used during the rush mode, the number of variations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or less, and less than 50 times. The probability of determining each variation pattern among the two types of variation patterns is different. Specifically, when the number of changes in the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more, 5 seconds is set as the change time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining the variation pattern is 80%, and the probability of determining the variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 20%. On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, the fluctuation in which 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol The probability of determining a pattern is 20%, and the probability of determining a variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 80%.

  As described above, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more, 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining the variation pattern in which 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is set higher than the probability of determining the variation pattern. In addition, when the number of changes of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more, the change of the second special symbol is more than the case of less than 50 times. The probability of determining 5 seconds with the fluctuation time shortened in the time is increased. For this reason, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time for controlling to the rush mode (the variation time of the first special symbol), the variation time of the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened. By increasing the probability of determination, the number of changes in the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode increases, and the second based on winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode. Since the number of executions of the small hit game increases, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode can be increased. In other words, when the number of changes in the special symbol executed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is larger, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined to be shorter during the rush mode. By increasing the probability of performing, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode. And as the number of special symbol changes required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode increases, the player's dissatisfaction and frustration tend to increase, but it can be acquired during the rush mode Such a large number of award balls can eliminate such dissatisfaction and frustration of the player.

  On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, the fluctuation in which 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol The probability of determining a variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of determining the pattern. In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, the variation of the second special symbol is more than the case of the number of variations of 50 or more. The probability of deciding to 10 seconds with a long fluctuation time is increased. For this reason, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time for controlling to the rush mode (the variation time of the first special symbol), the variation time of the variation time of the second special symbol is increased. By increasing the probability of determination, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode is reduced, and the second based on winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode. Since the number of executions of the small hit game is also reduced, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode is reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the number of changes in the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (50 in this example), the predetermined number of times The probability of deciding the variation time of the second special symbol to be shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol is higher than the case where the number of variations of the special symbol is less than If it is less than 50 times in the example, it may be configured such that the probability of determining the variation time of the second special symbol to be shorter than the predetermined number of times is higher. . For example, if the number of changes in the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, the change in which 5 seconds is set as the change time of the second special symbol When the probability of determining a pattern is 80%, the probability of determining a variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 20%, and when the number of variations of the special symbol is 50 or more Has a 20% probability of determining a variation pattern in which the second special symbol variation time is set to 5 seconds, and a probability of determining a variation pattern in which the second special symbol variation time is set to 10 seconds is 80%. And it is sufficient. In such a configuration, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened during the rush mode when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is smaller. By increasing the probability of deciding to be made, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode. And the fewer the number of special symbol changes required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode, the more prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode. Can play games with tension.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of changes in the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 or more or less than 50. 2 The variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the special symbol is configured to be different, but the number of variations of such special symbol is not the fixed number of times such as 50 times, but the rush preparation You may comprise so that it may become the frequency | count which changes according to the kind of big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) used as the opportunity which transfers to a mode. For example, if the jackpot that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode is the first jackpot A, the number of special symbol changes required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 20 times or more. Or less than 20 times, and if the big hit that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode is the first big hit B, after the start of the rush preparation mode until the transition to the rush mode What is necessary is just to discriminate | determine whether it is 50 times or more as the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation of the special symbol required. And, as in the fifth embodiment, the number of special symbol changes counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 20 times (first big hit A) or 50 times (first big hit B). ) If it is more than 20 times (first big hit A) or less than 50 times (first big hit B), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation time was shortened during the rush mode. If the probability is determined to be higher, the number of fluctuations of such a special symbol is set to 20 times due to the first big hit A and becomes more than 20 times due to the first big hit B. Since the probability is higher than when it is set to 50 times and more than 50 times, the probability of being executed with a shorter variation time of the second special symbol during rush mode is higher, and acquired during rush mode It is possible to increase the Rukoto is capable of winning balls. That is, for each type of jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode, a judgment criterion at the time of transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode (the second in the rush mode) By changing the variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the special symbol, the winning balls that can be obtained during the rush mode will also differ. It is possible to focus on which type of jackpot that triggers the transition to the preparation mode, and to prevent the game from becoming ruined during the rush preparation mode.

  In the fifth embodiment, whether the number of special symbol changes required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (50 in this example) or less than a predetermined number. In the rush mode, the variation pattern table used for determining the variation time of the second special symbol is made different, but the number of variations of the second special symbol after the shift to the rush mode is You may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine the fluctuation | variation time of a 2nd special symbol may be varied on the occasion of reaching predetermined times (in this example, 50 times). For example, if the number of changes in the second special symbol since the transition to the rush mode is less than a predetermined number (50 in this example), the variation time of the second special symbol is increased. On the other hand, if the number of times the second special symbol has changed since the transition to the rush mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (50 in this example), the second special symbol change time What is necessary is just to make it the probability that it will determine to the thing which shortened fluctuation time among these. In such a configuration, the variation time of the variation time of the second special symbol is triggered when the variation number of the second special symbol after the transition to the rush mode reaches a predetermined number (50 in this example). From the state where the probability of deciding to a longer one is high, the probability of deciding the one with a short variation time among the fluctuation times of the second special symbol has been changed to a state where the probability of deciding is high. It is also possible to change from a state where the probability of determining a variation time shorter among the variation times of symbols to a state where the probability of determining a variation time of the second special symbol as a longer variation time is high. Good. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the rush mode reaches a predetermined number (50 in this example), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed during the rush mode. By changing the probability of determination to be shorter (longer), a predetermined number of times (50 in this example) as the number of times the second special symbol fluctuates since shifting to the rush mode while in the same rush mode Since the frequency of winning a prize ball before and after (the execution frequency of the second small hit game based on winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery) becomes different, it prevents the game from becoming rutted during the rush mode be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained. In addition, the number of round games shown in FIGS. 146, 154, 192, 198, and 200, the opening pattern, the type of winning (big hit, small hit), winning probability, variation time, etc. are examples, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any modification can be made as long as the same effects as those described above are obtained.

(Sixth embodiment)
[Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 201 to 207. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board. 202 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. FIG. 205 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 206 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each main structure. Further, FIG. 207 is a front view in which the front structural member and the front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 262) for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel Peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 There are provided a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second big prize opening 2006 is composed of two big prize winning openings, a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls circulate (see FIG. 207).

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, which is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a. The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape that is open at the front, and has a back box 3010 that has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end in front view in the back box 3010 and discharges a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the center accessory 2500; It is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end of the lower right corner when viewed from the front. Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear box 3010 to be rotatable. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 accommodated in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[Pre-component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

[Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. FIG. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 so that it can be detached from the rear side. The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In a state where the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding unit 1003 and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 205) can be discharged downward.

[Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206 and FIG. 262. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has two LEDs based on a status indicator composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting manner according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation display related to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal hold indicator composed of two LEDs for indicating the number of hold, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of change display has not yet been established, and the reception of a game ball to the first start opening 2002 (start winning prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by The first special symbol display that displays the LED in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is still a variation display By receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004 (occurrence of a start winning) by a first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying a hold number that is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied. A second special that displays the eight special LEDs in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the lottery second special lottery result. Displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the variable display start condition has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 L The number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 when the second special holding number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result are “big hit” or the like And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 206. FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 262) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling the light emission effect, the sound effect, the movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (see FIG. 262). reference).

[Main LCD]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 207. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. 1602. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the box 3010, the right fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixed piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. Is attached to the back box 3010.

[Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 201 to 203 and 205 to 207. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the other one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. Of the plurality of general winning ports 2001 described above, the general winning port 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a is disposed immediately above the second starting port 2004. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is disposed between the first starting port 2002 and the out port 1111. The second grand prize winning port 2006 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2002 in front of the first grand prize winning port 2005.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the second big prize opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls circulate. It is comprised by. In the second big prize opening 2006, the second upper big prize opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in front of the game area 5a, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b is a front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a. Located on the left side below.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, which is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a. The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

[Starting unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 (a) is a perspective view of the front opening unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 208 (b) is a perspective view of the starter unit as seen from behind. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starter unit 2100 has a first starter port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 is a rectangular unit base 2101 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in the left-right direction and has a first big winning port 2005 that penetrates back and forth. A ball receiving portion 2102 that protrudes forward from the upper portion of the center in the left-right direction above the big prize opening 2005 and that forms the first starting port 2002, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, and the first starting port. A ball guiding portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a first A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the start opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with the same size as the first big prize opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first big prize opening door which are horizontally long and flat and are supported by the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the lower side is pivotable so that the first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 attached to the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first big prize opening door member 2112, and a first case winning prize opening 2005 attached to the unit case 2111. A first grand prize opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball and a first attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111. The moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, the first big prize winning port sensor 2114 and the start port unit relay board 2115 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the lower part of the unit case 2111 are attached to the first big. And a starter unit decoration board (not shown) for decorating the winning opening 2005 with light emission.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open to the front with a size that allows a plurality of (for example, four to six) game balls to be received at a time.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the first attacker unit 2110 can be passed through and discharged downward. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided. When the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range on the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. In 2002, it is determined that a game ball has been accepted. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an unauthorized insertion of a tool into the first start port 2002.

  In the start port unit 2100, the first big prize winning door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101 by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101. The first big prize opening 2005 is closed by being inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind. The first grand prize opening door member 2112 is mounted in an upright state in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed, and the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111. The first big prize opening 2005 can be changed from a closed state to an open state by rotating the head so as to move downward.

  The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state where the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. When the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to become higher from the lower side of the first big prize opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first grand prize opening 2005 and contacts the first big prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game balls is changed from below by the inclination of the first big prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, and is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. The game balls received in the first grand prize opening 2005 are detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2114 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111.

[Under the side unit]
Next, the lower side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 (a) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 209 (b) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the side unit as seen from the rear. The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001.

  The lower side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2201. The rear part is open, and each of the three ball receiving parts 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 communicates with the rear end of the ball receiving part 2202 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. And a heel portion 2203 for guiding the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 backward.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. The three ball receivers 2202 protrude from the front surface of the unit base 2201 while being spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 is open upward with such a size that only one game ball can be received at a time.

  When the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the leftmost general winning opening 2001 in front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the side unit upper 2300. The lower side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning ports 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1112 by the flanges 2203, respectively. Then, the game ball guided to the rear of the panel board 1112 is a general winning opening sensor 3015 (see FIG. 245) attached in the back left bottom ball guiding unit 3505 in the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000. Is detected and discharged downward.

[On the side unit]
Next, the upper side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. In the gaming area 5a, the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front.

  The upper side unit 2300 includes a flat unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a shelf 2302 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and extends to the left and right so that the right end side when viewed from the front is lowered. And. The shelf 2302 extends from the left end of the unit base 2301 to the right end.

  The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right by the shelf 2302. To the direction (the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a).

[Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213. FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the center combination of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the center combination of the front unit as viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 212 is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right side in a center accessory in a cross section. Further, FIG. 213 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 213 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG.

  In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is arranged above the start port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view, on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. it can. The center accessory 2500 has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006.

  The center accessory 2500 is a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening 1112 that penetrates largely at the center of the panel plate 1112, and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents entry of a game ball into the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 that is open at the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 so that a game ball in the game area 5a is open on the substantially central outer peripheral surface in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the left side when viewed from the front in the front peripheral wall portion 2512, and a game ball that has circulated through the warp passage 2521 can be released, and is directed rearward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 207) that is open and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 to the rear side of the flange portion 2511 and along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510 toward the center in the left-right direction The guiding path 2523 to be guided and the game ball guided by the guiding path 2523 can be supplied from the left end of the front view. And a stage 2530 that extends to the left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center portion of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction and rolls the supplied game ball in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. I have.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that both left and right ends of the front view are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest portions is slightly increased. I'm out. In other words, the stage 2530 is formed in a gently inclined W shape. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a portion that is slightly higher corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The fan-shaped side guide portions 2532 that are formed at the two lowest portions on the left and right sides of the left and right sides and that are lowered toward the front and that extend to the left and right.

  In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 enters the warp inlet 2520 in the game area 5a, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2530 through the warp passage 2521, the warp outlet 2522, and the guide path 2523 is It is discharged forward from either the central guiding portion 2531 or the side guiding portion 2532 of the stage 2530 and returned to the gaming area 5a again (refluxed). In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 has the first start port 2002 located immediately below the central guiding portion 2531. When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 into the gaming area 5a. The first start port 2002 is received with a very high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 212, the center accessory 2500 has an upper right portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends substantially vertically downward from the right end in front view on the upper side of the center base 2510 to the vicinity of the approximate center in the vertical direction. The front peripheral wall so that the right end side is slightly lowered to the vicinity of the inner periphery of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000) in a state where the game board 5 is assembled from the lower end of the vertical wall part 2512a and the upper right vertical wall part 2512a. A right upper wall portion 2512b in which a portion of the portion 2512 extends rightward, and a right hanging wall portion in which a portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right horizontal wall portion to substantially the same height as the stage 2530. 2512c and a lower right horizontal wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends leftward so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center in the left-right direction. , And a.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 on the outer peripheral side of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b, and an upper right circulation space 2541 in which a game ball can be circulated. A right flow passage 2542 through which the game ball can flow downward on the right side of the right lower hanging wall portion 2512c in communication with the distribution space 2541 and a right flow passage 2542, which is formed below the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d. A lower right circulation space 2543 that can be distributed and communicated with the game area 5a is provided. The upper right circulation space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right circulation space 2543 form a right hit game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size in which the vertical and horizontal dimensions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can flow down along a free path. The right flow passage 2542 is bent so that the vicinity of the lower end portion extending vertically downward extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the width in the left-right direction is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls can flow down in a line up and down.

  The lower right circulation space 2543 has a second attacker passage 2543a that opens to the left after extending to the left so that the left end side in front view is lowered from directly below the portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542, A discharge passage 2543b that communicates with the right end of the two attacker passages 2543a as viewed from the front and extends downward, and a lower end of the discharge passage 2543b that passes through the flange portion 2511 so that a game ball can pass therethrough and is opened rearward. A two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose vertical dimension is about twice the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b has a left and right dimension outside the game ball. The passage is slightly wider than the diameter. When the lower right circulation space 2543 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543 a is on the left side when viewed from the front of the start port unit 2100. It opens toward the left at a height with respect to the winning opening 2005, and a game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c opened at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, and returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being played.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 has an open front as a whole, and a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b at a substantially lower half portion in the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by a portion 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a flat transparent front right decorative plate 2544 extending forward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c to the right flow passage 2542, and the right flowing wall 2542 is behind the right hanging wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right circulation space 2543 is closed by a flat transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 extending forward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d, and the rear is the lower right lateral wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

  The center accessory 2500 protrudes into the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 and includes a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extending in a direction perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game balls. In the right flow path 2542, a plurality of speed reducing ribs 2546 protrude alternately at predetermined intervals from the mutually facing surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 with respect to the direction in which the game balls flow. The plurality of speed reducing ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542 have a distance between the speed reducing ribs 2546 on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the right flow passage 2542 extending vertically, the game ball always flows in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to acceleration due to gravity.

  On the other hand, in the lower right circulation space 2543, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 protrude alternately at predetermined intervals from the mutually facing surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 with respect to the game ball circulation direction. . The plurality of reduction ribs 2546 in the lower right circulation space 2543 are arranged such that the intervals between the reduction ribs 2546 are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball on the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side. Yes. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thus, even in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game balls always flow down in a zigzag manner, and the circulation speed of the game balls is attenuated to prevent the circulation speed of the game balls from becoming too fast.

  In the present embodiment, the right upper distribution space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second start opening 2004, and the second large winning opening 2006 is provided in the lower right distribution space 2543. Is provided.

  Specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 that extends rightward in front view from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a, and one game ball is provided. It is formed so that it can pass only in the vertical direction. A gate sensor 2547 that detects the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003. The gate part 2003 is arranged slightly to the left in front view with respect to the position immediately below the stop part 1006 of the front component member 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The general winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 that closes the lower half of the rear of the upper right circulation space 2541 below the gate portion 2003. Is provided. More specifically, the center accessory 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened at the upper end, and immediately below the general winning opening 2001. And a ball receiving member 2548 formed so that the second starting port 2004 opens leftward on the left side when viewed from the front, and around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction by the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511. A second start port door member 2549 that is rotatably attached and closes the second start port 2004 so that it can be opened and closed, and a second start port door member 2549 that is attached to the rear surface of the flange portion 2511 is driven to open and close. A start opening solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 262), a second start opening sensor 2551 for detecting a game ball received in the second start opening 2004, It is equipped with a.

  The general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500 is opened to a size that can receive only one game ball in a right direction in front view with respect to a position directly below the gate portion 2003. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided rearward from the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center accessory 2500 to the right in the front view.

  The second start port 2004 is opened to the left in front view immediately below the general winning port 2001, and the second start port door member 2549 is rotated counterclockwise in front view to open to the left. As a result, game balls can be received. The second start-up door member 2549 has two outer sides whose outer shape in front view extends from the base circle constituting the lower portion and from one point outside the base circle to contact the base circle. Are formed in a so-called “droplet shape”, and are rotatably attached to the center of the base circle.

  In a normal state, the second start port 2004 is in a state where the start port solenoid 2550 is not energized, and the second start port door member 2549 is in an upright state in which the distal end side is positioned substantially immediately above the base circle. The second starting port door member 2549 is closed to prevent the game ball from being received. Then, when the start port solenoid 2550 is energized according to the normal lottery result lottered by passing the game ball through the gate 2003, the front end side of the second start port door member 2549 moves to the left in front view. In addition, the second start door member 2549 rotates and stops rotating with the tip end side being slightly higher. As a result, the second start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be received. Note that, in a state where the second start port door member 2549 is rotated and opened, the tip of the second start port door member 2549 is substantially coincident with a vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball received in the second start port 2004 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, detected by the second start port sensor 2551, and discharged downward.

  The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right circulation space 2543 so as to open upward. More specifically, the second upper prize opening 2006a constituting the second big prize opening 2006 opens upward at the right end in front view in the second attacker passage 2543a. A second lower big prize opening 2006b constituting 2006 is open leftward and downward in the front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a in the second attacker passage 2543a. The second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are formed such that the left and right widths are in the range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The center accessory 2500 is supported by the center base 2510 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction so as to be able to open and close the second upper prize winning opening 2006a that opens upward, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The second upper prize winning opening 2006a is projected further forward and closed, and is attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 and the flat second upper prize winning opening door member 2552 inclined so that the left end side in front view is lowered. The second upper attacker solenoid 2553 for opening and closing the second upper prize opening door member 2552, and the second upper prize opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received in the second upper prize winning port 2006a (FIG. 262). And the center base 2510 so as to open and close the second lower large prize opening 2006b that opens upward. A second plate-shaped second member that is supported so as to be slidable in the direction and projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 so as to close the second lower large prize opening 2006b, and is inclined so that the left end side in front view is lowered. The lower large prize opening door member 2555, the second lower attacker solenoid 2556 attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 and driving the second lower big prize opening door member 2555 to open and close, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are received. And a second lower prize-winning sensor 2557 (see FIG. 262) for detecting a game ball.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 extends in the left-right direction across the second upper major prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat crossing plate portion 2558 that is inclined so that the left end side is lower and forms part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and is A flat discharge plate portion 2559 that extends in the left-right direction so that the left end side is lowered from the left end in front view of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And. The crossing plate portion 2558 is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is in the range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The discharge plate portion 2559 is formed such that the left and right lengths are in the range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of speed reducing ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on the respective sides of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, they are lined up in the left-right direction at intervals slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game balls. It is installed. In the second attacker passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 213, the first deceleration rib 2546a, the second deceleration rib 2546b, the third deceleration rib 2546c, the fourth deceleration rib 2546d, Ten deceleration ribs 2546 including a fifth deceleration rib 2546e, a sixth deceleration rib 2546f, a seventh deceleration rib 2546g, an eighth deceleration rib 2546h, a ninth deceleration rib 2546i, and a tenth deceleration rib 2546j are provided. An odd-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and an even-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

  Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j and the second upper major prize opening 2006a and the second lower major prize opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is arranged slightly to the right of the left end in front view of the second upper prize winning opening 2006a. The second speed reduction rib 2546b is disposed near the right end of the crossing plate portion 2558 on the left side of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize winning opening 2006a. The third reduction rib 2546c is disposed at the approximate center of the crossing plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is disposed in the vicinity of the left end of the crossing plate portion 2558 on the right side of the right end of the second lower large prize opening 2006b when viewed from the front. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is arranged on the left side of the right end of the second lower major prize opening 2006 when viewed from the front. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is disposed on the right side of the front center of the second lower prize winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction. The seventh deceleration rib 2546g is arranged on the left side of the second lower major prize opening 2006b at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is arranged on the right side of the left end of the second lower large prize winning opening 2006b when viewed from the front. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end in front view of the second lower prize winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the discharge plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction of the discharge plate portion 2559.

  Of the first reduction rib 2546a to the tenth reduction rib 2546j, odd number reduction ribs 2546 from the first reduction rib 2546a to the ninth reduction rib 2546i are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Of the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545 is provided with even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the second deceleration rib 2546b to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j. These even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the vicinity of the ceiling (see FIG. 213 (a)).

  Of the even-numbered speed reduction ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second speed reduction ribs 2546b closest to the left end in front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b, and As shown in FIG. 213 (a), the eighth deceleration rib 2546h has a lower end on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper prize port door member 2552, and the second lower prize port door member 2555). Is spaced apart from the lower ends of the other speed reduction ribs 2546 upward. Specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are the same distance as the outer diameter of the game ball from the left end in front view of the second upper prize winning port 2006a and the second lower major prize winning port 2006b, respectively. , So as to be separated from each other.

  Thereby, when the second upper big prize opening 2006a or the second lower big prize opening 2006b shifts from the open state where the game ball can be received to the closed state where the game ball cannot be received, the second upper big prize port which slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower extra prize opening door member 2555, the left end in front view of the second upper extra prize opening 2006a or the left end in front view of the second lower extra prize opening 2006b, and the second deceleration rib 2546b Occurrence of clogging (ball biting) in which a game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h can be prevented.

  In the state in which the second upper prize port door member 2552 and the second lower prize port door member 2555 protrude forward and the second upper prize port 2006a and the second lower prize port 2006b are closed, A state in which the second upper prize port door member 2552 and the second lower prize port door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper prize port 2006a and the second lower major prize port 2006b; Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper prize port door member 2552 and the second lower prize port door member 2555 and the lower end of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls that are narrower than the second upper big prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower big prize opening door member 2555 are circulated (rolled) over the upper surface of the second upper big prize opening door member 2555, and the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h. A sufficient damping effect is maintained.

  The center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and is located on the upper side of the front side wall portion 2512 from the substantially horizontal center in the left-right direction and to the right side when viewed from the front, and the inner peripheral surface of the game area 5 a (the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000. ), A space having a width in which only one game ball can circulate is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven to the right in front view rather than the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the center in the game area 5a A game ball can be distributed in the right hit game area 2540 on the right side of the accessory 2500 when viewed from the front.

  Further, in the assembled state on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the left and lower sides of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hit game area 2540. ing. Accordingly, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a circulate downward through various routes by coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 214 to 217. FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 215 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 216 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. 218 (a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like as seen from the back.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape that is open at the front, and has a back box 3010 that has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end in front view in the back box 3010 and discharges a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the center accessory 2500; It is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end of the lower right corner when viewed from the front. Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  One of the plurality of general prize opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right sphere passage unit 3030. The right sphere passage unit 3030 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 to the bottom of the back box 3010, and then the center in the left-right direction along the bottom. After being guided to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game ball received in the second big prize opening 2006 and the second out port 2543c of the center accessory 2500 to the left in front view along the bottom in the back box 3010, It is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010 onto the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back side of the back box 3010 and above the opening 3010a on the left side in the rear view, and is behind the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. An upper relay board 3040 that relays the connection to the upper left decorative board 3253, an upper relay board cover 3041 that is attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rear face of the back box 3010 A box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending to the left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and is accommodated in the effect drive board box 3042, and is received from the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 3043 that drives each drive motor, decorative board, and the like based on the control command, and a rear view right on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay board 3044 that is attached to the corner and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and each winning hole sensor, each solenoid, and the like, and a rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay board cover 3045 attached thereto.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The back box 3010 has a box shape with an opening at the front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat-plate-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. Two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side in the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b A notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side when viewed from the back.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100.

  The back box 3010 is not described in detail, but a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[Back left middle decoration unit]
Next, the back left middle decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is attached to the vicinity of the front end on the left side when viewed from the front in the back box 3010 and upward from the center in the vertical direction. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 has a light-transmitting unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration that is attached to the front of the unit base 3051 and imitating a “middle” of mahjong. A back left middle decorative body 3052 having translucency, a back left middle decorative board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decorative body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; It has.

  The back left center decoration unit 3050 can light up and decorate the back left center decoration body 3052 by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back left center decoration board 3053 to emit light.

[Moveable production unit behind the back]
Next, the back and rear movable movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 219 to 225. FIG. 219 (a) is a perspective view of the rear rear movable movable effect unit of the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 219 (b) is a perspective view of the rear lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 220 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after disassembling the movable effect unit after the back side, and FIG. 220 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable effect unit after the back side for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 221 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the back-under-back movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the back-under-back first decorative body and the back-under-back second decorative body, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which it decomposed | disassembled and was seen from back with the back bottom 1st decorative body and the back bottom 2nd decorative body. FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the rear-under-behind movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 224 (a) is a front view of the rear back movable movable production unit in the normal state, and FIG. 224 (b) is a case where the back back first decorative body and the back back second decorative body are rotated together from the normal state. It is a front view of the state which orient | assigned the 2nd decorative surface of the back back 2nd decoration body to the front, (c) is a back back back 1st decoration body and back back 2nd decoration body in the state of (b). It is a front view of the state which moved to the moving end of the left side of front view. Further, FIG. 225 (d) shows the first decorative surface of the first back and bottom decorative body by rotating the back and back first decorative body and the back and back second decorative body together in the state of FIG. 224 (c). It is a front view of the state which turned to the front, (e) rotates a back bottom back 1st decoration body from the state of (d), and opens a back bottom back 1st decoration body and a back bottom back 2nd decoration body It is a front view of the state which turned the 2nd decorative surface of the 1st decorative body after back and the 2nd decorative surface of the back 2nd decorative body to the front.

  The rear back movable movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 includes a back-under-bottom first decorative body 3110 that is supported so as to be hinge-rotating coaxially with respect to an axis extending vertically on one side extending vertically. The rear second decorative body 3120, the back lower back first decorative body and the back lower back second decorative body are attached so as to be able to rotate by hinges, and each of them can be rotationally driven separately, and the rotational drive unit 3130 Are slidably mounted in the left-right direction, and are provided with a slide unit 3150 that is mounted in the back box 3010, and a back bottom fixed decorative body 3160 that is mounted on the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

  The first decorative body 3110 after the back is arranged so as to be opposite to each other, different decorations are formed from each other, and the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 having translucency, and the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 are supported so as to face each other, and a thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body main body 3113 and the first decorative body main body 3113 are attached to the display screen. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from the one decorative surface 3111 and the outer side from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 among the four sides extending vertically in the rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body main body 3113 The first decorative body between the two first hinge portions 3115 that protrude to the top and can be supported so as to rotate about the axis extending vertically, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112. Body 3113 Attached first decorative substrate after under the back of a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides has (not shown) in which provided with a.

  The first decorative surface 3111 of the first backside decorative body 3110 is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from within the frame. On the second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back side, a decoration is formed in which the left half of the letter “holy” is applied. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect video) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The two first hinge portions 3115 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction and are attached coaxially. These first hinge portions 3115 are supported by the second hinge portion 3124 of the rear decorative second decorative body 3120 so that the hinges can rotate. The first decorative substrate after the back can make the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 illuminate and decorate by causing the LEDs on both sides to emit light appropriately.

  The back bottom second decorative body 3120 has a first decorative surface 3121 and a second decorative surface 3122 which are arranged facing each other and have different decorations and have translucency, and a first decorative surface. The 312 and the second decorative surface 3122 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body main body 3123 and the rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body main body 3123 extend vertically. One of the two sides protrudes outward from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3122 so as to rotate the two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 below the back around the axis extending vertically. Three second hinge portions 3124 that can be supported and are vertically spaced apart, and a decorative body that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124 A support shaft 3125; The second decorative body side operating gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower surface of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125. The second detection piece 3128 extending in the direction, the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 are attached in the second decorative body 3123, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on both surfaces. And a second decorative substrate (not shown).

  On the first decorative surface 3121 of the second backside decorative body 3120 under the back, a decoration with a vertically written “Tenun” character is formed. On the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 behind the back, a decoration is formed in which the right half of the letter “holy” is applied. The second decorative body main body 3123 of the back bottom second decorative body 3120 is formed to have a beam size substantially equal to the first decorative body main body 3113 of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110. That is, the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the first backside decorative body 3110 and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the backside back second decorative body 3120 have outer dimensions. They are formed in approximately the same size.

  The three second hinge portions 3124 of the rear back second decorative body 3120 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction and are coaxially mounted, and the back bottom rear first decorative body is interposed between the second hinge portions 3124. The first hinge portions 3115 of 3110 are positioned and attached to each other so as to be rotatable. Thereby, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state where the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other by the hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface of each other. 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112, 3122 can be rotated (hinged) between the open states where they are substantially on the same surface. In the state in which the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 sandwich the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 from each other. The decorations of each of them will be integrated and the character of “Holy” will appear. The first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are not shown in detail, but the first decorative surface 3111, the first backside rear decorative body 3110 and the backside rear second decorative body 3120, respectively. The decoration corresponding to the decoration applied to 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 is provided, and when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, The one hinge part 3115 and the second hinge part 3124 are made inconspicuous.

  The rotation support member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 for rotating the decoration support shaft 3125 to rotate the hinges of the back and back first decoration 3110 independent of the back and back second decoration 3120 at the upper end is rotatable. Inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 in the rotation drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed with a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the height of the first decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122. More specifically, the length is 80% to 90%. As a result, even if the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 is provided so that the heavy weight of the first decorative body 3110, which is heavy behind the back surface, is eccentric on one side extending vertically, the hinge can be rotated. The decorative body 3110 and the like (decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made difficult to fall.

  As shown in FIG. 222, the second decorative body side operation gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a that protrudes from the gear teeth at one place on the outer periphery, and cannot be rotated once. The back bottom back second decorative board of the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 can make the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 illuminate by appropriately emitting light on both sides of the LED.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 of the rear-under-back movable effect unit 3100 is a rotary drive unit base that is a box-shaped with the front side opened and rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 and is slidably attached to the slide unit 3150 in the left-right direction. 3131, a cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a that is rotatably supported by the rotation drive unit base 3131 and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a and below the back One of the connecting part 3132b attached to the lower part of the rear first decorative body 3110, the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c formed over the outer periphery of the lower end of the sleeve part 3132a, and the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c. Having a first detection piece 3132d extending outward from the end. Includes a rotation transmitting member 3132 are, the.

  The rotation drive unit 3130 includes a spur gear-shaped first drive gear 3133 that meshes with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a back-under-behind first drive motor that rotates the first drive gear 3133. 3134, a first drive motor bracket 3135 mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and a second decorative body side operation gear 3126 of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are engaged. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3136, a back-under-back second drive motor 3137 for rotating the second drive gear 3136, and a back-under-back second drive motor 3137 are attached, and the rotary drive unit base 3131 is mounted. And a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be attached.

  Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132, and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. And a second rotation detection sensor 3140 that is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 behind the back side.

  The rotation drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotation drive unit base 3131. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the back bottom rear first decorative board, the back bottom back second decorative board, the back bottom back first drive motor 3134, A rotary drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection of the back back second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, the second rotation detection sensor 3140, and the back bottom back relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150. And more.

  The rotation drive unit 3130 includes a flat unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotation drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a that is attached to the lower surface of the rotation drive unit base 3131 and extends to the left and right, and a rack gear. And a rack member 3143 having a flat plate-like detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front view of 3143a.

  The rotation drive unit base 3131 of the rotation drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a main part 3131a in which the decorative body support shaft 3125, the back back first drive motor 3134, the back back rear second drive motor 3137, and the like are accommodated. And a sub-part 3131b which is arranged in a substantially cubic shape approximately half the height of the main part 3131a and which is arranged on the left side of the main part 3131a when viewed from the front, and accommodates the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. The main part 3131a and the sub part 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

  Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 includes a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131c and a lower bearing portion 3131d which are open at the front end side and cut away toward the rear, on the top plate portion and the bottom plate portion of the main portion 3131a. . The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates up and down, and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmitting member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is recessed downward from above and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the back lower second decorative body 3120 is inserted therein. The open front end sides of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d are closed by a unit cover 3142.

  The rear back first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at the right side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in the front view via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The rear back second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 via the second drive motor bracket 3138 at the left position of the decorative body support shaft 3125 when viewed from the front.

  The backside first drive motor 3134 rotates the first drive gear 3133 to rotate together with the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 meshing with the first drive gear 3133. The first decorative body 3110 can be rotated after the back. On the other hand, the rear back second drive motor 3137 rotates the second drive gear 3136 so that the second decorative body side operation gear 3126 at the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 meshed with the second drive gear 3136 The second decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body support shaft 3125.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the slide unit 3150 of the rear rear movable production unit 3100 is mounted in a back box 3010 and is attached to the upper part of the unit base 3151 and a box-shaped unit base 3151 opened front and upper. The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted on the front surface and is attached to the slide guide 3152 extending in the left and right directions, and rotatably mounted about the axis extending in the front-rear direction at the approximate center in the horizontal direction in the unit base 3151. In the rotation drive unit 3130, a transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a meshing with a rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143, and a spur gear 3153b having a larger diameter than the pinion gear 3153a and a spur gear-like driven gear 3153b that is larger in diameter than the pinion gear 3153a. 3153 , A spur gear-like drive gear 3154 meshing with the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, a back and bottom rear third drive motor 3155 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 by rotating the drive gear 3154, and the unit base 3151 and a slide detection sensor 3156 for detecting the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a substantially lower half of the front open part of the unit base 3151 are closed to close the unit base 3151. A horizontally long flat slide cover 3157 attached to the front end, and a back and back rear relay board 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 and relaying the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. ing.

  The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotation drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The rear back third drive motor 3155 rotates and drives the drive gear 3154 to rotate and drive the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 engaged with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. The rotation drive unit 3130 can be slid in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 meshing with.

  Next, the operation of the back-under-behind movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 223, FIG. 224 (a), etc., the back and rear movable production unit 3100 is positioned at the right end when viewed from the front with respect to the left and right sliding directions by the slide unit 3150. ing. Further, in a normal state, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 face each other with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, and then the back bottom back The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 (the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed forward. In this normal state, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are positioned on the right side of the front view with respect to the axis of rotation of the hinge extending vertically (decorative body support shaft 3125). doing. Further, in a normal state, the side opposite to the decorative body support shaft 3125 side that is supported so as to be able to rotate the hinges of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is the decorative body. The whole rotates so as to be positioned forward of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction in plan view.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 223, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. Further, in a normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotation drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back side is in a state where the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. It has become. Further, in a normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the decoration body support shaft 3125 in the second back and rear decoration body 3120 is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  Further, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 201 and the like, the first backside rear first decorative body 3110 facing the front (front) of the backside rear movable decorative body unit 3100 in the assembled state on the game board 5. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and to the right of the front view, in the lower part of the right corner of the front view in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized. In this normal state, as described above, the right side of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is positioned in front of the center of hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device The display screen 3114 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100 so as to face the vertical line passing through the center of the game area 5a.

  In this normal state, the second rear drive motor 3137 behind the rotary drive unit 3130 passes the second drive gear 3136, the second decorative body side operation gear 3126, and the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the second rear rear back When the second decorative body 3120 is rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view (160 degrees) so that the second decorative surface 3122 facing the back of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, the back is closed The back bottom back first decorative body 3110 positioned in front of the back second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together, and the back bottom on which the decoration of “Ten fortune” is applied. The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing the front (see FIG. 224 (b)). In addition, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 facing the front in a normal state is in a state facing the rear and is not visible from the player side. Note that from this state, neither the back-behind first decorative body 3110 nor the back-behind second decorative body 3120 can be rotated further in the clockwise direction in plan view.

  In the state of FIG. 224 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmitting member 3132 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back side is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and the back side The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration body support shaft 3125 that rotates integrally with the second decoration body 3120 is in a non-detected state with respect to detection by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the third drive motor 3155 after the back of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143 Via the 3143a, the rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position of the left end in the front view together with the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120. In a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid and moved to the position of the left end when viewed from the front in the state where it is assembled to the game board 5, the axis (the center line of the decorative body support shaft 3125) extending vertically in the hinge rotation is The game area 5a substantially coincides with the center in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 224 (c) shows a state in which the state of FIG. 224 (b) is slid and moved to the position at the left end of the front view. 225 (d) is moved to the position of the left end in front view in the state of FIG. 224 (a), and the first drive gear 3133, the rotation transmitting member is driven by the first drive motor 3134 after rear back. The back lower back first decorative body is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction in plan view via the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c and the connecting portion 3132b of 3132. The first back and back first decorative body 3110 in a state where the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of 3110 is directed to the front or by driving the back and back first drive motor 3134 from the state of FIG. 224 (c). Is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, thereby rotating the back lower back second decorative body 3120 together with the back lower back first decorative body 3110 to change the first back of the back lower first decorative body 3110 One decorative surface 3111 ( A state with its blanking liquid crystal display device 3114) in front shows.

  Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 224 (c), the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in plan view by driving the back-bottom rear second drive motor 3137, or FIG. In the state of (d), when the back bottom first decorative body 3110 is rotated 180 degrees in a clockwise direction in plan view by driving the back bottom first drive motor 3134, as shown in FIG. 225 (e). From the state in which the second decorative surface 3112 of the first backside decorative body 3110 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the backside back second decorative body 3120 are folded so as to face each other, the hinge is rotated and the back bottom back The first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, and the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and face the front.

  In the state of FIG. 225 (e), compared to the case where the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 310 are overlapped and closed, the back back back first decorative body 3110 and By arranging the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the rear back second decorative body 3120 on the left and right sides, the decorative surface formed by the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is formed. The size is doubled so that the player can be noticeable in the game area 5a and attract the player's attention strongly, and the player can be surprised by the appearance of a large decoration. In the state of FIG. 225 (e), the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are integrated, and the character “holy” is displayed. The decoration becomes visible. Note that the first decorative surface 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are provided on the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 of the first back and rear decorative body 3110 and the second back and rear decorative body 3120, respectively. The first decoration 3115 and the second hinge 3124 are provided when the decoration corresponding to the applied decoration is applied, and the first back and rear second decorative body 3110 and the second back and bottom second decorative body 3120 are opened. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character of “holy” can be visually recognized by the player in a good state.

  As shown in the drawing, an integrated decoration formed by the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120 includes “ A cutout decoration 3170 such as “1” is formed. This cut-out decoration 3170 is a decoration obtained by cutting out a part of one character or pattern, and on the upper side of the cut-out decoration 3170, a back-upper left first decorative body 3210 of a back-up / left movable effect unit 3200 described later. When the cut decoration 3260 in which the decoration of the fixed decoration member 3211 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3222 of the upper left second decoration body 3220 are arranged on the left and right is positioned, the entire character of “sparrow” is completed. Yes (see FIG. 254).

  As described above, according to the back-under-behind movable effect unit 3100 of this embodiment, the back-under-bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 are closed from each other with their surfaces overlapped. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are opened side by side, the decorative surfaces of the first back and bottom second decorative body 3110 and the second back and bottom second decorative body 3120 are expanded (expanded) in the front view game area 5a. ) And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 that are closed and cannot be seen from the player side are opened, and can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In the state (refer to FIG. 225 (d)), when the back bottom first decorative body 3110 is rotated and aligned on the left side of the back bottom second decorative body 3120, the first back bottom first decorative body The back decorative first decorative body 3110 and the back decorative back second decorative body 3120 of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 become two so that the decoration area which is only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 extends leftward. The decoration area is doubled, and the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 that have not been seen so far are visible from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). Alternatively, with the back back first decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the back back back second decorative body 3120 facing forward (FIG. 224 (c)). When the rear back second decorative body 3120 is rotated and aligned on the right side of the front view rear first decorative body 3110 when viewed from the front, only the first decorative surface 3121 of the back bottom second decorative body 3120 is initially used. The decoration area is doubled so that the decoration area extends to the right so that the decoration area becomes two of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back bottom rear first decoration body 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration body 3120. In addition, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 that have not been seen so far can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). Thus, by opening the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 from the closed state, the decoration range by the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 Can be enlarged and the decoration can be changed, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest is given to the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120. Attracting strongly, you can enjoy the decoration spread by the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back, and make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are put together in a state where the back back back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are overlapped and closed. When the first back side back decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 are rotated around one of the vertically extending sides, which is attached to the hinge, In this state, when the rear side rear decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are rotated so that the surface (back surface) facing rearward is directed frontward, the entire position of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is the center axis of the hinge rotation. It will move to the position on the opposite side across. More specifically, the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 faces forward. When the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated together in a state (see FIGS. 224 (a) and 225 (d)), the back lower back first decorative body is obtained. 3110 and the entire backside rear second decorative body 3120 move to the left in front view, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the backside rear second decorative body 3120 faces forward (FIG. 224 (b) and (See (c)). On the other hand, in the state where the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 faces forward (FIG. 224 (b)). And (c)), when the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 The whole moves to the right when viewed from the front, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 behind the back is directed forward (see FIGS. 224 (a) and 225 (d)). Thereby, the area of decoration by the back bottom first decorative body 3110 or the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 in the front view game area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side is changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120, and the backside back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body. It is possible to entertain the movement and decoration of 3120 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the state where the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 are overlapped and closed, one of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 or the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 is attached. In any case, when rotating and opening, or rotating the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom second decorative body 3120 together, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back Since the surface of the second decorative body 3120 that is visible from the player side starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation, the first backside decorative body 3110 and the backside back second decorative body 3120 are opened, or It is difficult to understand whether they rotate together, and it can be exciting and exciting depending on which action the player performs, and can increase the player's expectation. In addition, with respect to the decoration that can be visually recognized in the initial state, when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened and rotated together, the player Since the decoration changes that are visible from the side are different, the player can enjoy the decoration changes in various patterns, and the player can be made bored by various effects.

  As described above, the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment has the first back with the different decorations by rotating the back-under-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-under-back second decorative body 3120 by hinges. The decorative surfaces 3111, 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112, 3122 can be directed to the front, and the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are slid in the left-right direction by the slide unit 3150. And various presentations can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (a position eccentric from the center of gravity) of the two sides extending up and down of the rectangular outer shape in the second back back decorative body 3120. The upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward on the same axis as the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 in the rotation drive unit 3130, respectively. It is supported so that it can be rotated at two locations as far apart as possible. Therefore, the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from the position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120, so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is located above the decorative body support shaft 3125. Even if an unbalanced load is applied to incline the decorative body support shaft 3125 due to the weight of the attached back bottom first decorative body 3110 and back bottom back second decorative body 3120, the decorative body support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt. It is possible to support the decoration body support shaft 3125 in a straight line, and to rotate the back-behind back first decoration body 3110 and the back-bottom back second decoration body 3120. In other words, the upper and lower ends of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotational drive unit base 3131. Since the support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt, the heavy weight of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 that are attached to each other so as to be hinge-rotating can be placed on the same axis as the hinge rotation axis. It can be rotatably supported without problems.

[Left top movable production unit]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. FIG. 226 (a) is a perspective view of the rear upper left movable effect unit of the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 226 (b) is a perspective view of the rear upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 227 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 228 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper left effect effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 229 (a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 229 (b) shows the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is the front view shown in the state moved to the position of the right end of front view, and (c) shows in the state where the back upper left first decoration object and the back upper left second decoration object were developed from the state of (b). It is a front view.

  The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the left end of the front view to the vicinity of the center. The upper back left movable effect unit 3200 has a quadrilateral shape in front view and a front upper left first decorative body 3210 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 extends up and down in front view. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 which is mounted on the right side of the right side so as to be hinge-rotatable and has different decorations on the two faces facing away from each other, and the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 is mounted above The rotary upper drive unit 3230 for rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 by hinges, and the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 slid in the left-right direction together with the rotary drive unit 3230. And a slide unit 3240 mounted in the back box 3010.

The back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a flat fixed decorative member 3211 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and translucency, and the front end of the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view A cylindrical first hinge part 3212 that is attached outwardly from the side and that is coaxially spaced apart from the upper and lower axes and that is attached to the upper and lower axes, and the entire rear face of the fixed decorative member 3211 is covered. The first decorative body base 3213 is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and protrudes upward from the fixed decorative member 3211, and is attached between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. A first upper decorative base 321, which is connected to the upper left side of the first upper decorative board 3214 and the upper face of the first decorative body base 3213 with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, is L-shaped in side view. A connecting portion 3215 extending from the left end to the right side of the right end, a rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending to the left and right, and from the vicinity of the left end of the connecting portion 3215 to the front. And a flat plate-like detection piece 3217 that extends.
It has.

  The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a rectangular shape with a slightly long shape in front view. The fixed decorative member 3211 has sides extending in the right and left sides extending to the left and right of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back back back second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. The lengths of the sides that are the same length and that extend vertically are shorter than the lengths of the sides that extend vertically of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120. The fixed decorative member 3211 is formed with a decoration provided with the left half of the character “sparrow”. As shown in FIG. 229 (c), in this embodiment, the lower part of the character “sparrow” is broken from the upper side of the lowermost “one” part.

  The three first hinge portions 3212 are respectively provided at the upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the upper position from the center in the vertical direction. The three first hinge portions 3212 protrude rightward and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 when viewed from the front. A rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the first decorative body base 3213 on the front surface of a portion protruding upward from the fixed decorative member 3211. The slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connection portion 3215 on the rear surface of the portion extending vertically in the L shape in side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

  The back upper left first decorative body 3210 can make the fixed decorative member 3211 emit light by appropriately emitting light from the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative board 3214.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a rectangular outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the surface, and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 having translucency in which the decoration different from the first decorative member 3221 is applied to the surface opposite to the surface of the first decorative member 3221 and the left and right of the first decorative member 3221 Two second hinge parts 3223 projecting outward from one of the two sides extending vertically and attached to the first hinge part 3212 of the first upper decorative body 3210 on the back side so as to be capable of hinge rotation; A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-like operating gear 3225 attached to the upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member 221 and the back on the left second decorative substrate having a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides is mounted between the second decorative member 3222 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is provided with a decoration with “Dokun” characters on the surface. The second decorative member 3222 has a decoration in which the right half of the character “sparrow” is formed on the surface opposite to the surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 is positioned on the left side in front of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 so that it can be recognized as a “sparrow” character. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decoration member 3211 and the second decoration member 3222 is a cut-out decoration 3260 in which the lower part is cut off from the upper side of the lowermost “one” part with respect to the character “sparrow”. On the lower side, the decorations (cut-out decorations) of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back-under-bottom-first decorative body 3110 and the back-bottom-after-back second decoration body 3120 in the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character of “sparrow” is completed. Note that the cut decoration 3260 on the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 side occupies most of the characters “sparrow”, so that it can be recognized as the characters “sparrow” even if the lower portion is cut out.

  The two second hinge portions 3223 protrude rightward and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing the front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and each is provided at a position closer to the center from the upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The operating gear 3225 is attached to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operation gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotation drive unit 3230.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 can appropriately light-emit the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 by causing the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative board (not shown) to emit light appropriately. .

  The rotation drive unit 3230 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a space between the rotation drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decoration body base 3213 of the back upper left first decoration body 3210 and the rotation drive base 3231. A rotation drive cover 3232 that is formed and attached to the upper side of the rotation drive base 3231; an operation gear 3225 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that is rotatably attached between the rotation drive cover 3232 and the rotation drive base 3231; A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear (not shown) that meshes with the transmission gear 3233, and a back-upper left first drive motor that is attached to the upper surface of the rotary drive cover 3232 by rotating the drive gear. 3235 and the rotational position of the drive gear attached between the rotational drive base 3231 and the rotational drive cover 3232. Rotation detecting sensor for detecting a (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The rotation drive base 3231 of the rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decoration member 3211 in the first decoration body base 3213 of the back upper left first decoration body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) includes a detection piece extending outward, and the rotation position of the drive gear is detected by detecting the detection piece with a rotation detection sensor, and the drive gear, transmission gear 3233, And the rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected via the operation gear 3225.

  The rotational drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left first drive motor 3235 to rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 through the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operation gear 3225. Can do.

  The slide unit 3240 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the back box 3010 in a horizontally long unit base 3241, a horizontally long slide rail 3242 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241, and slidably attached to the slide rail 3242. And a base cover 3244 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241 so that a space is formed between the slider 3243 and the connecting portion 3215 of the upper left first decorative body 3210 on the front surface. The back upper left second drive motor 3245 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotation shaft protrudes between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241 through the base cover 3244, and the back upper left second drive. Attached to the rotating shaft of motor 3245 A unit base 3241 having a spur gear-like drive gear 3246, a small-diameter first transmission gear 3247a meshing with the drive gear 3246, and a large-diameter second transmission gear 3247b rotating integrally with the first transmission gear 3247a. A transmission gear member 3247 rotatably attached to the cover 3244 and a second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247 and meshes with the rack gear 3216 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. A pinion gear 3248 that is rotatably attached between the base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and a slide detection sensor 3249 that is attached to the base cover 3244 and detects the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. I have.

  The slide unit 3240 is attached to the left part of the front surface of the base cover 3244 in the front view. The back upper left first decorative board 3214, the back upper left second decorative board, the back upper left first drive motor 3235, the rotation detection sensor, The back upper left second drive motor 3245, the back upper left relay board 3250 that relays the connection between the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043, and the front surface of the back upper left relay board 3250 and covers the front cover 3244 A board cover 3251 attached to the front face, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front face of the board cover 3251, and a back left upper decorative board 3253 mounted on the front face of the back left upper decorative base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. A predetermined decoration is attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 so as to cover the front of the back upper left decorative board 3253. A back left upper ornamental body 3254 having formed the translucent, and a.

  When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the back upper left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 moves the back upper left first decorative body 3210 back through the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. The second left decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 can be slid in the left-right direction. In addition, the back left upper decorative body 3254 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the back upper decorative substrate 3253.

  Next, the operation of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a back upper left second decorative body 3220 covering the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 in the normal state. The left second decorative body 3220 is folded to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 by the rotation drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It has become a state. Further, in the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the back upper left decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

  In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the player side Is not visible (see FIG. 201 and the like).

  When the pinion gear 3248 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the upper left second drive motor 3245 on the back of the slide unit 3240 in a normal state, the pinion gear When the back upper left first decorative body 3210 slides to the right together with the rear upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotation drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 meshing with 3248 and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 229 (b)). In this state, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending axis in the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is vertically centered in the game area 5 a. The upper left first decorative body 3210 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 253).

  Then, with the back upper left first decorative body 3210 positioned at the right end in front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotation drive unit 3230 passes the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in plan view, the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that is folded and covers the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is developed. And the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 is aligned on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 229 (c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged in the left and right directions, so that the size is approximately twice that of the normal state. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player.

  In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side and face the front, and the respective decorations are integrated. It becomes possible to visually recognize the decoration of the character of “Sparrow”. Note that the first hinge part 3212 and the second hinge part 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 have decorations applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. Corresponding decorations are provided, and when the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is opened from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, the first hinge part 3212 and the second hinge part 3223 may become inconspicuous. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the character of “sparrow” in a good state.

  It should be noted that the decoration of the “sparrow” character that can be seen as one piece is cut off from the upper side of the lowermost “one” part, and the upper left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back It is integrated with the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable production unit 3100 located below the left second decorative body 3220. Thus, the character of “sparrow” becomes complete (see FIG. 254).

  As described above, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction or extends the back upper left second decorative body 3220 up and down. By rotating the hinge around the axis, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be folded so as to cover the front surface, or the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be deployed so as to be lined up on the right side of the front view. And various presentations can be presented to the player.

[Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. 230A is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 230B is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 231 (a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 231 (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported so as to be slidable in the left and right directions behind the back right fixed decorative body 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front surface and the back right fixed decorative body 3310. A frame-shaped back right movable decorative body 3320 with decoration and a back right movable decorative body 3320 are slid in the left-right direction to be mounted in the back box 3010, and a back left fixed decorative body 3310 is mounted on the front surface. A back left drive unit 3330.

  The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a vertically long front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is three-dimensionally decorated and has a translucent fixed side decorative member 3311 and a fixed side decorative member 3311 attached to the rear surface, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The back left fixed decorative board 3312 is provided. As shown in the drawing, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially formed with a decoration “發”. This back left fixed decorative body 3310 can make the fixed side decorative member 3311 emit light by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the back left fixed decorative substrate 3312.

  The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long rectangle whose front view is approximately the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a translucent frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 attached to the rear surface of the movable side decorative member 3321. And a frame-like movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decoration frame 3322, and a back-left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decoration frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3324.

  The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. The movable base 3323 has a lower end projecting downward from the movable decorative member 3321 and the decorative frame 3322, and this projecting portion is attached by a back left drive unit 3330 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U shape so as to extend along the right side of the center of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. By causing the LED on the back left movable decorative board 3324 to emit light, the movable decorative member 3321 can be decorated with light emission.

  The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the unit base 3331 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 can slide in the left-right direction. The slide guide 3332 that extends in the left-right direction, the back left drive motor 3333 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation shaft extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 are A hook-like actuating arm (not shown) that is attached and connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320 and a slide detection sensor 3335 that is attached to the unit base 3331 by detecting the rotational position of the actuating arm. And the back left fixed decorative board 3312 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331. Urahidari movable decorative substrate 3324, and a Urahidari relay board 3336 that relays the connection between the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and effect driving substrate 3043, the.

  The unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330 has the back left fixed decorative body 3310 attached to the front side of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side when viewed from the front. The slide guide 3332 is attached so that the lower end portion of the movable base 3323 in the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidable in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 when viewed from the back. The actuating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotating shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end of the bottom side of the back left movable decorative body 3320 having a frame shape. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the operating arm is formed with a slit penetrating back and forth at the tip and extending in the longitudinal direction. A guide pin protruding rearward from the lower right corner of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the back view is slidably inserted into the slit.

  Next, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 has a back left movable decorative body 3320 located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 as shown in FIG. 231 (a), and is hardly visible from the front. It is in a state. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the immersion position where it cannot be visually recognized. In this normal state, an operating arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. Further, in a normal state, a part of the right end of the back left fixed decorative body arranged on the front side faces the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the back left The left side of the front face of the fixed decorative body can be viewed from the player side through the transparent gaming panel 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. ing.

  In this normal state, when the operating arm is rotated counterclockwise by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the operating arm is moved. The operating arm is pressed rightward in the front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid straightly to the right in the front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right-side portion of the frame-like back left fixed decorative body 3320 is located on the right side from the rear side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310, the slide movement to the right stops. As a result, a portion on the right side of the left side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 and can be viewed from the front (see FIG. 231 (b)). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at an appearance position visible from the player side.

  In a state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is located at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is assembled from the game board 5 and the back left movable decorative body 3320 passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the player side. While being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed on the rear side through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect animation) is displayed in the display area directly behind the back left movable decorative body 3320, the player can also display the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. It is possible to make an illusion that a liquid crystal display device is mounted inside. Thereby, the player can have an illusion that there are two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the first decorative surface 3111 in the first back and bottom decorative body 3110 of the back and back movable effect unit 3100.

[Moveable production unit on the back]
Next, the inside / outside movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 232 to 243. FIG. 232 (a) is a perspective view of the rear middle movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 232 (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear middle movable effect unit. FIG. 233 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper middle movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and is seen from the front, and FIG. 233 (b) is an exploded view of the rear middle movable production unit for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 234 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 234 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as viewed from the rear. 235 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 236 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 237 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back upper decorative unit from the front, and FIG. 237 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 238 (a) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, and (b) is a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit are half opened outward. (C) is a front view showing the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a state where they are fully opened outward.

  Further, FIG. 239 (a) is a perspective view of the back middle moving drive unit of the back middle movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 240A is an exploded perspective view of the back middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 240B is a view of the back middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration from the back. FIG. FIG. 241 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle rotary unit of the rear upper middle drive unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 241 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 242 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive system of the back / middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 243 (a) is a front view of the back middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 243 (b) is a front view showing the back upper middle decorative body unit lowered in the back middle movable effect unit. .

  The back / middle movable effect unit 3400 is mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right end. As shown in FIG. 233, the back-upper middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back-upper middle first decoration bodies 3411 and the pair of back-upper middle first decoration bodies 3411. A back middle decorative body unit 3410 having a back middle second decorative body 3412, a rotary connecting member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back middle decorative body unit 3410, and a rotary connecting member 3430. The back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is mounted so as to be movable up and down and rotatable, and the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back upper right decoration mounted on the front surface of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. A unit 3480 and a back middle relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the back middle drive unit 3440 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 234, FIG. 235, etc., the back middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back middle movable production unit 3400 is a pair of back middle middle decorative bodies having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency. 3411, a back middle second decorative body 3412 having translucency, which is disposed behind the pair of back middle first decorative bodies 3411 and has a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a pair of back middle first decorations A pair of light-transmitting flat plate-like slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the body 3411 and a pair of LEDs mounted on the rear surfaces of the pair of slide bases 3413 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, respectively. A back middle first decorative substrate 3414, a back middle second decorative substrate 3415 attached to the rear surface of the back middle second decorative body 3412 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the back middle second decorative substrate. Cover the back of 3415 On the rear side of the substrate cover 3416 so as to form a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the rear surface of the second upper decorative body 3412 and the substrate cover 3416. A flat slider cover 3417 attached and a decorative unit base 3418 attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417 are provided.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3410 has a motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418, and is attached to the rear surface of the motor base 3419, and a rotating shaft projects from the front surface of the motor base 3419. A first drive motor 3420 on the back side, and a spur gear-like first drive gear attached to the rotating shaft of the first drive motor 3420 on the back side and disposed between the motor base 3419 and the decorative body unit base 3418. 3421 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 that meshes with the first drive gear 3421 and is rotatably attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 so that the front end protrudes forward of the decorative body unit base. Meshed with the first transmission gear 3422 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the decorative body unit base 3418. It includes a first pinion gear 3423, a.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3410 meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss that attaches one of the pair of slide bases 3413 through the slider cover 3417. The first slider 3424 having 3424b and slidably mounted between the slider cover 3417 and the decorative body unit base 3418 and the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwich the first pinion gear 3423. And a rack gear 3425a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 on the opposite side and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that passes through the slider cover 3417 and attaches the other (the other) of the pair of slide bases 3413. , Slider cover 3417 and decorative unit A second slider 3425 that is slidably attached to the base 3418 in the left-right direction, and a slide detection sensor 3426 that is attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 from the rear side and detects the slide position of the second slider 3425. It is equipped with.

  The pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 has a shape in a front view, and one end in the longitudinal direction of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges outward in a semicircular arc, The opposite end is recessed inwardly in a semicircular arc, and a portion recessed in the semicircular arc is a recess 3411a. The pair of back-side middle first decorative bodies 3411 has a plate-like shape extending rearward except for an end side where a concave portion 3411a recessed in a semicircular arc shape is formed inward. The first decorative body 3411 on the pair of back surfaces is attached in a state in which the ends on which the recesses 3411a are formed face each other. The pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are formed in translucent milky white as a whole, and the front side of one back upper middle decorative body 3411 has a “dragon” head side. On the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the remaining (other) back side, the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” is formed so as to have a metallic luster.

  The back upper middle decorative body 3412 is a flat plate extending in the left-right direction, and is slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Has been. The middle second decorative body 3412 on the back side is a circular center bulging portion 3412a that can be inserted into the concave portion 3411a of the middle middle decorative body 3411 on the back side, and the left and right sides of the central decorative portion 3412a. A circular central horizontal decorative portion 3412b formed on the both sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b and two circular outer central decorative portions 3412b formed on the left and right sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b. An intermediate decorative portion 3412c and a circular end decorative portion 3412d that is formed in the vicinity of the left and right end portions on both the left and right sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c and has a larger diameter than the intermediate decorative portion 3412c are provided. The back middle second decorative body 3412 is formed in a translucent milky white color as a whole. The outer periphery of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d on the front surface, etc. In addition, a linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed. The middle second decorative body 3412 on the back is decorated so as to remind the player of the “dot” of “Mahjong”.

  Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first upper decorative body 3411 on the back, and is located behind the outer periphery extending rearward of the first decorative body 3411 on the back. Installed at the end. As a result, by assembling the back upper middle decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the rear upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413 are positioned between the portion forming the front surface of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413. A space in which the second decorative body 3412, the back and middle second decorative substrate 3415, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted is formed. Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 includes slits 3413a penetrating front and rear and extending left and right. Of the pair of slide bases 3413, in one slide base 3413, the slit 3413a is formed on the side near the upper side, and in the remaining slide base 3413, the slit 3413a is formed on the side near the lower side. Further, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The pair of backside middle first decorative substrates 3414 and backside middle second decorative substrates 3415 are substrates whose surfaces (entire surfaces) are white. This makes it easy to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate less noticeable. Since the back middle first decorative body 3414 is attached to the slide base 3413 that is rearwardly separated from the portion forming the front surface of the back top middle first decorative body 3411, the light from the LED is on the back middle. Since the light irradiation range is widened before reaching the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, even if the number of LEDs is small, the entire first decorative body 3411 in the back can be uniformly decorated with light emission. it can. On the other hand, the back middle second decorative substrate 3415 can illuminate and decorate the entire back top middle second decorative body 3412, and the central decorative portion 3412 a and the central horizontal decorative portion of the back middle second decorative body 3412. 3412b, the intermediate decoration part 3412c, and the edge decoration part 3412d can be independently decorated with light emission.

  The substrate cover 3416 includes a mounting boss 3416a that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of both left and right ends of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413. The mounting boss 3416 a of the substrate cover 3416 is attached to the slider cover 3417 at the rear end that passes through the slit 3413 a of the slide base 3413. Further, the mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 slides relatively in the left-right direction in the slit 3413a via a bush 3427 that is rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

  The slider cover 3417 penetrates forward and backward and extends to the left and right, and a first slit 3417a through which the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted, and penetrates forward and backward and extends to the left and right. And a second slit 3417b through which the mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The second slit 3417b is formed in the vicinity of the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  The first pinion gear 3423 is disposed slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 237). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged side by side from the left end in front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have front ends projecting forward through the first slits 3417a of the slider cover 3417, and the first decoration on the back on which the decoration on the head side of the “dragon” is applied. It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is arranged so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged side by side from the right end in front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have a front end protruding through the second slit 3417b of the slider cover 3417 and projecting forward. It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. The second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that protrudes upward from the upper part near the right end in a front view. The detection piece 3425c is detected by a slide detection sensor 3426.

  Next, the operation of the back middle decorative body unit 3410 in the back middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 238 (a) or the like, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is closed with the ends on the recess 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 in contact with each other. Yes. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 bulges forward through a circular opening formed by the concave portion 3411a, and the other parts of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are from the front. It cannot be visually recognized.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the left end portion in front view of the first slider 3424 and the right end portion in front view of the second slider 2425 are arranged in the left-right direction in the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410. Located near the center. Further, the detection piece 3425 c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), if the central decorative portion 3412a is illuminated with the back and middle second decorative substrate 3415, the player can be presented with a decoration reminiscent of the “thousand-point stick” of “Mahjong”. In addition, when the entire backside / inside second decorative body 3412 is illuminated with the backside / inside 2nd decorative board 3415 in a normal state, the backside / inside 1st decoration covering the front of the backside / inside 2nd decorative body 3412. The entire body 3411 can be decorated with light emission. Further, when the LED of the back upper middle decorative body 3414 is caused to emit light in a normal state, the rear surface of the back upper middle second decorative body 3415 formed in white, the back upper middle first decorative body 3414 Reflecting and diffusing on the front surface, etc., the outer periphery of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface can be decorated with light emission.

  When the first pinion gear 3423 is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the first drive motor 3420 from the normal state through the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422 from the normal state, By the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 engaged with the pinion gear 3423, the first slider 3424 slides to the left in the front view, and the second slider 3425 moves to the right in the front view. Move the slide. As a result, the first decorative body 3411 on the back side with the decoration on the head side of the “dragon” attached via the attachment boss 3424b of the first slider 3424 slides to the left in front view, and the first The first decorative body 3411 with the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” attached via the mounting boss 3425b of the two slider 3425 slides to the right in the front view. The first decorative body 3411 slides and opens in a direction away from each other.

  When the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are slid and moved in directions away from each other, the back upper middle first decorative bodies are formed between the ends on the concave portion 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411. A part of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 arranged behind the 3411 faces forward. And the back side middle first drive motor 3420 in a state where the central lateral decoration part 3412b of the back side middle second decorative body 3412 faces the front from between the pair of back side middle first decorative bodies 3411. Is temporarily stopped. In this state (intermediate open state), as shown in FIG. 237 (b), the center decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 and the four inner decorative parts 3412 are arranged between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. The central lateral decoration portion 3412b faces forward. In this state, if the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b are light-decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 in the back, the decoration that is reminiscent of “Mahjong” “5,000-point stick” can be shown to the player. it can.

  From this state, when the pair of backside middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in a direction away from each other by the backside middle first drive motor 3420 and the rotational drive is stopped in the farthest separated state, FIG. As shown in c), between the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, substantially the entire back-upper middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward (fully open state). In this state, all of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back middle second decorative body 3412 face forward, and the back middle second decorative substrate. When the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d are light-decorated by 3415, the decoration reminiscent of “Mahjong” “ten thousand sticks” can be shown to the player. it can. In this state, the back middle first decorative body 3411 and the back middle second decorative body 3412 are entirely decorated with light emission by the back middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the back middle second decorative substrate 3415. be able to.

  Subsequently, the rotation connecting member 3430 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the center in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418 in the back top middle decorative body unit 3410, and on the back of the back top middle driving unit 3440. The intermediate rotation unit 3460 includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 attached rotatably to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connection bushing 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461 in the upper middle rotation unit 3460.

  Next, the back middle drive unit 3440 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 and the like, the back upper middle drive unit 3440 is capable of rotating the rear upper middle rotary unit 3460 to which the rear upper decorative body unit 3410 is rotatably mounted and the rear upper middle rotary unit 3460 can be rotated on the front side. A base base 3441 which is attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the upper middle rotating unit 3460, and a base cover 3442 which is attached in the back box 3010. 3442 is a front middle second drive motor 3443 which is attached to the front surface of 3442 and has a rotating shaft that protrudes rearward through the base cover 3442, and a flat surface attached to the rear shaft of the second middle middle drive motor 3443. A gear-shaped second drive gear 3444 and a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear meshing with the second drive gear 3444 A second transmission gear 3445 having a small-diameter spur gear-like small-diameter transmission gear 3445b that rotates integrally with the 3445a and the large-diameter transmission gear 3445a, and is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442; A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a meshing with a small-diameter transmission gear 3445b of 3445 and a cylindrical drive pin 3446b projecting rearward from the rear surface of the gear portion 3446a are rotatably attached to the base cover 3442. , And a drive pin 3446b of the lift drive gear 3446 is inserted therethrough and has an arcuate slit 3447a protruding rearward. The second drive gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the lift drive It is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the gear 3446 and the base. Includes cover 3442 in cooperation with the second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and the elevation drive gear 3446 plate-like gear cover 3447 are rotatably mounted to, the.

  The back middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and includes a rotation detection sensor 3448 for detecting the rotation position of the back middle rotation unit 3460, and the unit base 3441 and the back middle rotation unit 3460. An assist spring 3449 that is attached in between and urges the back middle rotating unit 3460 in the direction in which the back middle decorative body unit 3410 rises, and extends in the longitudinal direction while penetrating back and forth in the form of a belt. An assist arm 3450 having an assist slit 3450a, the base end of which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441, and the assist arm 3450 is rotatably pressed from the front to the unit base 3441 side. An arm presser 3451 attached to the front surface of That.

  As shown in FIG. 241, etc., the back middle rotation unit 3460 of the back middle drive unit 3440 includes a bearing portion 3461a that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, and a long hole that penetrates the front and rear and extends in a predetermined direction. Drive slit 3461b into which drive pin 3446b of elevating drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, insertion hole 3461c into which connection bushing 3432 of rotary connection member 3430 is inserted, and assist slit of assist arm 3450 protruding rearward It has a cylindrical assist pin 3461d inserted into 3450a, and rotates so as to close a shallow box-shaped rotating unit base 3461 opened at the rear and the opened rear side of the rotating unit base 3461. A rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461; It is equipped with a.

  Further, the back middle rotation unit 3460 includes a back middle third drive motor 3463 attached to the front surface of the rotation unit base 3461 so that the rotation shaft projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461. A spur gear-shaped third drive gear 3464 attached to the rotary shaft of the third drive motor 3463 in the middle of the back side, meshed with the third drive gear 3464, and rotatable by the rotary unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. An attached spur gear-like drive pinion gear 3465, and a hook-shaped transmission rack gear which is engaged with the drive pinion gear 3465 and is slidably attached in a predetermined direction between the rotary unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. 3466 is engaged with the transmission rack gear 3466 and the rotation unit base 3461 is inserted. A spur gear-like driven pinion gear 3467, which is rotatably attached by a rotary unit base 3461 and a rear cover 3462 at a position coaxial with 3461c, and a rear end of the connection base 3431 of the rotary connection member 3430 is attached to the front surface; It has.

  Further, the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467 and a rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461 and an assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 are inserted inside. A bush-shaped cylindrical bush 3469 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 on the outside, and the bush 3469 is attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461, and the bush 3469 is pulled out from the assist pin 3461d. And a retaining cap 3470 for preventing the above.

  The unit base 3441 of the back upper middle drive unit 3440 is formed in a shape such that the upper part of the left side of a quadrilateral front view that protrudes vertically protrudes to the left. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably mounting the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back upper middle rotation unit 3460. A rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 near the right end of the front view at the upper end of the front surface, and an assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end of the front view.

  The back second drive motor 3463 is attached near the upper end of the front surface of the base cover 3442. The lift drive gear 3446 to which the rotational drive of the back upper second drive motor 3463 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 is located at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442. (See FIG. 242).

  The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same surface without rattling by being pressed toward the unit base 3441 by the arm presser 3451.

  The rotation unit base 3461 of the middle upper rotation unit 3460 extends in the left-right direction, and a bearing portion 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in a front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends longer than the transmission rack gear 3466 to the left and right along the lower side. The rotation unit base 3461 slidably accommodates the transmission rack gear 3466 and projects upward from the upper right end of the front view. A detection piece 3461f detected by the sensor.

  The back middle third drive motor 3463 is attached to the approximate center between the bearing portion 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c in the rotary unit base 3461. In the driven pinion gear 3467, the outer peripheral gear teeth meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only within the range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and do not rotate once. The driven pinion gear 3467 includes a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion where no gear teeth are formed on the outer periphery, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

  Next, the back upper right decoration unit 3480 of the back / middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decoration unit 3480 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3442 at a position in front of the back middle second drive motor 3443 in the back top middle drive unit 3440 and the front surface of the decoration base 3481. A back upper right decorative board 3482 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front face of the cage, and a back upper right decorative body 3383 having translucency, disposed in front of the back upper right decorative board 3482 and attached to the front face of the decorative base 3481; It is equipped with.

  The back upper right decorative unit 3480 can light up and decorate the back upper right decorative body 3383 by causing the LED of the back upper right decorative board 3482 to emit light. The back upper right decorative body 3484 of the back upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled to the game board 5 and the gate portion 2003 in the right hit distribution space 2541 in the right hit game area 2540 in the front view of the center accessory 2500 and the general prize. It is located between the mouth 2001 and the inside of the upper right circulation space 2541 can be illuminated and illuminated from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

  The back middle relay board 3490 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 includes a back middle first decorative board 3414, a back middle second decorative board 3415, a back middle first drive motor 3420, a slide detection sensor 3426, and a back top. The middle second drive motor 3443, the rotation detection sensor 3448, the back middle third drive motor 3463, the rotation detection sensor 3468, the back upper right decorative board 3482, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510, Is connected.

  Next, the operation of the back middle moving effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the back middle driving unit 3440. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), the back / upper / middle movable effect unit 3400 has the upper / lower middle decorative body unit 3410 extending left and right so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal. The back middle drive unit 3440 is positioned slightly below the upper side of the unit base 3441. In this normal state, the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are in contact with each other and closed.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 242, the back middle rotation unit 3460 is positioned at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the lifting drive gear 3446 is driven by the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. It is located at the lower end. In this state, a rotational moment acting to rotate counterclockwise around the rotation support pin 3441a acts on the back middle rotation unit 3460 with the weight of the back middle decoration unit 3410 and the like as a center. ing. Due to this rotational moment, the drive pin 3446b is pressed to the left via the drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevating drive gear 3446 attempts to rotate, but the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevating drive gear 3446 and is a line orthogonal to the direction in which the drive slit 3461b extends. Therefore, the elevating drive gear 3446 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end of the drive slit 3461b, the elevating drive gear 3446 cannot be rotated further in the clockwise direction. Is maintained in a normal state, and the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is locked in a raised state. In this state, the lifting drive gear 3446 does not rotate in spite of the action of the rotational moment, so that a load is applied to the back middle second drive motor 3443 via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. No, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 can be maintained at the rising end even when the back middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

  In a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 that is slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotation unit base 3461 is positioned at the moving end where the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) is far away, and A driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 is positioned near the rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Further, in a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is positioned above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 that is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 has a base in the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

  In the normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. In a normal state, the pair of first upper and lower middle decorative bodies 3411 extending horizontally and closed in the assembled state on the game board 5 are the main liquid crystal display device 1600 within the frame of the front view center accessory 2500. It is located above the display screen so as to be visible from the player side (see FIG. 201 and the like).

  When the up / down drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the second drive motor 3443 through the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 from the normal state, The drive pin 3446b of the drive gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise in the drive slit 3461b. The drive pin 3446b revolves counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the drive pin 3446b presses the drive slit 3461b to the left, and the upper middle rotation unit 3460 supports the rotation through the drive slit 3461b. The pin 3441a rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  When the middle rotating unit 3460 on the back is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the insertion hole of the rotating unit base 3461 located on the left side when viewed from the front above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a). The 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back upper decorative body unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 revolves counterclockwise in the front view around the rotation support pin 3441a, so that the assist arm 3450 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the assist pin 3461d. While rotating, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the tip side.

  Then, when the back middle rotating unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, the rotation driving of the back middle second driving motor 3443 stops and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461 is stopped. The (driven pinion gear 3467) is located below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is located at the lower end (see FIG. 243 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotating unit base 3461 is in contact with the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d is in contact with the end on the tip side in the assist slit 3450a. It is in a state where the rotation is restricted as described above.

  When the back middle rotating unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end, it is assembled to the game board 5 and the back middle decorative The center of the body unit 3410 (the central decorative portion 3412a of the second upper decorative body 3412 on the back) is located at the approximate center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 257).

  With the back upper decorative unit 3410 moved to the lower end, the back pinion third drive motor 3463 rotates the drive pinion gear 3465 through the third drive gear 3464 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides in the slide groove 3461e in the right direction when viewed from the front. When the transmission rack gear 3466 slides to the right, the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and is connected to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. Through the connection base 3431 of the member 3430, the back upper decorative unit 3410 also rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  In this back middle rotation unit 3460, the back middle decoration body unit 3410 can be rotated counterclockwise in front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the slide groove 3461e in front view. In the present embodiment, the back middle decorative unit 3410 can be rotated about 193 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. Therefore, in a state where the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end, it can be rotated 208 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state extending horizontally (FIG. 243 ( see b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 243 (b), the back middle first drive motor 3420 of the back middle decorative body unit 3410 is driven to slide the pair of back middle first decorative bodies 3411 away from each other. Move (see FIG. 258, FIG. 259, etc.).

  In this way, the back-upper middle movable effect unit 3400 converts the back-upper middle decorative body unit 3410 having the pair of back-upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the back-upper middle second decorative body 3412 into the back-upper middle drive unit 3440. The first decorative body 3411 can be opened and closed between the pair of upper and lower backs, and various movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, “Mahjong” expressed by the decoration of the back middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back top middle first decorative bodies depending on the degree of opening of the pair of back top middle decorative bodies 3411. Since the score of the “spot” can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced by the score of the “spot”.

[Bottom front movable direction unit]
Next, the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 244 to 251. FIG. 244 (a) is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 244 (b) is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable production unit from the back. FIG. 245 is an exploded perspective view of the front lower front movable effect unit other than the back lower front decorative body unit, and is seen from the front. FIG. 246 is an exploded view of the lower front front movable effect unit other than the lower lower front decorative body unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 247 is an exploded perspective view of the front lower front decorative body unit of the front lower front movable effect unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 248 is an exploded front lower front decorative body unit of the front lower front motion effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 249 is a front view schematically showing a decorative body unit raising / lowering mechanism in the lower back front movable effect unit. FIG. 250 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit lifting mechanism when the front lower back decorative body unit is raised, and FIG. 250 (b) is an enlarged view of the unit lifting pin portion in FIG. (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit lifting pins and the lifting slits by further enlarging (b). FIG. 251 (a) is a front view showing the front lower back movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state where the back lower front decorative body unit is lifted from the state of (a). (C) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front 1st decoration body of the back lower front decoration body unit from the state of (b).

  The back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back front movable effect unit 3500 includes a front lower back decorative body unit 3501 to which a predetermined decoration is applied, and an elevating unit attached to the front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 by moving the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 up and down. 3502, a back lower left decorative unit 3503 attached to the front left end front surface of the lifting unit 3502, and a back lower middle decorative unit 3504 attached to the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view on the front of the lifting unit 3502. A back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 attached from the left to the front of the back bottom middle decorative unit 3504 on the front of the lift unit 3502; a back lower front relay board 3506 attached to the rear face of the lift unit 3502; It has.

  As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the back bottom front decorative body unit 3501 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 is a plate extending in the left and right directions and differently decorated on both sides. The body 3510 and the front lower front first decorative body 3510 are attached to the upper side extending left and right so that the hinge can be rotated, and is attached to the lifting unit 3502 so as to be movable up and down, and the front is decorated. A second decorative body 3520.

  The first backside front decorative body 3510 of the front backside decorative body unit 3501 is a rectangular box whose front view extends long in the left and right directions, a predetermined decoration is formed on the front surface, and a shallow box shape with a rear side opened and transparent. A light-transmitting first front decorative member 3511 and a shallow box-shaped light-transmitting member that is attached to the rear surface of the first front decorative member 3511 and has a predetermined decoration formed on the rear surface, with the front side open. A first back decorative member 3512, a first front decorative member 3513 which is attached between the first back decorative member 3512 and the first front decorative member 3511 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides, Two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 projecting obliquely upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending left and right from the left and right ends of the front view on the upper side of the one-side decoration member 3512, and the first back decoration Member 3512 positive A decorative body lifting pin 3515 slidably inserted into a slit 3533a of a decorative body lifting arm 3533 in a back lower front second decorative body 3520, which will be described later, protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the view; A flat detection piece 3516 that protrudes rearward from the right side of the back decorative member 3512 when viewed from the front.

  Of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first lower-side front decorative body 3510 is attached with the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in front view slightly to the left of the right end in front view of the first back decorative member 3512. ing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first decorative member 3511 of the first decorative body 3511 in front of the lower back is decorated with a plurality of “Mahjong” “牌” arranged side by side.

  The back bottom front second decorative body 3520 of the back bottom front decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger in the left and right and top and bottom than the back bottom front first decorative body 3510 and has a predetermined decoration on the front surface. An open shallow box-like second decorative member 3521 having translucency, and a back-bottom front second decorative substrate 3522 mounted on the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, , A flat board cover 3523 that covers the back of the second lower decorative board 3522 and is attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, and a front view of the upper side extending to the left and right of the second decorative member 3521. The first hinge portion 3514 of the first lower decorative body 3510 that projects obliquely upward and forward so as to be coaxial with the axis extending from the left and right end portions to the left and right is attached to be able to rotate the hinge. The two second hinge portions 3524 having a cylindrical shape, and the right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge portion 3524 on the right side of the front view of the two second hinge portions 3524, and the left end side is the back lower front first decorative body 3510. A cylindrical hinge shaft 3525 that is inserted from the right side into the first hinge part 3514 on the right side of the front view of FIG. A hinge press 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the left first hinge part 3514.

  In addition, the back bottom front second decorative body 3520 has a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in front view and opened on the right side, and a rotating shaft extending through the gear base 3527. A front lower back first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side of the gear base 3527 in front view so as to protrude rightward, and a spur gear-like attached to the rotating shaft of the front lower back first drive motor 3528 First transmission gear 3529, transmission first gear 3530 meshed with first drive gear 3529 and rotatably attached to gear base 3527, meshed with transmission first gear 3530 and rotated to gear base 3527 A transmission second gear 3531 that is movably attached, a first elevating gear 3532 that meshes with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, On the left side of the base 3527 when viewed from the front, the first elevating gear 3532 rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532 and penetrates in the left-right direction, and extends on an axis passing through the center of rotation. Front view right side of decorative body lifting arm 3533 having slit 3533a slidably inserted, first drive gear 3529, transmission first gear 3530, transmission second gear 3531, and first lifting gear 3532 A flat gear cover 3534 attached to the gear base 3527 and having the open right end of the gear base 3527 closed.

  Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface in front view of the second decorative member 3521 and can detect a detection piece 3516 of the front lower front first decorative body 3510; The sensor cover 3536 is attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535, and the slider is attached to extend downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 when viewed from the front. A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 projecting rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the right end in rear view in the upper part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523.

  In the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative body lifting pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525 and 3526a, the lower back front first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, and the transmission first A decoration body raising / lowering mechanism in which the gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, the first raising / lowering gear 3532, and the decoration body raising / lowering arm 3533 are moved up and down by hinge-rotating the back lower front first decoration body 3510 with respect to the axis extending left and right. 3501A is comprised.

  In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is formed in the lower portion of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a long hole-like lifting slit 3540 that penetrates forward and backward and extends left and right. Have. As shown in FIG. 249, FIG. 250, and the like, the lifting slit 3540 is formed at the same height at both ends extending left and right, and is located on the upper side extending left and right and closer to the right from the left end in front view. Has a lock projection 3540a protruding downward. The lock projection 3540a is formed in an arc shape in which the left side when viewed from the front is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the left end of the lifting slit 3540, and the right side when viewed from the front is the lifting slit. It is formed in a straight line extending obliquely toward the left end of a portion slightly extending leftward from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of 3540. The lower side extending to the left and right of the lifting slit 3540 is formed in a shape following the upper side so as to form a substantially constant interval with the upper side.

  The elevating unit 3502 of the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 includes a flat unit base 3550 attached to the front surface of the back-under-back movable effect unit 3100 and the back of the back-under-front front decorative body unit 3501 between the unit base 3550 and the unit base 3550. A rotating shaft protrudes between the base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 with a gap that can accommodate a lower part than the front first decorative body 3510, and the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A second back-front drive motor 3552 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, and a spur gear-like second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotation shaft of the second back-front front drive motor 3552; It is meshed with the second drive gear 3553 and rotated by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A second transmission gear 3554 that is attached to the second transmission gear, an arc-shaped second lifting gear 3555a meshing with the second transmission gear 3554, and a substantially semicircular and flat plate-shaped main body portion 3555b concentric with the arc of the second lifting gear 3555a. A shaft hole 3555c that passes through the center of the main body 3555b and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and an arm 3555d that extends from the main body 3555b in a direction away from the second elevating gear 3555a. A unit lift arm 3555 having a cylindrical shape, and a columnar shape that is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit lift arm 3555 from the front and is slidably inserted into the lift slit 3540 of the front lower back decorative body unit 3501. Unit lift pin 3556a, front end of unit lift pin 3556a A flat plate-like connecting piece 3556b extending toward the shaft hole 3555c along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555, and projecting rearward from the front end of the connecting piece 3556b, the rear end of the main body portion 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555b. An arm reinforcing member 3556 having an attachment boss 3556c attached to the front surface.

  The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat detection piece 3553a that extends outward. The unit lifting arm 3555 is attached to the unit base 3550 so as to rotate about the position near the upper part from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Unit lift arm 3555 is formed such that the distance from shaft hole 3555c to the tip of arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of second lift gear 3555a.

  Further, the lifting unit 3502 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550, and is attached to the unit lifting detection sensor 3557 capable of detecting the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and to the right end portion in front view on the front surface of the unit base 3550. A vertically extending slide base 3558, a vertically extending bar-like intermediate slider 3559 attached to the front side of the slide base 3558, and a front side of the intermediate slider 3559 slidably attached to the front side. And a mounting slider 3560 extending vertically to be attached to the slider mounting portion 3537 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501.

  In this elevating unit 3502, a front lower back second drive motor 3552, a second drive gear 3553, a second transmission gear 3554, a unit elevating arm 3555, an arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit elevating pin 3556 a), a slide base 3558, and an intermediate slider 3559. , And the mounting slider 3560 constitute a decorative body unit lifting mechanism 3502A that lifts and lowers the lower back front decorative body unit 3501.

  Further, the elevating unit 3502 has a proximal end rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, penetrates forward and backward, extends toward the distal end, and is inserted with the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501. A guide arm 3561 having a guide slit 3561a and a guide bush 3538 which is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561 from the rear and into which the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is inserted. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and an arm presser attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 that rotatably supports the rear face of the base end side of the guide arm 3561. 3564, arm presser 3564 and spring Over scan both ends and 3563 is provided with an assist spring 3565 which urges the respective attached and the direction in which the Ahemu presser 3564 and spring-based 3563 approach each other, the. The guide arm 3561 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 in the upper left position of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front, and the tip end side extends to the right.

  The back left lower decoration unit 3503 of the front back movable production unit 3500 is attached to the upper left corner of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front, and has a three-dimensional decoration imitating “Mahjong” “牌” on the front. And a back lower left decorative board 3561 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 behind the lower left lower decorative body 3560 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. The back left bottom decorative unit 3503 can light up and decorate the back left bottom decorative body 3560 by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back left bottom decorative substrate 3561 to emit light. The bottom left decoration unit 3503 is positioned behind the side unit 2300 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and can illuminate the vicinity of the side unit top 2300 in the game area 5a.

  The lower back middle decorative unit 3504 of the front lower front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the left side of the front surface of the base cover 3551 from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed with a decoration of “Dokun” characters. And a lower back middle decorative body 3570 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the lower back middle decorative body 3570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back lower middle decoration unit 3504 can light-decorate the lower back middle decorative body 3570 by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the back lower middle decorative board 3571. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is positioned between the lower side unit 2200 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a when assembled in the game board 5.

  The back left bottom ball guiding unit 3505 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 can guide and discharge the game balls received in the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit bottom 2200 downward. This back left lower sphere guiding unit 3505 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has a transparent passage member 3580 whose front surface is open, and a transparent flat plate shape which closes the front surface of the passage member 3580 which is open. A cover 3581 and a side rear decorative board 3582 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 is attached. In addition, the back left lower sphere guiding unit 3505 is positioned behind the side unit lower 2200 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the side unit lower 2200 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the side rear decorative board 3582. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The back bottom front relay board 3506 of the back back front movable production unit 3500 includes a back bottom front first decorative board 3513, a back bottom front second decorative board 3522, a back bottom front first drive motor 3528, a decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535, Back side front second drive motor 3552, unit elevation detection sensor 3557, back left bottom decorative board 3561, back bottom middle decorative board 3571, side rear decorative board 3582, and stage drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 The connection is relayed.

  Next, the operation of the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 251 (a) and the like, the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 has the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 positioned at the descending end and the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 in a normal state. The back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinged so as to descend and is positioned in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the front lower front first decorative body 3510 faces forward.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 249, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit lifting arm 3555 of the lifting unit 3502 is positioned below the shaft hole 3555c and is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d. The unit lifting pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted into the lifting slit 3540 of the lower front decorative body unit 3501 is located in the vicinity of the right end of the lifting slit 3540 in the front view. Further, the guide arm 3561 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state of extending substantially horizontally with its tip directed rightward in front view, and is inserted into a guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561. The guide boss 3538 of the front back decorative unit 3501 is located at the left end in the front view in the guide slit 3561a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevation detection sensor 3557.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decorative body lifting arm 3553 in the second lower decorative body 3520 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 has a state in which the tip side extends downward from the rotation center. The decorative body lifting / lowering pin 3515 of the front lower back first decorative body 3510 inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body lifting / lowering arm 3553 is located at the end of the slit 3533a on the side near the rotation center. Yes. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the first backside decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535 of the second backside front decorative body 3520.

  In this normal state, in the assembled state on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the front-view main liquid crystal display device 1600 and behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500, and the back lower front decorative body unit A first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 in 3501 is positioned above the stage 2530.

  In a normal state, the unit elevating arm 3555 is rotated counterclockwise by the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554 by the front lower second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502. Then, the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a at the tip of the arm portion 3555d revolves in a direction to rise around the shaft hole 3555c. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a presses the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, and the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 rises. Since the front lower right decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 through the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the attachment slider 3560, the right end portion in front view rises straight without tilting.

  As the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 to the left in the front view. When the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left as viewed from the front of the portion of the lock protrusion 3540a that protrudes downward in the elevating slit 3540, the driving of the lower back front second drive motor 3552 stops. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the drive unit 3502 (decorating body unit elevating mechanism 3502A) (first ascending position). ) (See FIG. 251 (b)).

  In this state, the front end (unit lifting pin 3556a) of the arm portion 3555d of the unit lifting arm 3555 is located at the upper right in front view with respect to the rotation center (shaft hole 3555c) of the unit lifting arm 3555. Due to the weight of the front decorative body unit 3501, a rotational moment is applied to the tip of the arm portion 3555d so as to rotate the unit elevating arm 3555 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 250 (c), on the left side surface of the lock projection 3540a with which the unit elevating pin 3556a is in contact with the upper side of the elevating slit 3540, the portion on the right side of the contacted portion is Since it has entered inside the boundary line L (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure) of the swivel range of the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a, in order to revolve so that the lock projection 3540a moves downward, the intruding part The lock protrusion 3540a (the back lower front decorative body unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 so that the head moves outside the boundary line L of the turning range. The rotational moment acting on the lift pins 3556a is canceled out, and the unit lift arm 3555 does not rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, It is maintained (locked) in a state positioned.

  In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the ascending end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is assembled to the center board 2500 in a front view when assembled to the game board 5. It becomes the state located in the frame, and the decoration of the first front decoration member 3511 of the back lower front first decoration body 3510 can be seen well from the player side.

  Subsequently, with the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 positioned at the rising end, the first front drive gear 3529 and the first transmission gear 3530 are transmitted by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. When the decorative body lifting arm 3533 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side via the transmission second gear 3531 and the first lifting gear 3532, the slit 3533a of the decorative body lifting arm 3533 causes the slit 3533a to enter the slit 3533a. The first hinge part 3514 and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 are moved forward and upward so that the decorative body lifting pin 3515 of the inserted back lower front first decorative body 3510 is pushed forward. The back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated around the second hinge part 3524.

  When the decorative body lifting / lowering arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side, the rotation of the first lower back front first drive motor 3528 stops, and the first lower back front first decorative body 3510 moves the second lower back front second decorative body 3510. It will be in the state located above the decoration body 3520 (a raise position or an open position). In this state, the first front decoration member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 that was initially facing forward is in a state of facing rear, and instead, the rear lower front second decorative body 3520 is facing backward. The second back decorative member 3512 facing the second decorative member 3521 is located above the second decorative member 3521 and the front surface thereof is substantially flush with the second decorative member 3521 and faces forward. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the letter “Wo”) (FIG. 251). see c)).

  In a state where the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is raised and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is opened by rotating the ascending hinge, the center accessory 2500 is assembled in the game board 5 in the front view. The substantially lower half of the frame (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed with the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 261).

  As described above, the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 is maintained in a state where the back-under-front front decorative body unit 3501 is stopped at the rising end position even when the back-under-front second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load acting on the second drive motor 3552 in front of the lower back. Further, since the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a that revolves in the upward direction is locked in the middle, when the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked at the rising end position, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is There is no unnatural movement that falls, and the player can enjoy the movement of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501.

  Further, in the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, as the operation of raising the back lower front first decorative body 3510, the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending in the left and right directions so as to be lifted. Compared with the case where it is made to do, since the site | part of the back bottom front 1st decoration body 3510 visible from a player side changes every moment, it can be made conspicuous and can attract a player's interest strongly. By opening the back lower front first decorative body 3510 by hinge rotation, the first back decorative member 3512 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 that cannot be seen in a normal state. The second decorative member 3521 can be shown, and the player can be surprised.

[Direction on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 252 to 261. FIG. 252 is a state in which the first rear decorative body and the second rear rear decorative body are rotated together at the normal position in the movable rear directing unit of the rear unit with the second decorative surface facing the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 253 shows the first rear decorative body and the second rear rear decorative body of the rear unit, and the first decorative surface of the first rear rear decorative body is directed to the front. And slide it to the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area, and slide the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body to the approximate center in the left and right direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 254 is a diagram showing the first rear decorative body and the second rear rear decorative body in the state shown in FIG. With the decorative surface facing the front, the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable production unit is opened by rotating the hinge and the rear upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the rear upper left second decorative body first It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where two decorative members are directed to the front. FIG. 255 is a diagram illustrating the first rear decorative body and the second rear rear decorative body opened by rotating the first rear decorative body of the rear lower movable stage production unit by hinge rotation from the state of FIG. 253. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the decorative surface is directed to the front.

  FIG. 256 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end in front view. FIG. 257 is a front view counterclockwise so that the back upper middle decorative body unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit in the rear unit is moved to the position of the descending end and the rear upper middle decorative body unit extends obliquely in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state rotated in the surrounding direction. FIG. 258 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 257 and slid to the half open intermediate open position. FIG. 259 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and slid to the fully opened position. FIG. 260 is a front view of the game board shown with the lower back front decorative body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit positioned at the rising end. FIG. 261 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back lower front first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 260 and is raised above the back lower front second decorative body.

  In the normal state, the game board 5 of the present embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIG. , It can be seen well from the player side (front). In this normal state, the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 of the back unit 3000, which can be rotated by the hinge, are closed, and the back bottom back first decorative body is closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 faces forward so that it can be seen from the player side, and the display of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is displayed on the right side of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

  In a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are rotated by the hinge rotation of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. In the folded state in which the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is positioned in front of the fixed decorative member 3211, the back decorative body is positioned behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050, which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. The front side is obstructed from the player side by the back left middle decoration unit 3050 so as not to be visible.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable rendering unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 that is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. A part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 faces slightly forward through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the normal state, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A part of the front view center accessory 2500 faces forward in a visible manner.

  Further, in a normal state, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is moved forward of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. In the state of being folded down to the side, the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is a lower end lower than the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that it does not face forward from within the frame of the center accessory 2500 Is located.

  This game board 5 is located behind the back unit 3000 in accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200, the rear left movable effect unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effects and light emission effects). .

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back and bottom movable movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back and back second decorative body 3120 is viewed in a plan view by the back and back back second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. The second decorative surface 3122 facing backward is turned to the front by rotating in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 252). At this time, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 which is closed and positioned in front of the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. As a result, the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 and the back bottom back first decorative body 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A portion of the displayed effect image is blocked, and the second backside decorative body 3120 can be made conspicuous, and “Tenun” applied to the second decorative surface 3122 of the backside back second decorative body 3120. ”Can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can feel that there is something good, and the expectation of the game can be increased.

  In addition, as an effect (movable effect) using the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back bottom movable effect unit 3100 has a third rear surface behind the slide unit 3150. The drive motor 3155 slidably moves the rotary drive unit 3130 to the left end position when viewed from the front while the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are closed. The first backside back first decorative body 3110 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the backside back first drive motor 3134 so that the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces the front. At the same time, in the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200, the rear upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rear upper left second decorative body 3220 are back upper left first by the rear upper left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240. The first decorative member 3221 is closed with respect to the decorative body 3210 and is slid and moved to the right end of the front view together with the upper left second decorative body 3220 (see FIG. 253).

  In the state shown in FIG. 253, the axis extending vertically to rotate the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left The axis extending vertically to rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the movable effect unit 3200 is located on the same axis and located on the left and right sides of the game area 5a. It almost coincides with the center of the direction. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a state where the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged obliquely within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. Located in front of. Thereby, a player can be surprised by the movement to the center side of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the appearance of the back top left second decorative body 3220.

  Then, in the state in which the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the back top left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (the state of FIG. 253), the rotational drive unit 3130 in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100. The back back first decorative body 3110 folded by the back bottom back first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back bottom back second decorative body 3120, The back lower back first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the back upper left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is provided. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, A back on the left second decorative body fixing decorative member 3211 side by side 3220 on the right side of the first decorative body 3210 directs the second decorative member 3222 on the front (see Figure 254).

  In the state of FIG. 254, the rear back rear first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 arranged side by side on the left and right of the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 side by side. The back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are joined together in the vertical direction at the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The front of the display screen is substantially covered. In addition, the first back and rear first decorative body 3110 and the second back and rear second decorative body 3120 of the rear back and rear movable effect unit 3100 facing the front, and the back upper and left movable effect unit 3200 Due to the decorations applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220, the vertically written characters “Kangsei” are displayed as the player. It becomes visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body appears in the frame of the center object 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), which has a great impact on the player and a chance of “hit game” or the like. It is possible to strongly suggest the arrival of the game, and to increase the expectation for the game.

  By the way, although the above demonstrated the effect which opens the back back lower 1st decoration body 3110 of the back back lower movable unit 3100 and the back upper left second decoration body 3220 of the back upper left movable production unit 3200 simultaneously, As shown at 255, only the back-behind back first decorative body 3110 of the back-behind movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. Thereby, the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100 are opened by hinge rotation first, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front. And the letter “Holy” will be visible first. At this time, since the cut decoration 3170 such as “I” is provided above the character “St.”, the decoration that forms a set for the player to complete the cut decoration 3170 on the upper side is provided. (The cut decoration 3260) can be recognized, and whether or not the decoration of the pair appears (whether or not the second upper decoration body 3220 on the back opens by rotating the hinge) This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Further, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid to the appearance position on the right in the front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 located just behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500. And is visible from the player side (see FIG. 256). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in a region corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed at the rear, It is possible to make an illusion that the effect image is displayed within the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the drawing, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back bottom back first decorative body 3110 in the back bottom back movable production unit 3100. When the decorative body 3320 is made to appear, the back left side is movable with the illusion that another liquid crystal display device has appeared on the left side so as to form a pair with the first decorative body 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) after the back side on the right side. It is possible to greatly enjoy the effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the first back of the first decorative body 3110.

  Further, as an effect using the back middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated counterclockwise by the second back drive motor 3443 of the back middle drive unit 3440. The back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 attached to the front end of the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, and the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3460 of the rear upper middle rotating body 3460 is driven by the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3463. Rotate 3410 to the pivot end in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back upper decorative body unit 3410 is positioned substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the back upper decorative body unit 3410 extends obliquely with its right end side raised. (FIG. 257). As a result, the back middle decorative body unit 3410 located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 descends to the center position while rotating. The unit 3410 can be noticed, and the movement of the back and middle decorative body unit 3410 in the form reminiscent of “Mahjong” 's “thousands of sticks” makes it seem that there is something good, and expects the game A feeling can be raised.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 257, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end and is obliquely extended from the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 by the back upper middle first drive motor 3420. A pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to be in an intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 258, the center decorative portion 3412a and the four central lateral decorative portions 3412b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are between the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411. Because it is in a state of facing forward, the player can be reminded of the "Mahjong" "Five thousand sticks", which seems to have increased the possibility of "big hit game", expecting A feeling can be raised more.

  Further, from the state of FIG. 258, when the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid further in the separating direction by the back-upper middle first drive motor 3420, the pair of back-upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are opened as shown in FIG. From among the middle first decorative bodies 3411 on the back side, all of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back middle second decorative body 3412 face forward. Because it is in a state, the player can be reminded of the “Mahjong” “Million sticks” and be convinced that the lottery result of the first or second lottery is a “hit” It is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, as an effect using the back-under-front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back-bottom-front first decorative body 3510 is hinged to the front of the back-bottom-front front second decorative body 3520 and folded. Then, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised from the lower end position to the upper end position by the second lower front drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502. In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the front lower front decorative body 3510 can be favorably visually recognized from the person side (see FIG. 260). As a result, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises from below and covers the lower part of the front surface of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance, and the game is expected Can be raised. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first front decorative member 3511 of the first front decorative body 3511 below the back is provided with a decoration in which a plurality of “Mahjong” “牌” are arranged. By making the front decoration member 3511 rise and become visible, it is possible to entertain the player with the illusion that his / her own baskets are lined up.

  Then, in the state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (decorative body lifting mechanism 3501A). When the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending in the left and right directions so that the lower back front first decorative body 3510 ascends and is positioned above the lower back front second decorative body 3520, the back lower front that has not been seen so far The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 are arranged vertically. In this state, when viewed from the front, the substantially lower half of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed with the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520. Thus, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form a single large decoration (decoration of the letter “Wo”) (FIG. 261). See). As a result, the first table decoration member 3511 with a decoration in which a plurality of “Mahjong tiles” are arranged on the left and right is hinged around the axis extending to the left and right, and the word “Kazunori” means “upward”. Because of the decoration, the player can be convinced that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn for the player is “big hit”, and the interest in the occurrence of “big hit game” is interesting. Can be increased.

[Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the gaming machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the release of the game ball by rotating the handle lever 504.

[Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a gaming ball passing through the gate 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning opening 2005 A first top prize opening sensor 2114, a second top prize opening 2006a as a second big prize opening 2006, and a second top prize opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second lower prize opening 2006b; Detection signals from the second lower grand prize opening sensor 2557, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. It is input via the port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker solenoid. 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and a first special symbol display, a second special symbol display, and a first special symbol memory display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to the second special symbol memory display, the normal symbol display, the normal symbol memory display, the game status indicator, the round indicator, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second upper big prize port sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize port. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened, and game balls frequently enter, The detection of game balls by the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and a long life are also used for the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3015.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the periphery of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Or transmitted to the control unit 1511. The main control MPU will be described in detail later, but when receiving various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[Discharge control board]
The payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout and a launch solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that cancels an error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, a tank rail 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[Payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the apparatus 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. The

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball check” (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830 are in mesh with the payout blade 839 and the game ball to make it difficult to rotate, and the number “3” "Is displayed Is a “counting switch error” (specifically, a failure has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number “5” is displayed. “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, “full” (Specifically, based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full) and the number “7” is displayed. When “CR is not connected” is notified (the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number “9” is displayed It has informed the message indicating "stock" (specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined for the game ball is not paid out).

  The ball rental request signal for the game ball from the ball rental button 332 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit 334. It is input to 334 and displayed.

[Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551 is omitted in detail, but a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit receives, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504. In response to this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the ball. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 540 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 680 by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 even when the power is shut off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 262, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3043, or the gaming board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 or a door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and each device of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light emission data composed of door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on the substrate is used as a frame decoration drive board serial I / O. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting to 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 of the effect operation unit 220 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and plays music and music adapted to various effects from the speakers 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal as sound information) is sent to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By transmitting a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of data different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the flashing signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  In addition, the effect drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[Production display control unit]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not illustrated in detail, but as a microprocessor. Display control MPU, display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling display of main liquid crystal display device 1600 and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and main liquid crystal Image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper liquid crystal display device 244, and image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM are transferred and copied And.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control programs (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. And a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding thereto. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. The non-resident area transfer data includes various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate are extracted. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer. In this method, the held drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This affects the drawing speed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites are overlapped with each other, so that the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially perform main scanning that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front. And sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction crossing the one direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as the sub-scan, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, on the basis of the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially applied from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each minute pixel.

[Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 201, FIG. 207, FIG. 212, FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. That is, a game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When a game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front surface of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down while abutting on the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory passes through the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523.

  The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. From either of them. When a game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and thus the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The ball is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received at the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the opened first big winning port 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center object 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility of being received in 2001, the first start port 2002, or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, a game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven into) the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ) And enters the right upper distribution space 2541 of the right hit game area 2540. In the upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted, and a game ball abuts against the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper portion, and a second start opening 2004 that is closed by a general winning opening 2001 and a second start opening door member 2549 is provided at the lower portion.

  The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game balls that have entered the lower right circulation space 2543 are the second upper prize opening that closes the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower prize winning opening 2006b, which are lined up on the left and right as the second prize winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower grand prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a that forms the bottom surface, and enters the game area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side when viewed from the front. Released. The downstream end (release plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100, and the first big prize opening 2005 is open. When a game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received at the first big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, the lower right circulation space 2543 may enter a discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

  When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is a normal random number that is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal lottery is performed by obtaining one ordinary random number from the list and comparing the obtained ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the normal lottery result of this normal lottery becomes “normal hit” when the time-shortening control described later is not executed, the second start door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The start port 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, it is determined whether the “normal hit” is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. If the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second start port door member 2549 By turning in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opening the second start port 2004, the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 for a predetermined period of time. Opening / closing control is made a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5) by turning counterclockwise and closing the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball cannot be received in the second starting port 2004. ) Times. In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per 1st normal”, the second start port 2004 is set to be in a state where the game ball can be received, and “0.3 second” is set as the five periods. , “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per second ordinary” The second start port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be received five times, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”. When the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per third ordinary”, the second starting port 2004 is allowed to accept game balls. The period is “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “1.1 second”, “per second ordinary” and “third ordinary” Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal symbol variation display performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate part 2003, the normal symbol variation display is started after the normal symbol variation display is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). At the second start port 2004, the second start port door member 2549 is rotated and opened after the normal variation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of the time-shortening control which will be described later, control for shortening the normal variation time is executed as compared with normal (a state where time-shortening control is not executed). Further, the opening time for turning the second start port door member 2549 to open the second start port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, time reduction control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a longer time as compared with the case where the time reduction control is executed.

  In addition, after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, until a normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is added to the gate unit. After passing 2003, the normal symbol display cannot be started again on the normal symbol display. Therefore, the normal symbol change display is started until the previous normal symbol change display ends (the normal lottery result). Until the suggestion is over). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the normal symbol variation display can be started. Until normal symbols change display starts. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 and the upper limit is discarded even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”) is obtained by acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table. , “Small hit”, etc.) are generated for the first special lottery result. Then, the first special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after variably displaying the first special symbol). Note that the first special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first starting port 2002 include “out of”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “8R big hit”, and “10R big hit”. Yes, by comparing the acquired first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game is normal (low probability state: in this example with a probability of about 1/395) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): wins the jackpot with a probability of about 44/44 in this example) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than winning the jackpot) Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a promising big hit), and whether or not to execute time-short control (time-short state) that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when the result of the first special lottery is off And short-time control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. Note that the winning probability of “small hit” is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

  Further, when a game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. The second special random number is acquired, and the acquired second special random number is collated with a predetermined jackpot determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “small hit”, etc. ) To generate the second special lottery result. Then, the second special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after variably displaying the second special symbol). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting a game ball at the second starting port 2004 includes “out of”, “2R big hit”, “4R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “6R big hit”, There are “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “16R jackpot”, which is determined by comparing the acquired second special random number with the jackpot determination table. Low probability state: In this example, the probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probabilistic state)) that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than a win of about 395 in this example: this example (If you win a big hit with a probability of about 1/44) or not (whether it is a promising big hit or not), and at least if the second special lottery result is out of time, the time-saving control to shorten the fluctuation time than usual (Short time ) Is executed (whether or not it is a short and large hit) and the time period during which the time reduction control is executed (the number of time reductions: special symbol (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate)) It has become.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the predetermined fluctuation time, display the eight LEDs of the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) in the lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big prize opening Either 2005 or the second grand prize winning hole 2006 is in a state where a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 if a game ball is received in the first grand prize opening 2005 or 15 if a game ball is accepted in the second big prize opening 2006). Is dispensed to the upper plate 201. Accordingly, when the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second major prize opening 2006 are capable of receiving game balls, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 accept many game balls. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the result of the special lottery is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the first big prize opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the accepting open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 is predetermined. If any of the following conditions are satisfied: a number (for example, 7) of game balls are received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are received in the second big prize opening 2006 Then, an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) for making the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating four rounds for “4R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 16 rounds for “16R big hit”. In addition, the opening / closing pattern (the first big prize opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”. In the meantime, in the open / close pattern in which the game ball is opened after being opened, the game ball is substantially difficult to enter the first big prize opening 2005. On the other hand, when the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in the second big prize opening 2006. If such a condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 in an open / close pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state). If the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 is determined in advance. Either a certain number (for example, seven) of game balls is accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls is accepted into the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern for closing the game ball to be unacceptable is executed may be a substantial special lottery result. 7) If any of the conditions for accepting a game ball or accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the second grand prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the closed ball that cannot accept the game ball is closed. Open / close pattern to be set and open / close pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big win” (the first big prize opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) And an opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened after being opened and can be closed) may be provided. For example, as a result of the special lottery, “8R big hit that is substantially 4R” is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening If any of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in 2006 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable state is repeated four times. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first big prize opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the game ball can be received may be repeated four times.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is composed of a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged in the left and right, and the second big prize winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of “big hit”, for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened to accept the game ball, and it is closed by satisfying the condition that the game ball cannot be accepted, and then accepted. Until the second lower big prize opening 2006b is opened and the next round (2R) that allows the reception of game balls is started, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize winning opening 2006a is opened again to allow the game ball to be received. Then, the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are consumed. Thereby, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the “big hit”, either the second upper prize winning port 2006a or the second lower major prize winning port 2006b is in a state where it can receive the game ball. When the player hits the right and distributes the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is surely received in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player can entertain the player without missing the game ball. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of some of the above-mentioned types of big hits, whether or not to execute the time-shortening control after completion of the big hit game is made different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time-short state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is 8R normal big hit in the time-short state (state where time-short control is executed), the time-short control is executed after the big hit game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time-short state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state in which the time reduction control is executed), the time reduction control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are executed after the big hit game in the low-probability non-short-time state (both probability improvement control and time-shortage control are not executed: also referred to as normal state). In the case of 2R probability variable big hit, the time-shortening control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time reduction control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. In the case of a big hit, the short time control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display by the reception of the game ball at the first start port 2002 and the reception of the game ball at the second start port 2004 are the first. The change display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol indicators is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator is stopped and displayed (the first special lottery result is suggested) by receiving the game ball at the first starting port 2002 and The first start until the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by receiving the game ball at the second start port 2004 is stopped (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is received at the mouth 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol variable display. Since it is not possible to change the display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the end of the variable symbol display of the first special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (first special lottery) Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery are complete ) Is set to be pending. More specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until it becomes possible to start the variable display of symbols. In addition, the upper limit of the number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 respectively. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being put on hold. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold. The first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are turned on / off repeatedly for a predetermined time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and a special lottery result is suggested by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop.

  On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a state where a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of left decorative symbols, middle decorative symbols, and right decorative symbols) are displayed. The display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then it is stopped in sequence (in this example, it is displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol sequences are stopped. When displayed, a lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, multiple decorative symbol sequences fluctuate according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired at the time of starting winning. An effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) after being displayed is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol string fluctuates to confirm the image) The time until the function display unit 1400 is set to be shorter.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center object 2500, the back left side according to the lottery special lottery result The interior decoration unit 3050, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are used as appropriate. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 263 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU is executed. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special symbol) used for the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped. Random numbers, second special random numbers), variable random numbers used for lottery processing for the variable time required for the variable symbol display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) Reach (decoration display of the left decoration design and the right decoration design in the same design and the middle decoration design is not yet stopped display in the variation display of the decoration design executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Reach random numbers used for lottery processing to determine whether or not to decorate the right decorative symbols so that they all become the same symbol), if the big hit is determined based on the special random number Symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) used for lottery processing for determining the class, subject to lottery processing related to winning when the second start door member 2549 becomes an operation trigger It has a random number counter that holds random numbers such as ordinary random numbers.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 263 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second top big prize port sensor 2554, the first Detection signals from various switches such as the two lower prize winning hole sensors 2557 and the general winning opening sensor 3015 are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above random numbers, the random number of the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random number (special random number, normal random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the normal symbol is updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a win as an operation trigger of the second start door member 2549 as the process of step S15. . Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Also, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second start port door member 2549 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game except for some big hits. (So-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the normal variation time required for displaying the normal symbol is reduced, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit is made, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the second starting port 2004 and increasing the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  Also, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (16R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the big prize opening sensor 2554, the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, etc. are in the on state, the above-mentioned payout control is performed so that the prize balls corresponding to these signals are paid out to the player. A payout control command is output to the substrate 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of holds as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 264, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 2104. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2551 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit control for controlling the big hit game is performed. A process (step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “2R probability variable big hit”, “8R normal big hit”, and “8R probability variable big hit”. On the basis of this, the first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close, and the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close based on the fact that “10R probability change big hit” is suggested. Also, based on the fact that the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “2R normal jackpot”, the first grand prize winning port 2005 is controlled to open and close, and “4R Based on the fact that it has become a mode that suggests "probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R probable big hit", and "16R probable big hit" 2006 is controlled to open and close. Also, when the jackpot game is ended based on the fact that the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped has become a mode suggesting “10R probability variable big hit”, and the variation of the second special symbol The results of lottery processing for the display mode when the display is stopped suggests "4R probability variation big hit", "5R probability variation big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", "7R probability variation big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit" When the big hit game based on the fact that the game has been completed is terminated, the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol during the short time state has become a mode suggesting “8R probability variable big hit” Lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in a state other than the normal state when the jackpot game based on When the big hit game is ended based on the result of suggesting “2R probable big hit”, the time-short flag is set to execute the time-short control (time-short state control) until the next big hit. To do. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is ended based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the short-time state is a mode suggesting “8R normal jackpot”, after the jackpot game The special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) after the big hit game is set by setting "72" to the fluctuation number counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Time-shortening control (time-short state control) is performed until the number of fluctuations of two special symbols) reaches 72 times. In addition, when the big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during the time-short state has become a mode suggesting “2R normal big hit”, Depending on the lottery result, set any one of “18”, “36”, “54”, “72” in the variation counter and set the time-short flag to set a special symbol (first special symbol, Time-shortening control (time-short state control) is executed until the number of fluctuations of (2 special symbols) reaches the number corresponding to the second special lottery result among 18, 36, 54, and 72 times. A high probability flag is set when a big hit game based on a probable big hit (2R probable big hit, 4R probable big hit, 6R probable big hit, 6R probable big hit, 7R probable big hit, 8R probable big big hit, 10R probable big big hit, 16R probable big big hit) By doing so, probability improvement control (control of high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high-probability short-time state if both the high-probability flag and the short-time flag are set, and sets the high-probability non-short-time state if only the high-probability flag is set without setting the time-shortage flag. Control, if only the short-time flag is set without setting the high-probability flag, control is made to the low-probability short-time state (so-called short-time state), and if neither the high-probability flag nor the short-time flag is set, the low probability Control to a non-short-time state (so-called normal state).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36). If set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hitting control process, based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stopped has become a mode suggesting “small hit”. The first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close.

  If neither big hit execution flag nor small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ On the condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is applied. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 2104 is in the on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S41, firstly, the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to newly put the variable display start of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value obtained by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM area of the main control MPU is used as the random number thus obtained. To store.

  However, in the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display start of the first special symbol is not held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S42 to step S44, the variable display start of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  Further, the main control MPU displays the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not, if the jackpot is a jackpot type, if the jackpot or jackpot is not hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the game effect mode to be executed After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the type (variation pattern type) before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2551 is in an ON state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the second special symbol hold number is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display start of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S54, each random number obtained in this way is used as a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. To store.

  However, if it is determined in step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not put on hold. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S52 to step S54, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the effect preliminary determination processing (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production predetermination process, the predetermination table shown in FIG. 268 (A) and the acquired random number, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether the game is a big hit or a small hit by comparing the variable random numbers, the type of big hit if the big hit is reached, and the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if the big hit or the small hit is not reached The effect is executed or the type of game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the first special random number. By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it is a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in a later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) and is the same disturbance as the jackpot determination value compared with the first special random number. The jackpot determination value (3937-3946) with a low probability is set to a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) at a low probability described later and is compared with the first special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not it is a big hit, and the contents of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and this game By specifying the type of the fluctuation pattern indicating the period (fluctuation time) for performing the production, any one of “big hit 1-12”, which is a big hit as prior judgment information, “out of” and “reach 1-4” which are not big hits Can be classified. In this example, as shown in FIG. 268 (B), the fluctuation pattern, normal reach fluctuation pattern, weak SP reach fluctuation pattern, and non-specific strong strong depending on the ratio of big hit (expected big hit value, also called big hit reliability). A plurality of types of variation patterns of SP reach variation patterns and specific strong SP reach variation patterns are provided (outgoing big hit expected value variation pattern <normal reach variation pattern <weak SP reach variation pattern <non-specific strong SP reach variation pattern <Specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). Further, the ratio of the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process in step S82 and the second variation pattern setting process in the second special symbol process process) described later and executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is inversely proportional to the expected value of jackpot (outgoing fluctuation pattern> normal reach fluctuation pattern> weak SP reach fluctuation pattern> non-specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern> specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). That is, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the deviation fluctuation pattern is executed relatively frequently, while the specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern is rarely executed.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, the same randomness is obtained regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. It is also specified whether or not a small hit is made by comparing the small hit determination value set to a numerical value with the first special random number. These small hit determination values (3800-3812) at the time of high probability or low probability are set in a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later, and the first special random number. It is set to the same random number as the small hit determination value compared with. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the small hit is made, and the prior determination information includes “big hit 9 to 12” including the small hit. Can be classified.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed. If it is set, it is determined whether it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the second special random number. If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability jackpot judgment value is determined. Is compared with the second special random number to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in a later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) and is the same disturbance as the jackpot determination value compared with the second special random number. The jackpot determination value (3937-3946) with a low probability is set to a jackpot determination value that is set in a jackpot determination table at a low probability (see FIG. 272 (A)) described later and is compared with the second special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a big hit, and "big hit 1-12" as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, not a big hit It can be classified into either “out of” or “reach 1 to 4”.

  In the present embodiment, the effect pre-determination process that is executed based on the game ball received at the first start port 2002 is not executed in the time-saving state (time-shortening) in which the time-saving control is executed. Yes. On the other hand, the effect pre-determination process executed based on the game ball received at the second starting port 2004 is not executed in the non-time-short state (non-time-short time) in which the time-shortening control is not executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the non-time-short state is controlled, only the effect pre-determination process based on the game ball being received at the first start port 2002 is executed, and the time-short state is controlled. In this case, only the effect predetermination process based on the game ball being received at the second start port 2004 is executed.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the first special random number is compared with the prior determination table and the big hit is specified, the determination value indicating which big hit is made. If you specify the type of jackpot by comparing the first design random number with the first symbol random number, and determine that it will be a big hit by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table, it will determine which jackpot The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that it is a big hit of specific 1 (2R probability variation big hit) by matching with the first special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later and The decision value (0-16) indicating that it is a big hit of a specific one among the decision values compared with one symbol random number is the same random number value as the decision value (0-16). ) Or non-specific 2 (8R normal big hit) is a decision value that is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later and is compared with the first symbol random number. It is the same random number as the judgment value (17-154, 160-199) indicating that it is a special 6 or non-specific 2 big hit, and a special 7 (10R probability variable big hit) big hit by matching with the first special random number The determination value indicating that The same random number value as the determination value (155-159) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 7 out of the determination values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) and compared with the first symbol random number Has been.

  Similarly, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the second special random number is compared with the prior determination table and the big hit is specified, the determination indicating which big hit is made. If you specify the type of jackpot by comparing the value and the second symbol random number, and if you specify that it will be a jackpot by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table, indicate which jackpot The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the judgment value with the second symbol random number. More specifically, a determination value indicating that it becomes a big hit of specific 1 (2R probability variation big hit) or non-specific 1 (2R normal big hit) by matching with the second special random number is a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (FIG. 272) described later). C) and the same random number as the determination value (0-19, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 1 or non-specific 1 among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number Specific 2 (4R probability variation big hit), Specific 3 (5R probability variation big hit), Specific 4 (6R exact variation big hit), Specific 5 (7R exact variation big hit), Specific 6 (8R exact variation big hit) by matching with the second special random number The determination value indicating that it will be a big hit of No. 2 will be specified 2 to 6 of the decision values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later and compared with the second symbol random number. Same as judgment value (20-55) The determination value indicating that it is a big hit of specific 8 (16R probability variation big hit) by matching with the second special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later. Among the determination values compared with the second symbol random number, the same random number value as the determination value (56-159) indicating that it is a big jackpot of specific 8 is set.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is determined that a big hit is made, a plurality of types of reach effects are obtained by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed with a variable random number. Which of the reach productions is executed to identify the big hit. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 7 and the specific 8 is a determination indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29), which is a random value that is the same as the value and indicates that the super-reaching effect (hereinafter also referred to as weak SP reach) with a low expectation degree of jackpot, is compared with the variable random number. Among the values, a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating execution of a super reach production with a low jackpot expectation level is specified, and a specific value of a super reach production with a high jackpot expectation level (hereinafter also referred to as a strong SP reach) is specified. A determination value (30 to 216) indicating execution other than the super reach production (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is a specific super reach performance among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation level, which is the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super reach effect having a high jackpot expectation level is to be executed. (217-240) is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number.

  In addition, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the special 2-6 or non-specific 2 big hit is a determination indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29), which is the same random number as the value and indicates that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is executed, is a super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (30-216) indicating that a non-specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation level is a random number value that is the same as the determination value indicating that Of the determination values to be compared, the same random number value is used as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot that is not a specific super-reach effect is executed. A determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among super-reach effects having a high degree of expectation indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  The determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 1 or the non-specific 1 is a determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value (90-189) that is set to the same random number value and indicates that a super reach effect with a low degree of jackpot expectation is to be executed. The determination value (190-216) indicating that a non-specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation level is compared with the random number. Among the determination values, the random number value is the same as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot that is not a specific super-reach effect is executed, A determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high degree of expectation is determined by executing a specific super reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. It is set to the same random value as the determination value shown.

  For this reason, in step S61, the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number is compared with the prior determination table, and the variable random number is compared with the prior determination table. As information, “big hit 1” which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from normal reach, “big hit 2” which is big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from weak SP reach, from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "Big jackpot 3", which is a special 7 or 8 big jackpot, "7 big jackpot" which is a special 7 or 8 big jackpot from a specific strong SP reach, 2-6 or non-specific 2 bigjacks from a normal reach Included “big hit 5”, specific 2-6 from weak SP reach or non-specific 2 big hit included “big hit 6”, specific 2 from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach 6 or non-specific 2 jackpots are included, "Big jackpot 7", specific 2-6 from specific strong SP reach or non-specific 2 jackpots are included, "big hit 8", specified 1 or non-specific 1 from normal reach "Big jackpot 9" to be a big hit, "big hit 10" to be a big hit of specific 1 or non-specific 1 from a weak SP reach, a specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach It can be classified into either “big hit 11”, “special 1” from a specific strong SP reach or “special hit 12” as non-specific 1 big hit.

  Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is determined that a loss occurs, a reach is displayed when a high-probability flag indicating that control of a high-probability state is being executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change to indicate whether or not reach is displayed, it is determined whether or not the reach is displayed, and the control of the short time state (low probability short time state) is executed without the high probability flag set If only the time reduction flag indicating that the reach is set is set, whether or not the reach is displayed is determined by comparing the reach determination value at the time reduction indicating the display of the reach and the reach random number. When the probability flag and the time reduction flag are not set and the normal state control is being executed, the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed is compared with the reach random number. Ri to determine whether or not to display the reach. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to the reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 272 (B)), which will be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to a reach determination table (see FIG. 272 (B)), which will be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is set to a random determination value that is set in a normal reach determination table (see FIG. 272B) described later and is compared with the reach random number. . For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately determined whether or not the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the big hit is not achieved. The determination information can be classified into either “out of” which does not display reach (executes reach effect) or “reach 1 to 4” which displays reach (execute reach effect).

  Note that the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, it is classified whether the reach is displayed (reach effect is executed) in any of the game states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is determined whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in any game state at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Can be identified.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed and a variable random number are displayed. The mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified by comparing. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (164-222) indicating the execution of the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating execution of the reach, and a reach variation pattern table (not shown) described later ) Is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level is specified. A determination value (223-235) indicating that a non-super reach effect is executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. ) Is set to the same random number as the determination value indicating that a super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation level other than a specific super-reach effect is performed, and the jackpot expectation degree A determination value (236-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high value is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and compared with a variable random number. Among the values, the same random number as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed. For this reason, by comparing the variable random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and “reach 1” for executing the normal reach effect as the advance determination information, the jackpot expectation degree “Reach 2” for low super-reach production, “Reach 3” for high-reach super-reach production (other than specific super-reach production), High-reach super-reach production (specific super reach production) ) Can be classified into any one of “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number and the advance determination table in step S61, the advance determination information can be classified into any one of “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

  As described above, the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268A and the acquired random numbers (special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), reach random numbers As a result of the comparison with the random random number), whether or not the big hit or the small hit, whether the big hit, the type of the big hit, if not the big hit or small hit, the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 As shown in FIG. 268 (B), the pre-determined information is “out”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”. ", Reach 1" to "reach 4".

  Then, in the production prior determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified prior determination information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, if it is not a big hit or a big hit or a small hit) A reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or a mode type of the game effect to be executed), and a type of the special random number acquired (either the first special random number or the second special random number) And a pre-determination command corresponding to the number of holdings (the value of the holding number counter) stored in correspondence with the acquired special random number. For example, in the production pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the number of first special symbols held The first special symbol predetermination command corresponding to (the value of the first special reservation number counter) is set (step S62). Then, by sending a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the start opening (first start opening 2002, second start start) where the start winning is generated. Either one of the mouths 2004), in addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the starting opening, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning a prize is a big hit or a small hit, In the case of being a big hit type, in the case of not being a big hit or a small hit, advance determination information such as a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or an aspect type of a game effect to be executed, The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU stores a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol and a second determination information related to the variable display of the second special symbol. And a reserved storage area. Each of the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of holds, and the peripheral control MPU receives the prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command as the first. The data is stored in order from the (first) storage area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And a variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) (the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation display start of the first special symbol, the second special symbol of the second special symbol) When the second variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display is received, the first storage area (the first storage in the first reserved storage area if the first variation pattern command is received) according to the received variation pattern command. If the area, the second variation pattern command has been received, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the second reserved storage area) is discarded and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area ( If a variable pattern command has been received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the first reserved memory area, and if a second variable pattern command has been received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the second reserved memory area). The prior determination information is moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (the prior determination information stored in the reserved storage area is shifted). In addition, whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or to start the variable display of the second special symbol can be specified by the variation pattern command (whether it is the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command) ), And if it is specified to start the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the prior determination information stored in the first reserved storage area is shifted. Then, when it is specified that the variation display of the second special symbol is started based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, the prior determination information stored in the second reserved storage area is shifted. Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information. Become so.

  In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot determination value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table is different from the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group A high probability random number determining means having a ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be discriminated as to the outlier determination value set higher than a ratio of the jackpot determination table in which the winning probability of the jackpot is determined, and random number acquisition Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random number (first special random number, second special random number) is classified into either the above-mentioned loss determination value or the above jackpot determination value, and this is not executed. A value that belongs to the high probability random number group in which the winning random numbers used for the determination are mixed with the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value while maintaining the state of It is provided with pseudo-probability advance determination means that makes it possible to execute an advance determination on the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning for each determination process that is put on hold by determining whether or not there is The above-described pseudo-probability advance determination means may determine in advance the degree of expectation related to the big win.

  In this way, by including a high probability random number determining means in which the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value are mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment that is still on hold can be leaked While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates the above, regarding the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the winning of the jackpot according to the mixture ratio of the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value in the means with high probability random number determination The preceding determination can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the decision process based on the random number value (a value belonging to the low-probability random number group that is paired with the high-probability random number group) that is not the pre-determined special hit determination value is expected, It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected value of the jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). In addition, the expected degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display corresponding to the hold-up. Will come to be.

  FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which, for example, a determination process of a mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped )
3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display so that the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped is displayed. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 263).

  FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 270, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol variable display start is in a suspended state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. As a result, if it is determined that the variable display start of the first special symbol is on hold, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the first special symbol display mode is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first control symbol stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in the first storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display start of the first special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display start is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 272 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 272 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 272 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the game state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table for a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability non-short-time state, a high-probability short-time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the pre-determination table, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the thirteen types of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the winning is won, and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 3924 types of first special random numbers are out of place. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 3937 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at the high probability, 90 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability are the same as the prior determination table. Match the big hit determination value, match the small hit determination value indicating that 19 types of first special random numbers have been won for the small hit, and 3838 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is a low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) ) And time-short state (low probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 90 types of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability are the same as the above-described prior determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 3857 types of second special random numbers are out of place.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set and the process is ended (step S118). As a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, When it is determined that that compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 272 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 272 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is a probability change (high probability state (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state)). Time reach determination table, time reach reach determination table used when the game state is short time (low probability short time state), and when the game state is normal (normal state: low probability non-short time state) And a normal reach determination table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached and 238 types of reach random numbers are not reached, as in the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

  Further, in the reach determination table at the time reduction, similarly to the above-described determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach and the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) than in the probability change (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, as with the above-described pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the probability determination time and short-time reach determination tables are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the reach determination values coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the time of probability change (high probability state) and in the short time (low probability short time state).

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119) and determines that the reach is shifted (step S120a), the fluctuation A reach flag indicating that becomes a reach is set, and the process ends (step S120b).

  FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 273, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272 (C). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 272 (C), in the symbol determination table, similar to the above-described pre-determination table, each determination result (specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, specific 2 4R likelihood variation big hit, specific 3 5R probability variation big hit, specific Design random number (first design) for 6R probability big hit of 4, 5R probability big hit of specific 5, 8R probability big hit of specific 6, 10R probability big hit of specific 7, 2R normal big hit of non-specific 1 and 8R normal big hit of non-specific 2 Random numbers, second symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number, the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number, and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. The 2R big hit game is executed by opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 in a manner in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and the probability improvement control is executed from the end of the 2R big hit game until the next big hit. If the gaming state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-time short-time state, low probability short-time state), a specific 1 2R probability change is executed until the next big hit Jackpot 2. The second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, and a 4R big hit game is executed. After the 4R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 2. Specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot that performs both. The second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner that allows a game ball to enter, a 5R big hit game is executed, and after the 5R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 3. Specific 3 5R probability variation jackpot that performs both. The 2R big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, and a 6R big hit game is executed. After the 6R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 4. Specific 4 6R probability variation jackpot that performs both. The second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a way that a game ball can enter, and a 7R big hit game is executed. After the 7R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 5. Perform 5R 7R probability variation jackpot to execute both. If the result is the first special lottery, the 8R big hit game is executed by controlling the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 in a manner in which a game ball can enter, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, until the next big win If probability reduction control is executed and time-shortening control is executed at the time of winning (high-probability time-short state, low-probability time-short state), time-shorting control is performed until the next big hit, and if the result of the second special lottery Opening and closing control of the second big prize opening 2006 in such a manner that a game ball can enter is executed to execute the 8R big hit game, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short-time control are performed until the next big hit. 6. 6 specific 8R probability variation jackpots that perform both The second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, and a 10R big hit game is executed. After the 10R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 7. Perform 7R 10R probability variation jackpot to execute both The second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, and a 16R big hit game is executed. After the 16R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control and the short time control are performed until the next big hit. 8. Specific 8 16R probability variation jackpot that performs both. The 2R big hit game is executed by controlling the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 in a manner in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and the probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit game after the 2R big hit game is finished. If the short-time control is executed at the time of winning (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state), after the 2R jackpot game is over, the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) will be displayed a predetermined number of times ( (1 time, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times) Non-specific 1 2R normal big hit that executes time-saving control until it is executed The 8R big hit game is executed by controlling the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 in such a manner that a game ball can enter, and the probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit is reached after the 8R big hit game is finished. If the short-time control is executed at the time of winning (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state), the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) will be displayed 72 times after the 8R jackpot game ends. Until it is done, it is decided to be one of the big hits from the ten types of non-specific 2 8R normal big hits that execute the short-time control.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the judgment value is set to be different from the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of jackpot and the determination ratio are different. I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 272 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, the specific 6 8R probability variation big hit, the specific 7 10R probability variation big hit, non- While the decision value distribution is set for the special 2R big jackpot, the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol has the 2R probability variation big for the specific 1, the 4R probability big hit for the specific 2, the specific The judgment value is assigned to 3R 5% probability variation, 3 4R accuracy variation, 4R 7R accuracy variation, 6R 8R variation variation, 8R 16R variation variation, non-specific 1R 2R normal variation. Has been.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a big hit game for controlling the opening / closing of the first big prize opening 2005 or the big hit game for controlling the opening / closing of the second big prize opening 2006, a big hit game (game balls can be entered). In other words, a so-called right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is shot to the right of the front view rather than the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, no obstacle nail is implanted in the front surface of the game panel 1100. Then, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, if the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second big prize opening 2006, the second big prize hall The winning opening 2006 is always won. For this reason, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006, the game ball that is struck into the right hit game area 2540 is not wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1111 (2543c)), A big hit game can be digested in a short time.

  On the other hand, since a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position between the right-handed game area 2540 and the first grand prize winning opening 2005, the game ball has its obstacle. By making contact with the nail, various movements are imparted to the game ball and flow down. Therefore, in the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the first grand prize opening 2005, even if a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first big prize winning opening 2005, the first big prize winning opening 2005 is won. However, the game ball that has not won the first big prize opening 2005 is discharged to the outside from an out port 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower left and right center of the game area 5a. Thus, in this embodiment, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006, the game ball is more efficient than the first big prize opening 2005 in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005. The second big prize opening 2006 is won, and the big hit game can be digested in a short time.

  Further, in this example, in the first round of opening / closing control of the first big prize opening 2005, the condition for changing the first big prize opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state, and in the opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 2006. The conditions for changing the second grand prize winning opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round are different. As described above, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are changed to the closed state after about 30 seconds have passed since being controlled to the open state. When a predetermined number of game balls have won the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, the game is changed to a closed state. And in the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the first grand prize opening 2005, the first big prize opening 2005 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that seven game balls have won the first big prize opening 2005, In the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to open and close, the second big prize opening 2006 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that ten game balls have won the second big prize opening 2006. In this way, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005, only seven game balls can be awarded to the first big prize opening 2005, so only seven winning balls per round are obtained. On the other hand, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006, a maximum of ten game balls can be awarded to the second big prize opening 2006 to obtain ten winning balls per round. As compared with the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005, the jackpot game that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006 can expect to win more prize balls.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is determined, the 2R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined. If the symbol is determined to be a specific 7 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special symbol is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol. Decide on a jackpot symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124). If the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hitting flag is not set as the aspect of the first special symbol (step S126).

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the processing of step S127, these lottery results (indicating either the type of big hit, the small hit, the reach out of the reach, or the outage (stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the above-mentioned control method may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S128, the process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU receives a specific 10R probability change big hit from among the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are stopped. When specified, it is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination in which all of the left, middle and right decorative symbols become a specific odd symbol (for example, “7”)). The jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, right, and right decorative symbols all become a specific odd symbol (eg, “7”)) is determined when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect). Display control of the determined stop symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. As described above, when the combinations that become all the specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stop changing, the first special lottery is the 10R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 from the decorative symbols stopped. The 10R jackpot game that has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots resulting from each of the results and the second special lottery results and is easy to win a game ball at the second jackpot 2006 has been confirmed. Can be determined.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 2R probability variation big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are stopped. Is determined to be a 4R probability variable big hit symbol (a combination of odd and identical decorative symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”), and a specific 3R 5R probability variable big hit is specified among the big hits Is determined to be a 5R probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of the odd number of the same decorative symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, which is common to the 4R probability variation big hit symbol). When jackpot is specified, 6R probability variable jackpot symbol ("1", "3", "5", "7" combination of odd and identical decorative symbols. Common to 4R probability variable jackpot symbol and 5R probability variable jackpot symbol) Decided and specified 5 of the jackpot When the R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 7R probability variation jackpot symbol ("1", "3", "5", a combination of odd decorative patterns of "7". 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and 6R probability variable big hit symbol), and if the specified 8R probability variable big hit is specified based on the second special lottery result, the 8R probability variable big hit symbol ("1", "3", "5") , A combination of an odd number of the same decorative symbols of “7”, which is determined as 4R probability variation big hit symbol, 5R probability variation big hit symbol, 6R probability variation big hit symbol, and 7R probability variation big hit symbol), and the variation time specified from the variation pattern command Is displayed (at the end of the game effect), the display of the determined stop symbol is controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the odd number of the same decorative symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. From the design, it is not possible to discriminate between specific 2 4R probability variation per unit, specific 3 5R probability variation per unit, specific 4 6R probability variation per unit, specific 5 7R probability variation per unit, and specific 6 8R probability variation per unit. It is possible to determine that the winning opening 2006 is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game for controlling the opening and closing of the winning opening 2006 is completed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU specifies 6 based on the first special lottery result from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. When the 8R probability variation big hit is specified, it is determined to be the 8R probability variation big hit symbol (the combination of the same decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, “6”), and the unspecified 2 8R normal big hit Is determined as an 8R normal jackpot symbol ("2", "4", "6" even combination of the same decorative symbols; common with 8R probability variable jackpot symbol) and specified from the variation pattern command. When the variable time has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the specific symbol 6 is identified from the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. It is not possible to determine whether the 8R probability variation big hit or the non-specific 2R normal big hit is, and it is determined whether or not to control to the high probability state after the big hit game for controlling the opening / closing of the first big winning opening 2005. I can't.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 1R 2R probability variation big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are stopped. In the case of 2R probability variation big winning symbol (decoration combination (decorative combination) that is predetermined among outlier symbols, specifically “357” decoration symbol combination). Small winning symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of symbols (separate). Common with 2R probability variation big winning symbol), when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (the end of the game effect) Display control of the determined stop symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbol “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, whether the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit of the specific 1 is selected from the decorative symbol stopped symbol. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a high probability state even after the end of the 2R big hit game using the first big prize opening 2005 (2R big hit game in a mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter). Since it is difficult to determine whether or not the game effect is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of these big hit games.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, is determined to be out of the reach with the reach if the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command. If the design is determined to be a combination of decorative designs that are not the same (but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and a detachment is specified, it is a detachable design (a combination of decorative designs that is not the same. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 274, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the jackpot flag set. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach corresponding to the current game state is selected (S1). S146), when none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when a normal deviation occurs (a deviation that does not execute the reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (No) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). The variation pattern determined in this way includes the special symbol after the variation display of the contents of the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is started. Information indicating the variation time until the variation display of the first special symbol (in this case) is stopped is also included. By receiving the variation pattern command set in step S149, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 starts the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changes in special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting the display of variation of the contents of game effects and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on main liquid crystal display device 1600 The change time until the display is stopped is specified. In addition, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display (the first special symbol variation display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the decorative symbol variation display) for the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. To be done.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the variation. Each random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is compared by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number, as in the above-described prior determination table. Is set to determine. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers coincide with a determination value (0-163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with a low expectation degree of jackpot. Match with a determination value (164-222) indicating execution of, and match with a determination value (223-240) indicating that one of the 18 kinds of variable random numbers executes one of the super-reaching effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot As described above, the above random numbers are associated with each other. The super reach production has a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production, and when the super reach production is executed, the player's degree of expectation for the big hit game is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display is started, a variation counter for counting the variation number of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) after the big hit game is next processed in step S151. It is determined whether or not the counter value is “0”. As described above, in this example, when the second special lottery result is a non-specific 1 2R normal big hit, and when the short-time control is executed at the time of winning, a special symbol (first 8R normal control with time reduction until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, 72 times), and the first special lottery result is non-specific 2 In the case of a big hit, if the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, the time reduction control is executed until the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game. To do. Therefore, when the non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit is terminated in the big hit control process, the number of times (any one of 18, 36, 54, 72) is set in the fluctuation number counter. Then, when the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit is ended, “72” times is set in the variation counter. In step S151, it is determined whether or not the change display of the number set in the change counter is executed after the big hit game. If the counter value is not “0”, that is, if the change display of the number of times set in the change counter is not executed after the big hit game, the change counter is counted down (1 subtraction) (step S152). Then, it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0” (step S153). As a result, if the counter value is “0”, that is, if the change display of the number of times set in the change counter is executed after the big hit game, an end flag indicating that is set (step S154). .

  When it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the variation counter is “0”, that is, the variation of the number of times already set in the variation counter after the big hit game due to non-specific 1 and non-specific 2 When the display is executed or when it is determined that the variation counter is not “0” in the process of step S153, that is, after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2 is set to the variation counter If the change display of the given number of times has not been executed, the process proceeds to step S155 at that time. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated. In the case of executing time-shortening control from the end of the big hit game due to the big hits of the specific 1 to the specific 8 until the next big hit, the variable number counter is set to “0” in the big hit control process, By setting the time reduction flag, the time reduction control is continued until the next big hit.

  FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 277, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the variation display of the number of times set in the variation number counter after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2 when the end flag is set. Sometimes (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset (step S185). ). As a result, after the variation display of the number of times set in the variation counter after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2 is executed, the control of the low probability non-short state (normal state) is executed. .

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start (time for displaying that the big hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, the short time flag is reset. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S190), this process is terminated. The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of big hit (2R accuracy variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 5R accuracy variation big hit, 6R accuracy variation big hit, 7R accuracy variation big hit, 8R accuracy variation big hit, 10R accuracy variation big hit 16R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit). In step S187, depending on the type of big hit (2R accuracy variation per unit, 4R accuracy variation per unit, 5R accuracy variation per unit, 6R accuracy variation per unit, 7R accuracy variation per unit, 8R accuracy variation per unit, 10R accuracy variation per unit, 16R accuracy variation per unit, 2R normal unit per unit, 8R normal unit per unit) Jackpot start command (2R accurate variable big hit start command, 4R positive variable big hit start command, 5R positive variable big hit start command, 6R positive variable big hit start command, 7R positive variable big hit start command, 8R positive variable big hit start command, 10R positive variable big hit start command, 16R positive variable big hit start command Start command, 2R normal jackpot start command, 8R normal jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started (step S192), The waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S194), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of update (step S190), this process is terminated. The small hitting start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S195, the small hitting start command is set, so that the effect of the small hitting game instructed by the small hitting start command is the main liquid crystal. It is executed by the display device 1600, lamp / LED, speaker 921, and the like.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 277, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 1310 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 278 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Control processing related to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speaker 921 or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is used as the serial number for the lamp driving board. The game board side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3043 from the I / O port or for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 is for the game board decoration drive board. Door side for transmitting from the serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration device 242 or the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the door frame 3 Door side composed of drive data and door side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen for transmitting dynamic light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side or displaying on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is liquid crystal. Processing such as transmission to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 from the serial I / O port for the control unit or output of a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (e.g., a predetermined numerical range (e.g., 0 to 99) used in a lottery process related to a specific notice effect described later) A process of updating the value of a random number counter or the like that generates a determination random number is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the notice determination process executed in the command analysis process (step S601). As shown in FIG. 279, when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 (step S301), a hold corresponding to the number of holds indicated by the received pre-determination command is received. Prior determination information is stored in the storage area (step S302). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the holding storage area for storing the predetermination information indicated by the predetermination command, the first holding storage area for storing the predetermination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second And a second reserved storage area in which pre-determined information related to the special symbol variation display is stored. Further, the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area correspond to 4 to 4 corresponding to the number of holds, respectively. It has one storage area. Peripheral control MPU, if the received pre-determination command indicates pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol, the pre-determination is made in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds indicated by the pre-determination command in the first hold storage area Information is stored, and if the received prior determination command indicates the prior determination information regarding the variation display of the second special symbol, the advance determination is performed in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the prior determination command in the second reserved storage area. Stores judgment information.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU discriminates whether or not a specific notice effect to be described later is being executed (step S303) and whether or not the number of holds indicated by the received prior determination command is “4” (step S304). If the specific notice effect is not being executed and the number of holds indicated by the advance determination command is “4”, the reserved storage area (the first special symbol variable display) that stores the advance determination information indicated by the received advance determination command. The number of holds “1” to “3” in the first reserved storage area if it indicates prior determination information, and the second reserved storage area if it indicates prior determination information related to the variable display of the second special symbol. In the storage area corresponding to, reach determination information other than loss, specifically, jackpot 1 to jackpot 12 set as prior determination information in the determination table shown in FIG. Either pre-determined information-reach 4 it is determined whether or not stored (step S305).

If pre-determination information other than loss is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds “1” to “3” among the hold storage areas storing the pre-determination information indicated by the pre-determination command received in step S305 (YES in step S305), the process ends without executing the process of step S306 to step S309, that is, the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect. In this embodiment, a series of stories as a specific notice effect is made a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) a plurality of times (in this example, three times, but may be two times, or two times of variable display) It is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to a variable display of a specific notice effect that is executed separately and a specific notice effect that is executed in three divided displays. This is divided into a plurality of predetermined (3 in this example) variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed (the story that is completed in three episodes is displayed one episode at a time for one variable display of the decorative symbol. To run). In addition, in the case of a plurality of fluctuating display of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect, instead of the decorative symbol fluctuating display, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the end portion (for example, the upper left end portion) of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The stop symbol of the decorative design is displayed after displaying a part of the series of stories (one time of a series of stories executed in three times). In this case, if a variation display that becomes a big hit, a small hit, or reach is included in a plurality of variation displays that execute a specific notice effect, a big hit game or a small hit game is started in the middle of a series of stories. It is impossible to execute all the series of stories. In addition, it is not executed when a big or small hit is made, but if it is executed when a reach is reached, the player is informed that if a reach is made during the execution of a specific notice effect, the player will always lose. Even if they are realized and reach production is executed, they cannot have any expectation for jackpot. Therefore, in this example, when a start winning occurs, the number of times that a variable display that is not accompanied by reach is determined as a variable display for which a start condition for variable display has not yet been established other than the generated start winning is determined in advance ( In this example, the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect is executed only when it is stored three times.

  Of the reserved storage areas storing the advance determination information indicated by the advance determination command received in step S305, the advance determination information other than the loss is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds “1” to “3”. (NO in step S305), a notice determination table corresponding to the pre-determination information is selected (step S306), and a notice determination within a numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) determined in advance in the random number update process (step S606) described above. One notice determination random number is acquired from a random number counter that updates the random number, and the obtained notice determination random number is compared with the notice determination table selected in step S306 (step S307).

  In the present embodiment, the notice determination table to be compared with the notice determination random number is provided for each of the above-described prior determination information (disconnected, jackpot 1 to jackpot 12, reach 1 to reach 4). Within the pre-judgment information with the same type of small hits (in this example, the big hits 1-4 are the same type of big hits (specific 7, 8), and the big hits 5-8 are the same type of big hits (specific 2-6, unspecified) 2), and the jackpot 9 to 12 is the same type of jackpot (specific 1, non-specific 1, small hit)), the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance to be executed (in this example, the level of the jackpot expectation is The determination value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect increases in proportion to (specific strong SP reach ≧ strong SP reach other than specific> weak SP reach> normal reach).

  Also, in the notice determination table that is selected when the prior determination information is not a win and indicates that the reach is reached, the big hit expectation degree of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the high hit expectation degree is specified) The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect increases in proportion to (strong SP reach of other than ≧ strong SP reach other than specific> weak SP reach> normal reach). On the other hand, in the advance notice determination table that is selected when the prior decision information indicates that it is out of place, a decision value is assigned so that the specific advance notice effect is determined regardless of the obtained advance notice determination random number.

  In this way, the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed (in this example, if it is determined that the specific notice effect is executed, three times before the start of the variable display based on the hold that caused the determination) The specific notice effect is executed over the variable display, and the variable display that causes the specific notice effect to be executed for the fourth time is executed). When the specific notice effect is executed, the expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be increased. In addition, even if the prior determination information is not out of sync, the proportion of execution of the specific notice effect increases in proportion to the expectation level of the jackpot of the reach effect that is executed, so that it is executed in a variable display after the specific notice effect is executed. This makes it possible to pay attention to the type of reach effect and to increase the expectation for occurrence of a big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed.

  Further, when compared with each group of prior determination information grouped for each hit type, the degree of advantage for the player (in this example, the degree of advantage for the player is a big hit 1 that is summarized in the big hit of specific 7, 8 ~ 4> big hits collected from specific 2-6, non-specific 2 big hits 5-8> specific 1, non-specific 1 big hits, big hits collected from small hits 9-12 in order) The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is high. And since the reach 1-4 gathered by the reach that becomes outlier is less advantageous to the player than the pre-determined judgment information, the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is lower than the big hit 1-12. A judgment value is set for. As a result, a big hit that is more advantageous to the player when the specific notice effect is executed, specifically, when the specific notice effect is executed with respect to the change display of the first special symbol, the expectation for the occurrence of the 10R probability change big hit is expected. When the specific notice effect is executed with respect to the second special symbol, the expectation for occurrence of the 16R probability variation big hit can be increased.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment completes the series of stories by executing the specific notice effect over a predetermined number of times (three times in this example) of the decorative symbols. It is something to be made. However, in determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect, the specific notice effect is executed over a variable display that is less than a predetermined number of times (in this example, once or twice) as the number of notices. A decision (so-called “gase notice”) can also be made. If it is decided to execute this gasse advance notice, a series of stories will not be completed, and the specific notice effect will end, so there will be expectation for the big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed I can't. Therefore, when the specific notice effect is executed, the player plays the game while hoping that it will be executed over a predetermined number of variable displays. Note that when the specific notice effect is executed, the specific notice effect may be resumed when the next decorative symbol variation display is started again after being temporarily ended in the middle of a series of stories. As a result, it is possible to expect the specific notice effect to be resumed even when the gasse notice is executed.

  As a result of comparing the notice determination random number and the selected notice determination table, the effect control MPU executes the specific notice effect or executes the notice effect when it is determined that the specific notice effect is executed (YES in step S308). A notice flag indicating this is set, and the determined number of specific notice effects is set in the notice counter, and the process ends (step S309). The notice flag is referred to in the above-described determination of whether or not to execute the specific notice effect in step S303 and the variable effect start process described later. If the notice flag is set in step S303, the effect control MPU performs the specific notice effect. If it is determined that a notice flag is set in a fluctuating effect start process described later, process data for executing a specific notice effect is selected from the process data corresponding to the fluctuating pattern command received from the main control board 1310. Then, by controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the specific notice effect is executed. If the number of executions of the specific notice effect is decided once, “1” is set in the notice counter, and if decided twice, “2” is set in the notice counter and decided three times. If so, set “3” in the notice counter. As a result, the specific notice effect is executed over the variable display of the number of executions of the specific notice effect set in the notice counter in step S309.

  FIG. 280 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be.

1. Fluctuation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed in the command analysis process (the first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the second variation that indicates the variation pattern of the second special symbol) After performing processing for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the pattern command), the variation effect start processing for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during variation effect (step S711) )
2. The time elapsed since the start of the control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, LED, speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the process for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, LED, speaker 921, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time. Processing during changing effect (step S712) in which the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change ending process in response to elapse of the changing time corresponding to the pattern.
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a symbol stop command for instructing to stop the special symbol variation display is performed. If it is a big hit, it is changed to a value according to the big hit effect process, and if it is a small hit, the variable effect end process is changed to a value according to the small hit effect process (step S713).
4). Based on the reception of the jackpot start command for instructing the start of the jackpot game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game, and the effect process flag is set when the jackpot game is ended. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to be changed to a value corresponding to the variation effect start processing
5. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs processing for executing the display control during the small hit game based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit game, and the above-mentioned when the small hit game ends. Small hit effect process for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the change effect start process (step S715)

  The main liquid crystal display is synchronized with the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) by the above processing. The apparatus 1600 executes the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation effect start process (step S711). When the effect control process flag indicates that the change effect start process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 281, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 firstly changes the change pattern command (first change It is determined whether or not a pattern command or a second variation pattern command has been received (step S801). If a variation pattern command has been received, a decorative symbol stop symbol is determined according to the received determination result notification command (step S802).

  Specifically, if the peripheral control MPU has received the first variation pattern command, the peripheral control MPU is transmitted from the main control MPU set in step S128 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and mounted on the main control board 1310. Based on the determination result notification command, the 2R probability variation big hit symbol, the 8R probability variation big hit symbol, the 10R probability variation big hit symbol, the 8R normal big hit symbol, the 8R normal big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, the off symbol, and the second variation pattern command are received. If so, based on the determination result notification command sent from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 and set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), the above-mentioned 2R probability variation big hit symbol, 4R probability variation Big hit symbol, 5R probability variation big hit symbol, 6R probability variation big hit symbol, 7R probability variation big hit symbol, 8R probability variation big hit symbol, 16R probability variation Per symbol, 2R usually big hit symbol is determined to either the failure symbol.

  When the received fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation pattern command, second fluctuation pattern command) results in a fluctuation display, the received fluctuation pattern command is reached (in this case, the left decorative pattern and the right decoration pattern When the decorative symbol is displayed with the same symbol stopped and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are the same symbol Only the middle decorative symbol is determined as a combination of symbols (reach off symbol) different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol.

  When the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is determined, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a notice flag indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed by setting the notice determination process described above is set (step S803). If the advance flag is not set, process data corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected (step S806), and display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the selected process data (step S807).

  On the other hand, if the notice flag indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed is set in step S803, the number of times of execution this time among the multiple display (three times in this example) of executing the specific notice effect. The process data corresponding to the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected from a plurality of types of process data corresponding to (Step S804), and the value of the notice counter is decremented by 1 (Step S805) and selected. Display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the process data (step S807). The above-mentioned notice counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display times for executing the specific notice effect, and is set according to the determined execution number of the specific notice effect when it is determined to execute the specific notice effect. It is like that.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least when the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) starts a variable display that does not involve reach, in other words, at least the special lottery result ( If the start condition of the variable display that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are not accompanied by reach is satisfied, the start condition of the variable display other than the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied is still satisfied In accordance with the number of variable displays that are not displayed, that is, the number of holds, hold shortening control is executed to shorten the fluctuation time of the change display more than usual. Specifically, in this example, as a deviation fluctuation pattern that is a deviation without reach, a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time “13 seconds”, a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time “8 seconds”, and a fluctuation time “4 seconds”. The main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 holds the first special symbol when the start condition of the variable display in which the first special lottery result is out of reach without reaching is satisfied. If the number is "1" or "2", the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) determines that the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of "13 seconds", and the first special symbol hold number is "3". If there is, the shift variation pattern with a variation time of “8 seconds” is determined, and if the number of first special symbols held is “4”, the shift variation pattern with a variation time of “4 seconds” is determined. In addition, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 has the second special symbol holding number “1” or “when the start condition of the variable display in which the second special lottery result is out of reach without reach is satisfied. If it is “2”, it is determined as a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of “13 seconds” in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (not shown). If the number of second special symbols held is “3”, the fluctuation time is “8 seconds” If the second special symbol hold number is “4”, the variation pattern is determined to be the deviation variation pattern.

  In addition, as described above, a plurality of fluctuating display of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect is replaced with the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol is reduced to reduce the end portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the upper left end portion). ) Displaying a part of a series of stories (one part of a series of stories that are executed in three steps) and then displaying a decorative design stop symbol Therefore, when the period of the story to be displayed in one variation display among a plurality of variation displays of the decorative symbol that executes a series of stories as a specific notice effect is fixed, the above-described hold shortening control is executed and 1 The fluctuation time becomes shorter than the period of the story displayed in the single fluctuation display, and the entire story cannot be displayed, or the period of the story displayed in the single fluctuation display is short. Even if the hold shortening control is executed, the decoration is made after displaying the story to be displayed in one variation display by preventing the variation time from being shorter than the period of the story to be displayed in one variation display. There is a problem that a useless period occurs before the stop symbol of the symbol is displayed and the player is bored.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, each variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols that execute a series of stories as a specific notice effect is displayed with one variation display so as to correspond to the above-described hold shortening control. It has multiple types of process data with different story periods. That is, among a plurality of (three in this example) decorative symbol variation displays that execute a series of stories as a specific announcement effect, the variation time is “8 seconds” as a story that is displayed in the first variation display. The process data corresponding to "4 seconds" and the process data corresponding to "4 seconds", the number of notices corresponding to the process data corresponding to the variation time "13 seconds" and "8 seconds" as the story displayed in the second variation display Process data corresponding to “4 seconds”, the process data corresponding to “8 seconds” and the process data corresponding to the variation time “13 seconds” as a story to be displayed in the third variable display. Data and process data corresponding to “4 seconds”. In step S804, process data corresponding to the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected from the process data corresponding to the number of advance notices. In the above-described example, when the first variation display of a plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect is started, the number of suspension is always three or more, and “4 seconds” Alternatively, although only the process data corresponding to the variation time of “8 seconds” is shown, “4 seconds” and “8 seconds” are displayed as the first variation display among the plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect. Not only the process data corresponding to one variation time, but also process data corresponding to a variation time of “13 seconds” may be provided. That is, when the specific notice effect can be executed even when the number of holds is 3 or less in step S304 of the notice determination process, the first change display among the plurality of change displays of the specific notice effect. In this case, the number of holdings is two or less, and the above-described holding shortening control is not executed, and the fluctuation time of “13 seconds” is determined. It is possible to select the process data corresponding to, and execute the first variation display among the plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect, or the variation display start condition other than the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied. When the variation shortening control is executed only when the number of variation displays that are not established is “4”, when the first variation display of a plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect is started No more than 3 holds on the above In some cases, the process time corresponding to the fluctuation time of “13 seconds” is selected and a specific notice effect is generated multiple times. Of these fluctuation displays, the first fluctuation display may be executed.

  In addition, multiple types of process data corresponding to the same number of notices are configured to display the same story, but the content of the presentation (video and explanation) can be simplified depending on the duration of the fluctuation time, The variation time and the production period are matched with each other in detail. In addition, not only when process data corresponding to the same variation time is selected by the number of consecutive notices, but also when process data corresponding to different variation times is selected, each story is smoothly connected to the game. Each process data is configured so as not to give the person a sense of incongruity. Thereby, a series of stories can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU discards the advance determination information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage area that stores the advance determination information in step S302 of the advance notice determination process in response to the received variation pattern command. The pre-determined information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area and stored in the reserved storage area. Prior determination information is shifted (step S808). That is, if the first variation pattern command is received, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area is discarded and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is discarded. If the stored prior determination information is moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area and the second variation pattern command is received, the first storage area in the second reserved storage area The prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is discarded and the prior determination information stored in the N-1 (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved. Let

  Then, the peripheral control MPU ends this process when the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the changing effect processing (step S712) (step S813).

  FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-described variation effect end process (step S713). When the effect control process flag indicates that the change effect end process is performed, as shown in FIG. 282, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 performs the change effect start process (step S711). The stop symbol determined in step S802 is fixedly displayed (a state where all the left, middle and right decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed) (step S851).

  Next, if the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 has received a jackpot start command notifying that the jackpot game is started from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S852). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the big hit effect process (step S714) (step S853), this process ends.

  Also, if a small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 to notify the start of the small hit game (step S854), the process shifts to the small hit effect process (step S715). As described above, when the above-described effect control process flag is updated (step S855), this process ends.

  Further, when neither the big hit start command nor the small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (NO in step S854), if the above-mentioned notice flag is set (step S856) Whether or not the notice counter is “0”, that is, whether or not all the variable displays (three times in this example) that execute the specific notice effect have been executed (the remaining number of times of the specific notice effect is “0”). (Step S857), and resetting the notice flag if all of the variable display of a plurality of times (three times in this example) for executing the specific notice effect is executed (step S858), When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variable effect start process (step S711) (step S859), this process ends.

[Specific notice effect summary]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device is adapted to display a series of stories as a specific notice effect in accordance with a plurality of (three in this example) variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The decoration pattern is executed in multiple steps (in this example, three times) displayed in 1600. However, the period for executing a series of stories as a specific notice effect is not constant, and may be changed (shortened) by the above-described hold shortening control. In the present embodiment, even when the period for executing a series of stories as a specific notice effect is changed (shortened) by the hold shortening control, these series of stories can be completed within the changed period. It is like that. That is, the same story can be displayed in a plurality of variable times (4 seconds, 8 seconds, 13 seconds) so as to correspond to the above-described hold shortening control at the same number of notices in a series of stories executed as a specific notice effect. The process data is configured, and the variation time and the production time are matched by simplifying the contents of the production according to the period of the fluctuation time or making it more detailed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, in the case where the number of notices is the third (in this example, the last change display of the specific notice effect), the number of holdings whose change time is 4 seconds is one or two. When the explanation that “geniuses attack such A” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as characters, when the number of holdings whose variation time is 13 seconds is four, “the talent will be blossomed” The explanation that “who is attacked by A” will be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as characters, and the longer variation time will give a more detailed explanation. Moreover, in addition to the description by such a character, when the number of holdings whose variation time is 13 seconds is four compared with the case where the number of holdings whose variation time is 4 seconds is 1 or 2, more Video is displayed. In this way, the longer the variation time, the more detailed the contents of the production, so that the player can obtain a lot of information. Also, the longer the variation time, the more detailed the content of the production has been explained, but depending on the production that is added with this fluctuation time becoming longer, suggestion of the degree of expectation for the hold that caused the execution of the specific notice effect May be performed. For example, by preparing a plurality (for example, white, blue, red) of the character color “flowering talent” in FIG. 283, the specific notice effect itself can be viewed with expectation.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment executes the variable display of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol. Therefore, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first starting port 2002, the change display of the second special symbol starts when the starting winning at the second starting port 2004 occurs. The period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time cannot be matched among the plurality of variation displays of decorative symbols executed as the specific notice effect, or as the specific notice effect. There is a possibility that the variation display that causes the specific notice effect to be performed as the variation display immediately after displaying a series of stories over a plurality of variation displays may not be performed. Therefore, in this example, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start port 2002, it is before executing the variable display according to the number of executions of the specific notice effect. In addition, when a start winning at the second start port 2004 occurs, the specific notice effect is ended. Specifically, although not shown, when the notice flag is set in step S803 of the above-described variation effect start process, the notice flag is set due to the start winning at the first start port 2002. The variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 when it is set due to the start winning to the first start port 2002 is related to the second special symbol ( If the second variation pattern command), the advance notice flag is reset and the process proceeds to step S806, where the specific notice effect is ended before the change display corresponding to the number of executions determined is executed. On the other hand, when the specific notice effect based on the occurrence of the start prize at the second start opening 2004 is executed in step S803, the specific notice based on the occurrence of the start prize at the first start opening 2002 in step S803. Even when the effect is being executed, if the variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 is related to the first special symbol (first variation pattern command), the specific notice effect is continued. Thus, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In this way, the player feels uncomfortable by ensuring that the period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time are consistent with each other among the plurality of variation displays of the decorative symbol executed as the specific notice effect. In addition to suppressing this, it is possible to execute the variable display that causes the specific notice effect to be executed as a variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories as a specific notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. Yes. In the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second start opening 2004, the specific advance notice effect is performed only in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start opening 2002 without executing the specific advance notice effect. May be executed. That is, if the advance determination command received in step S301 of the advance notice determination process is based on the occurrence of a start winning at the second start opening 2004, the process from step S302 to step S309, that is, the specific advance notice effect is executed. The specific notice effect may not be executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second start port 2004 by ending the process without executing the lottery process.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the specific notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start port 2002, it is before the variable display corresponding to the number of executions of the specific notice effect is executed. However, when the start winning at the second starting port 2004 occurs, the specific notice effect is ended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the starting winning at the second starting port 2004, for example. The specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted when the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the specific notice effect is resumed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variation display based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is ended. Also good. Further, in this case, the fact that the specific notice effect is interrupted ("notice of notice effect" is interrupted) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the start winning prize at the second start port 2004. You may make it do. In addition, even when the specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted when starting the display of the decorative symbols based on the start winning at the second starting port 2004, the second special based on the starting winning at the second starting port 2004 is performed. If the lottery result is a big hit, the specific notice effect may be ended without resuming.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, a story that is completed in three episodes is executed as one specific announcement effect so that one story is displayed for each variation display of decorative symbols executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Since all three episodes of the specific notice effect are executed, it is possible to expect a variation display to be executed next, so that the player pays attention to what story is being executed. . For this reason, in this example, when a specific notice effect is being executed, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 displays the number of stories being executed (for example, “Third Story”). .

  In the above-described embodiment, a series of stories is executed as a specific notice effect divided into a plurality of variation displays of decorative symbols executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to a plurality of variations of special symbols. However, a series of stories can also be used as a specific notice effect even in the decorative display multiple times (so-called quasi-continuous fluctuation) displayed in the decorative pattern executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the single fluctuation display of the special symbol. You may make it possible to divide and execute the decorative design in multiple times.

  Further, in this example, the specific notice effect can be executed only when the number of holds is “4” which is the maximum value of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in step S304 of the notice determination process described above. However, even if the number of holds is not the maximum value, the specific notice effect may be executed, and in this case, the number of executions of the specific notice effect is determined to be a number not exceeding the hold number. May be. For example, when a start winning to the first starting port 2002 occurs in the state where the number of reserved first special symbols is “2”, the change display based on the starting winning that occurred this time is excluded as the number of executions of the specific notice effect “2”. The number of times may not be exceeded. In addition, the probability that it is determined that the specific notice effect is to be executed according to the number of holds may be changed. For example, if the hold number is the maximum value, the specific notice effect is executed more than when the hold number is not the maximum value. Then, the probability of determination may be increased.

  Further, as described above, a series of stories as the specific notice effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuation displays that are not accompanied by reach. The fluctuation display without the reach is usually the most frequently executed fluctuation pattern, and the player can hardly expect the big hit. In this example, by executing the specific notice effect over the variable display without reach, even if the variable display that the player can hardly expect from the big hit is executed, the expectation for the big hit is achieved. Can be increased.

  On the other hand, when a specific notice effect is executed, the fluctuation display in which a series of stories is being executed is always out of place, and in the fluctuation display immediately after the completion of this series of stories (the fluctuation display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect) The possibility of a big hit increases. In other words, the player can guess that the result of the variable display will be out of the three variable displays that execute a series of stories as a specific notice effect, and the variable display (specific On the other hand, the occurrence of a big hit can be expected for the fluctuation display executed immediately after the end of the notice effect, while the excessive expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be suppressed in the three fluctuation displays for executing a series of stories.

  Further, in the variable display immediately after the series of stories as the specific notice effect is executed (the variable display that causes the specific notice effect to be executed), the effects related to the series of stories executed as the specific notice effect are executed. You may do it. Due to this, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the specific notice effect to be executed in conjunction with the multiple display that executes the specific notice effect, and cause the specific notice effect to be executed from the start of execution of a series of stories. It is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the big hit by executing the related effects over a long period of time until the change display becomes.

  The story to be executed in one variation display among a plurality of variation displays of decorative symbols for executing a series of stories as the specific notice effect is changed depending on the number of holds when the variation display is started. Therefore, it is possible to give a new gameability such as adjusting the driving of a game ball aiming at a change in the number of holds in order to see all different stories for each number of holds. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to win a big win based on the occurrence of a start winning at the first starting port 2002 or a starting winning at the second starting port 2004. Yes, the greater the number of start winnings at the first starting port 2002 and the starting winnings at the second starting port 2004, the more advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such a game is executed, when the specific notice effect is executed, a more detailed story is displayed as the specific notice effect for the player whose degree of advantage is reduced by stopping the game ball driving. In order to give the privilege to do, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's feeling due to the decrease in the degree of advantage and gradually increase the expectation for the big hit.

(Seventh embodiment)
[Monochrome notice effect]
A modification of the above-described sixth embodiment will be described below as a seventh embodiment. First, in the seventh embodiment, until the reserved number based on the prior determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is consumed, the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the suspension is performed. Each time it is executed, a monochrome notice effect is executed to determine whether or not the notice effect that appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes from color to monochrome (black and white). If the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome notice effect, the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the final hold is executed. Sometimes, an effect of entering a monochrome mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. This monochrome notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 288. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing a monochrome notice execution process executed by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 285 is an area occupancy pattern determination table used to determine an area occupancy pattern in the execution of the monochrome notice effect. FIG. 286 is an example showing an area in which the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device in the execution of the monochrome notice effect. 287 and 288 are examples of effects when a monochrome notice effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 284, in the monochrome notice effect execution process executed in the effect control process (step S602), first, the number of holds based on the prior determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is consumed. In the meantime, it is determined whether or not to execute the monochrome notice effect over a plurality of decorative symbol change displays (special symbol change display), and if it is determined to execute the monochrome notice effect, the result of the monochrome notice effect is determined. Control for determining whether or not to enter the monochrome mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the winning of a game ball (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Step S1300). If it is determined in step S1300 that a pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether a monochrome notice execution flag to be described later is set (step S1301). If it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome notice execution flag has been set (YES), all of the fluctuation patterns already held, except for holding based on a new winning, are “normal”. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is “variation” (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1300 that the hold number command has not been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (NO), or if it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome notice execution flag is not set (NO), The process moves to step S1308.

  Note that, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (start condition is established), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, so that it is based on the win. Pre-determined information on hold (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit or a small hit, a reach effect as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600) When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-judgment command, it is possible to specify the suspension based on the winning, The predetermination information specified from the predetermination command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when it is determined that the classification information is classified as “out of” as the prior determination information, the variation pattern that is executed on hold does not form a reach as a variation display of the decorative symbol (executes reach production) Without determining), it is determined that the pattern of the loss pattern is a “normal variation” variation pattern that is set, and “pre-judgment 1” to “bonus 12”, “reach 1” to “reach” If it is determined that the data is classified as one of “reach 4”, the variation pattern executed in the hold performs reach production after forming the reach as the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot symbol ( It is a variation pattern of “reach fluctuation” that is set to stop display of “hits 1” to “hits 12”) or lost symbols (“reach 1” to “reach 4”). It can be. In step S1302, by specifying the type of the variation pattern based on the pre-determined information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, all of the variation patterns that are already held are “normal variation”. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is

  Also, if it is determined in step S1302 that all of the variation patterns already reserved, except for the suspension based on a new winning, are “normal variation” variation patterns (YES), a prior determination is made. A monochrome notice determination table (not shown) used for determining whether or not to execute a monochrome notice effect before the number of holds based on the command is consumed is selected (step S1303). Then, the selected monochrome notice determination table is compared with the monochrome notice determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not to execute the monochrome notice effect (step S1304). Specifically, when the monochrome notice determination random number matches the determination value set in the monochrome notice determination table, it is determined that the monochrome notice effect is to be executed (YES in step S1304). Then, it is determined that the monochrome notice effect is not executed (NO in step S1304). In the monochrome notice determination table, the monochrome notice effect is changed depending on whether the fluctuation pattern for the hold based on the new winning is a fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” or a fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. In the case of the “reach fluctuation” fluctuation pattern, the probability that it is determined that the monochrome notice effect is executed is higher than in the case of the “normal fluctuation” fluctuation pattern. Is set to However, in the monochrome notice determination table, whether or not to execute the monochrome notice effect depending on whether the lottery result for the hold based on the new winning is a big win (or a small win) or a loss. In the case of a big hit (or small hit), the probability of determining that the monochrome notice effect is to be executed may be set higher than in the case of a loss.

  If it is determined in step S1304 that a monochrome notice effect is to be executed (YES), one of the plurality of types of area occupation patterns is selected as a table corresponding to the number of reservations specified from the prior determination command. The area occupation pattern determination table (FIG. 285) used for determination is selected (step S1305). In this area occupation pattern, every time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is executed during execution of the monochrome announcement effect, the announcement effect appears in any region of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. And whether or not the notice effect that has appeared is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). Then, the area occupation pattern determination table selected in accordance with the number-of-holds command is compared with the area occupation pattern determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 to determine the type of the area occupation pattern (step S1306). If it is determined that the monochrome notice effect is to be executed, a monochrome notice execution flag indicating that the monochrome notice effect is being executed is set and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1307).

  On the other hand, any of the fluctuation patterns already reserved is not a “normal fluctuation” fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” is included) except for the hold based on a new winning in step S1302. (NO), or if it is determined in step S1304 that the monochrome notice effect is not executed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1308 without executing the monochrome notice effect. As described above, only when it is determined in step S1302 that all of the variation patterns already reserved are the variation patterns of “normal variation” except for the suspension based on the new winning, the monochrome notice effect , It is not possible to increase the expectation that will be a big hit in the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern of “normal variation”, but it is not possible to raise the expectation that is a big hit, but such “normal variation” When the monochrome notice effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern of “”, there is a possibility of entering into the monochrome mode, which will be described later, and the expectation of entering into the monochrome mode can be increased, and the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” is repeated. It is possible to eliminate the boringness caused by being

  The area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and any one of the plurality of types of area occupancy patterns as a table corresponding to the number of suspensions specified from the prior determination command. It is a table used in order to determine an occupation pattern. Specifically, as an area occupancy pattern determination table used when a hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is 1, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 285 (B), an area occupation pattern determination table to be used when a table with 4 set is provided and a hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is 2, FIG. 285 (C) shows an area occupation pattern determination table to be used when a table in which the area occupation patterns 1 to 18 are set is provided and a reservation is added based on a new winning when the number of reservations is 3. As shown in FIG. 4, a table in which area occupation patterns 1 to 39 are set is provided.

  The area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 every time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is performed during the monochrome notice effect. It is set in which area of the area the notice effect appears and whether or not the notice effect that appears is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), a notice effect is displayed in each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while one of the already held holds is consumed. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), an advance notice is given to each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while the two reservations already reserved are digested. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), while the effects are set to appear in stages, while the three reservations already reserved are consumed, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. The notice effect is set to appear in each area in stages.

  In addition, when determining the area occupation pattern, about the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect (the hold that has decided to execute the monochrome notice effect when a hold is added based on a new winning) The area occupancy pattern that can be determined from the area occupancy pattern determination table varies depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” or a fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. It has become. Specifically, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 and 2 is determined, and the fluctuation of “reach fluctuation” is determined. If it is a pattern, one of the area occupation patterns 3 and 4 is determined. In the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is “normal fluctuation”, any one of the area occupation patterns 1 to 10 is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. In this case, any one of the area occupation patterns 11 to 18 is determined. In the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), when the fluctuation pattern is “normal fluctuation”, any one of the area occupation patterns 1 to 22 is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. In this case, any one of the area occupation patterns 23 to 39 is determined.

  As described above, when the change pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is a change pattern of “normal change”, the hold that caused the execution of the monochrome notice effect is exhausted. In addition, while a notice effect appears in each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a specific effect (in this example, a point with respect to the notice effect) is applied to a part or all of the appearing notice effect. By preventing the effect of the stick from being stabbed) from being executed and changing a part or all of the notice effect that has appeared from color to monochrome (black and white), part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome. It is made not to be occupied by the notice production. In other words, by executing the black-and-white notice effect, the expectation of entering the monochrome mode is expected, but the monochrome mode is not actually entered.

  In addition, if the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is the change pattern of “reach fluctuation”, the main change is made before the hold that caused the execution of the monochrome notice effect is digested. A notice effect appears in each of the display areas of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick pierces the notice effect) is executed for all the notice effects that have appeared. As a result, all the notice effects that appear are changed from color to monochrome (black and white), so that the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome notice effect. I try to enter the mode. In other words, by executing the monochrome notice effect, when entering the monochrome mode, the reach is always formed as a variable display of the decorative design, and the reach effect is executed, so that the expectation of a big hit can be increased. It has become. In addition, when the specific effect is executed for all of the notice effects that appear in the respective display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is always a monochrome notice effect. In addition, since it always enters the monochrome mode, it can be noted whether or not the specific effect is executed when the notice effect appears. On the other hand, when the gaze of the monochrome notice effect is executed, the black and white mode is not entered, and the reach is not formed as a variation display of the decorative symbols that are not in the black and white mode (the reach effect is not executed). The expectation of a big hit cannot be raised. In other words, when entering the black and white mode, it is a state that suggests that the expectation to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and when not entering the black and white mode, the expectation to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is low. It can be said that this is a state that suggests. In the monochrome notice effect, the notice effect appears in stages in the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By changing the notice effect that appears from color to monochrome (black and white), The monochrome notice effect gradually occupies the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and as the area occupied by the monochrome notice effect increases, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 becomes larger. Since it approaches the state occupied by the monochrome notice effect, the expectation to enter the monochrome mode can be increased. Further, when the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect that appears is displayed in color from the color as the notice effect appears in a wider area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By changing to monochrome (black and white), it becomes possible to occupy the monochrome notice effect over the wide area, and when the monochrome notice effect occupies the wide area, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Since the entire display area approaches the state occupied by the monochrome notice effect, the expectation to enter the monochrome mode can be increased.

  In addition, the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table includes the main liquid crystal display when a part of the hold that has already been held is used, except for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect. There is an area occupation pattern that is set so that the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the device 1600. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the area occupancy patterns 1, 2, 11, 12 are shown. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. , 23 to 30, even when the execution of the monochrome notice effect is decided, the notice effect may appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the already reserved first hold is consumed. Rather, the notice effect is set to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the next and subsequent holds that have already been put on hold. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the area occupancy patterns 3 and 4 and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. Before the last held hold is consumed, a notice effect appears in each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the last held hold is consumed. The notice effect is set so as not to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a result, it becomes difficult to know when the monochrome notice effect will start and when it will be ended for the hold that has already been put on hold, so it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the monochrome notice effect will always be executed. It can be done.

  By the way, in the area occupation pattern, the area in which the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 286, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is divided into four equal parts, the upper area of the display area is area A, the left area of the display area is area B, the lower area of the display area is area C, and the display area Is set to region D. In the present embodiment, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is equally divided. However, the display area may not be equally divided, and a part or all of the area where the notice effect appears is set to overlap. It may be.

  In addition, the area occupation pattern set in the area occupation pattern determination table includes the next and subsequent suspensions that have already been suspended after a notice effect appears in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this case, a new notice effect is set to appear in an area different from the part of the area where the notice effect has already appeared. Then, until the notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new notice effect is set to appear in a stepwise manner in an area not occupied by the notice effect. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), after the notice effect appears in the area C in the area occupancy pattern 31, the second hold already reserved is digested. A notice effect appears in a region D different from C, and when a third hold that has already been reserved is consumed, a notice effect appears in regions A and B different from regions C and D. I am doing so. As described above, since a new notice effect appears in an area different from the area occupied by the notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, it is easy to recognize the new notice effect. Even if various types of notice effects appear at the same time, it is difficult for the player to overlook any of the notice effects. In addition, until the notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new notice effect can appear in a stepwise manner in an area where the notice effect does not occupy. As long as there is an area that is not occupied by the notice effect, whether or not a new notice effect appears (specific effect for the appearing notice effect (in this example, a stick sticks into the notice effect) Whether the area in which the notice effect appears is occupied by the monochrome notice effect by changing the notice effect that has appeared from color to monochrome (black and white). You can get noticed.

  In the area occupation pattern set in the area occupation pattern determination table, after the notice effect appears in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the next and subsequent reservations already reserved are used. In this case, the notice effect may be set to appear so that a part of the area where the notice effect has already appeared is included. For example, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), after the notice effect appears in any of the areas B, C, and D in the area occupation patterns 37 to 39, the third already held When the hold is digested, the notice effect appears on the entire screen of the display area so that the areas B, C, and D are included.

  Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table, the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the specific effect (this example) is applied to the entire screen (background image) where the notice effect does not appear. In this case, an area occupation pattern (for example, area occupation pattern 3 in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285A) in which an effect that a stick sticks into the entire screen (background image) is executed is set. . In such an area occupation pattern, the notice effect does not appear for the areas A, B, C, and D, and the background image is displayed on the entire display area. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dotted bar is inserted into the background image), the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by the monochrome background image. ing. When the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image, the monochrome mode is entered as in the case where it is occupied by the monochrome notice effect. For this reason, when the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, it is impossible to increase the expectation of a big hit, but there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed once again. , Can increase the expectation to enter black and white mode. When a notice effect appears in the display area of main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a specific effect is executed for the notice effect that has appeared (for example, the area in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A)). The notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 rather than the occupation pattern 4), and the specific effect is executed on the entire screen (background image) where the notice effect does not appear. As a trigger, when the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image (for example, the area occupation pattern 3 in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285A), the process is executed. Although the probability is low, the probability of a big hit after entering the black and white mode is high. That is, in the case of a big hit, the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 than in the case of a loss, and the entire screen (background image) where the notice effect does not appear is displayed. Thus, the probability of determining the area occupation pattern in which the specific effect is executed is high. For this reason, even if the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the specific effect is executed in a reversed manner (when entering the black and white mode), there is a probability that it will be a big hit. It is possible to maintain expectations that are high and hit big.

  In the area occupation pattern determination table, an area occupation pattern in which a notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the area occupation pattern shown in FIG. 285 (A)). The area occupation pattern 4) in the pattern determination table is included. In the area occupation pattern in which the notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one or more notice effects appear for the areas A, B, C, and D. And by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick pierces the notice effect) for all of the notice effects that have appeared, even though it is a variable display of the decorative pattern of one time, The entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by a monochrome notice effect. When one notice effect appears for the areas A, B, C, and D (full screen) of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the areas A, B, and C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are displayed. , D (full screen) is more likely to be a big hit after entering the black and white mode than when a plurality of notice effects appear, and further increase the expectation that will be a big hit when entering the black and white mode Can be done.

  Next, in the monochrome notice effect execution processing, step S1306 is performed each time the start condition for the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is satisfied until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome announcement effect is exhausted. The type of the notice effect that appears in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 determined as the area occupation pattern of the monochrome notice effect is determined, and the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is all monochrome. When it is occupied by the notice effect, control is performed to enter the monochrome mode as a result of the monochrome notice effect. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a change start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the establishment of the start condition for the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) (step S1308). If it is determined in step S1308 that a change start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether a monochrome notice execution flag is set (step S1309). If the change start command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 in step S1308 (NO), or if the monochrome notice execution flag is not set in step S1309 (NO), the monochrome notice execution process is terminated.

  If the monochrome notice execution flag is set in step S1309 (YES), the main control board 1310 changes based on the start condition regarding the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) being satisfied. By transmitting the start command, it is determined whether or not the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is exhausted (step S1310). If it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is before it is consumed (NO), based on the area occupation pattern determined in step S1306, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Among the display areas, the area corresponding to the remaining number of holds until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is determined as the area where the notice effect appears, and the type of the notice effect that appears in that area is determined. A notice effect pattern determination table (not shown) used for determining the set notice effect pattern is selected. In this notice effect pattern, one or more kinds of notice effects are set so that the area determined as the area occupation pattern can be occupied. Then, based on the area determined as the area occupation pattern and the type of variation pattern regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect, the notice effect pattern determination table is selected, and the selected notice effect pattern determination table is selected. Are compared with the random number for determining the notice effect pattern read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of notice effect (notice effect pattern) for occupying the area determined as the area occupation pattern is determined (step S1311). Here, before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is completed, the change start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, so that the decoration is made based on the change pattern of “normal change”. While the variable display of the symbols is executed, the type of the notice effect determined in step S1311 appears in part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Thus, the effect is executed (step S1312).

  The notice effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and as a table corresponding to the area determined as the area occupation pattern, the notice effect pattern that sets the type of the notice effect that appears in the area is set. It is a table used for determining. Specifically, a table in which a notice effect that can occupy area A is set as a notice effect pattern determination table used when a notice effect appears in area A of the display area of main liquid crystal display device 1600. And a table in which a notice effect that can occupy the area B is set as a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A table in which a notice effect that can occupy the area C is provided as a notice effect pattern determination table that is provided when a notice effect appears in the area C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The notice effect pattern used when the notice effect appears in the area D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 As a decision table, announcement attraction that can be occupied it is set tables is provided a region D.

  Further, when the notice effect appears across a plurality of areas such as area A and area B in the display area of main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect that can occupy both area A and area B. In addition, a notice effect pattern determination table in which a combination of a notice effect that can occupy the area A and a notice effect that can occupy the area B is provided. In other words, the notice effect at the time of execution of the monochrome notice effect is only required to be able to occupy the area determined as the area occupation pattern, and may be a combination of the notice effect appearing across a plurality of areas or a plurality of notice effects. There may be.

  Here, when the monochrome notice effect is executed, the notice effect that can appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is the same as the main liquid crystal display other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed. It can appear in a part or all of the display area of the device 1600. In this way, at the time other than the execution of the monochrome announcement effect, it is determined whether to execute each of the plurality of types of the announcement effect based on the variation pattern of whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not the reach effect is executed. Therefore, depending on the type of the notice effect, there are a notice effect with a high expectation that will be a big hit and a notice effect with a low expectation that will be a big hit. You will be able to raise your expectations.

  When determining the type of the notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 when the monochrome notice effect is executed, the notice with a low expectation that is a big hit other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed is determined. The production is determined with a high probability. As a result, even when a notice effect with a low expectation level that becomes a big hit appears, except when the monochrome notice effect is executed, the expectation that becomes a big hit cannot be increased, but a notice effect with a low expectation level that becomes a big hit has appeared. Later, when the appearing notice effect changes from color to monochrome (black and white), it is possible to determine that it is being executed as part of the monochrome notice effect rather than just the notice effect, Even if a low notice effect appears, the expectation that the monochrome notice effect will be executed can be increased.

  When determining the type of the notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 when executing the monochrome notice effect, the change pattern regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is: Depending on whether it is a variation pattern of "normal variation" or a variation pattern of "reach variation", the probability of determining a highly anticipated notice effect that is a big hit other than when executing a monochrome notice effect is different. I have to. Specifically, when the change pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is a “reach change” change pattern, the monochrome notice effect is executed more than when it is a “normal change” change pattern. A highly promising notice effect that is a big hit at times other than the time is determined with a high probability. As described above, when the change pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is the change pattern of “reach change”, since the black and white mode is entered, After the appearance of a high notice effect, when the notice effect that has appeared changes from color to monochrome (black and white), there is a higher probability of entering the monochrome mode as a result of the monochrome notice effect, and the expectation to enter that monochrome mode Can be raised.

  Further, when executing the monochrome notice effect, when determining the type of the notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311, the fluctuation pattern regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is “ Depending on whether the variation pattern of “reach variation” is a variation pattern that executes a reach production with a high expectation level that is a big hit or a variation pattern that executes a reach production that has a low expectation level that is a big hit, The probabilities of determining a highly anticipated notice effect that is a big hit other than when the notice effect is performed are made different. Specifically, when the change pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is a change pattern that executes a reach effect with a high degree of expectation that is a big hit among the change patterns of “reach change” (for example, Pre-judgment information includes “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”, “reach 1” to “reach 4” “big hit 3”, “big hit 4”, “big hit 7”, “big hit 8”, “big hit 11”, (When it is specified that it is classified as “big hit 12”, “reach 3”, or “reach 4”), when it is a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with a low expectation level that is a big hit ( For example, among the “big hit 1” to “big hit 12” and “reach 1” to “reach 4” as the prior determination information, “big hit 1”, “big hit 2”, “big hit 5”, “big hit 6”, “big hit 9” ","Big If it is specified that it is classified as one of “Reach 10”, “Reach 1”, or “Reach 2”), a notice effect with a high expectation that is a big hit other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed The decision is made with high probability. For this reason, when the black-and-white mode is entered by changing the high-expected announcement effect that is a big hit from color to monochrome (black and white), the high-expected announcement effect that is a big hit is changed from color to monochrome (black and white) The probability of executing a reach effect with a high expectation level that becomes a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than when the black and white mode is entered by changing, and the expectation of big hit can be increased.

  Note that when determining the type of the notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 when the monochrome notice effect is executed, the lottery result regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is a big hit. Depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss, a highly promising notice effect that is a big hit other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed The probabilities of determining may be different. Specifically, when the lottery result regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is a big hit, the notice effect with a high expectation that will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed, rather than when it is a loss May be determined with a high probability. Even in such a case, when the black-and-white mode is entered by changing from a color to monochrome (black and white), a high-expected announcement effect that is a big hit, a high-expected announcement effect that is a big hit is changed from color to monochrome. By changing to (monochrome), the probability of a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than when the black and white mode is entered, and the expectation of a big hit can be increased.

  In addition, a step-up notice effect can be used as the notice effect that appears in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 when the monochrome notice effect is executed. A step-up notice effect is an effect image corresponding to each of a plurality of stages. From the first stage of the plurality of stages based on a variation pattern of whether or not a big hit or whether or not a reach effect is executed. This is an effect in which effect images corresponding to a predetermined stage appear sequentially. Further, the step-up notice effect is set such that the higher the predetermined level, the higher the degree of expectation that will be a big hit. The effect image corresponding to the first stage, the effect image corresponding to the second stage, the effect image corresponding to the third stage, and the effect image corresponding to the fourth stage of the plurality of stages, for example, a main liquid crystal display Appearing in the area A, area B, area C, and area D of the display area of the device 1600, and as the step-up notice effect stage progresses, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the notice effect. Try to increase the area.

  In the case of using the above step-up notice effect, an effect image corresponding to the first stage, an effect image corresponding to the second stage, an effect image corresponding to the third stage, and a fourth stage among a plurality of stages For example, each of the produced effect images appears in region A, region A, B, region A, B, C, region A, B, C, D in the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and step up When the stage of the notice effect progresses, the effect image is displayed in an area larger than the area before the stage progresses, so that the area occupied by the notice effect increases in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It may be. In addition, when the first stage of the step-up notice effect is started, the effect image appears in the area A of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and from the area A to the area B when the process proceeds to the second stage. When the effect image is enlarged and proceeds to the third stage, the effect image is enlarged from the areas A and B to the area C, and when the effect proceeds to the fourth stage, the effect image is extended to the areas A, B, C, and D. When the step of the notice effect is advanced, the area occupied by the notice effect is increased in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by expanding the area in which the effect image of the notice effect is displayed. You may make it do. Further, when the area occupied by the notice effect does not increase in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in spite of the progress of the step-up notice effect, the probability of a big hit is increased. It is possible to focus attention not only on whether or not the stage of the notice effect progresses but also on whether or not the area occupied by the notice effect increases.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is digested (YES), before the hold that triggers the execution of the monochrome notice effect is digested, the main When all of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome notice effect, an effect of entering the monochrome mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. When a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not occupied by the monochrome notice effect (a monochrome notice effect), the main liquid crystal display device does not enter the monochrome mode. An effect is performed in which the background image in the display area 1600 is set as a color and the background image in the normal state is maintained (step S1313). If it is determined that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is exhausted, the monochrome notice execution flag is reset and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1314).

  As described above, when the black and white mode is entered at the time of the suspension of the monochrome warning effect, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set to monochrome and the black and white mode is entered. If there is no color, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is colored as in the normal background image (except for the monochrome mode), and the number of colors of the background image is different. As described above, when entering the monochrome mode by executing the monochrome notice effect, the reach is always formed as the decorative display variation display in the monochrome mode, and the reach effect is executed, which is a big hit. Although it can raise expectations, the background image becomes monochrome, and the number of colors of the background image is less than usual, so it can give the player a different impression than usual and it will be a big hit Expectation can be raised together with expectation. In addition, when entering the monochrome mode, the background image becomes monochrome, but on the front of the background image, as usual, it is necessary to make the decorative pattern change display and appear after entering the monochrome mode. By displaying the image of the notice effect that can be displayed in color, it is possible to make the images related to the lottery results stand out from the background image. In other words, when entering the black and white mode, by making it easier for the player to recognize the images related to the lottery results, when the decorative design change display or the notice effect image appears, the image of the notice effect is displayed. On the other hand, the player can be focused more than usual. On the other hand, when the black and white mode is not entered, the reach is not formed as the decorative symbol variation display (the reach effect is not executed), and the expectation of a big hit cannot be increased. For this reason, if the black-and-white mode is not entered, it is not possible to expect a fluctuating display of the decorative design, and since there is a low probability that the image of the notice effect will appear, the expectation effect cannot be expected. It becomes color, and the number of colors of the background image is larger than in black and white mode, so even if the image of the notice effect does not appear, it can give a lively impression to the player and the expectation that it will be a big hit Can be reduced.

  A specific example of the monochrome notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. In FIG. 287 and FIG. 288, the fluctuation pattern of the “reach fluctuation” variation pattern for the suspension added when the number of suspensions is 2 (the suspension that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect) is added. (As a prior determination information, it is classified into any one of “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”, “reach 1” to “reach 4”), and the area occupation pattern determination table at 2 o'clock shown in FIG. A case where the area occupation pattern 15 is determined will be described. In the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold, while the first hold that has already been held is used up, a notice effect is provided in areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is set to appear, and a notice effect is set to appear in the areas C and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while the second hold that has been put on hold is consumed. Yes.

  First, as shown in FIG. 287 (A), when a hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is 2, the first hold already held is digested. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Then, during the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 287 (B), an area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed based on the area occupation pattern 15 of the area occupation pattern determination table at 2 o'clock. A notice effect straddling A and B appears. Specifically, as a notice effect extending over the areas A and B, an effect is performed in which a mahjong character throws away the mahjong tile and shouts “How is this!”. At this time, during the execution of the notice effect straddling the areas A and B, as shown in FIG. 287 (C), an effect (specific effect) in which a mahjong dot stick is inserted into the appearing notice effect. By doing this, the notice effect that appears is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As a result, the monochrome notice effect continues to occupy the areas A and B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As shown in FIG. 287 (D), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol “153”). With respect to the decorative symbol variation display, maintaining the hue of the color prevents the variation variation of the decoration symbol from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

  Next, before the next variation display of decorative symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 287 (E), a character “black and white chance!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The display is made in a small and light and shaded manner, and mahjong dot bars appear on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the notice effect over the areas A and B is simply It is possible to recognize that the execution of the monochrome notice effect has been started instead of the notice effect (notice effect other than the monochrome notice effect).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (F), when the next hold (the second hold already held when the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is added) is digested, In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol variation display is started again. At this time, the mahjong dotted bars appearing on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are scattered outside the display area. Then, during the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 287 (G), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is based on the area occupation pattern 15 of the area occupation pattern determination table at 2 o'clock. A notice effect straddling C and D appears. Specifically, as a notice effect that spans the regions C and D, an effect that a person who is playing mahjong shouts “I can win!” While looking at the mahjong tiles is executed. At this time, during the execution of the notice effect straddling the areas C and D, as shown in FIG. 287 (H), an effect (specific effect) in which a mahjong dot stick sticks into the appearing notice effect. By doing this, the notice effect that appears is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As described above, the monochrome notice effect occupies not only the areas A and B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 but also the areas C and D, so that all the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are displayed. The area will be occupied by a monochrome notice effect. Note that in the case of a monochrome notice effect, a dotted bar does not pierce the notice effect appearing across the areas C and D, and a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is not occupied by the monochrome notice effect, so that the monochrome mode cannot be entered.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (I), the characters “black and white mode standby” are displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, thereby entering the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome notice effect. It can be recognized that there is a notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 288 (J), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol “153”). After that, before the next variation display of the decorative symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 288 (K), the characters “monochrome mode entry” are displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By displaying the image in a large and shaded manner, it is possible to clearly recognize that the black and white mode is entered as a result of the monochrome notice effect in the next variation display of decorative symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (L), the next holding (holding that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect) is digested, so that the decorative display of variable display is displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Will start again. At this time, when the black and white mode is entered into the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the background image becomes monochrome, and an impression different from the color that is a normal background image other than the black and white mode is given. Envy people's expectations. Then, when the black and white mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 288 (M), based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. Since the reach (in this example, the symbol “7”) is formed as the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the reach effect is executed after that, the expectation of a big hit can be increased. If the lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol change display is stopped at the big win symbol (in this example, the middle symbol of “7”), and if the lottery result is lost, the decorative symbol change The display stops at a lost symbol (in this example, a middle symbol other than “7”).

  Before and after the mahjong dot stick pierces the notice effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). ), And the image itself such as the character depicted as the notice effect is not changed. Data for designating the coordinate position of the drawing in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and data for designating the color scheme of the drawing are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, data designating the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be used in common, and an increase in the amount of data stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  Further, when a mahjong dot stick pierces a notice effect that appears in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the monochrome notice effect occupies that area, the main notice The ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome notice effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be indicated. For example, when the monochrome notice effect occupies the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 (may be the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600). Is displayed as “50%” as the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome notice effect, the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome notice effect or the ratio of the remaining area that the monochrome notice effect must occupy Can be clearly recognized. In addition, when displaying the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome notice effect in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the monochrome notice effect occupies a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In such a case, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be noticed, and the process until the monochrome notice effect occupies the player. Can be seen with confidence.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the decorative symbol variation display that has entered the monochrome mode as a result of the monochrome notice effect is the target of the monochrome mode, and when the decorative symbol variation display that has entered the monochrome mode has ended. The black and white mode is also terminated, but the monochrome mode is continued not only for the decorative display of the decorative pattern that entered the black and white mode, but also for the multiple displays of the decorative pattern after entering the black and white mode. May be. For example, even when the suspension is interrupted, the black and white mode may be continued until a plurality of decorative symbol change displays are performed. In this way, when the monochrome mode is continued over a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays after entering the monochrome mode, even if the big hit is not obtained in the variation display of the ornament symbols entering the monochrome mode, The expectation of a big hit can be maintained by continuing the black and white mode even in the display of fluctuating decorative symbols after the next time.

  In the above description, when the monochrome notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the black and white mode is entered from the start of the next decorative pattern variation display. Not limited. For example, a monochrome notice effect is executed in a single or a plurality of fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and at the timing when the monochrome notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, that is, a monochrome notice effect. By entering the black-and-white mode within the display of the decorative pattern when the occupies the black and white, and when entering the black-and-white mode, a reach is formed within the decorative display of the decorative pattern. The expectation that becomes a big hit can be raised even for the display of the decorative symbols that change when the previous notice effect is occupied. Further, for example, out of the notice effects that can appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation level for the big hit (the big hit expectation degree) is high, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 ( When a specific high-expected notice effect displayed on the entire screen) appears, when a mahjong dot stick pierces the specific high-expected notice effect, all areas of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are displayed. By entering the monochrome mode by being occupied by the monochrome notice effect, it is possible to increase the expectation to enter the monochrome mode even when the hold is not stored.

  Although the present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to the priority display, but the maximum eight variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are put on hold are displayed in the order in which the hold is generated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine of a type that starts with (the order in which start winnings are given to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1180 Function display unit 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2100 Attacker device 2101 First starting port 2101a Always winning port 2101b Special winning port 2102 Second starting port 2111 Movable piece 2301 Universal map 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board

Claims (1)

First display means for displaying the first symbol information;
A first lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of the first start condition after the first start condition is established;
When the winning lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the first symbol information is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation period, and then the first lottery means in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. First display control means for stopping and displaying one symbol information;
Second display means for displaying second symbol information;
A second lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the second start condition being satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied;
When the winning lottery is performed by the second lottery means, the second symbol information is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation period, and then the second lottery means in a manner according to the lottery result of the second lottery means. 2nd display control means for stopping and displaying 2 symbol information;
The second graphic displayed by the second display control means as a trigger when the first display control means causes the winning mode to be stopped and displayed as a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. A shortening control means for changing the information fluctuation period to a shortened fluctuation period shorter than normal,
In the case where the first display control means displays the first symbol information in a variable manner and stops the winning mode as a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery unit, at least the first variable period and the first The first symbol information is variably displayed over any one of a plurality of fluctuation periods including a second fluctuation period shorter than the fluctuation period,
The shortening control unit is configured to control the second display control over the first variation period and the second variation period of the first symbol information variably displayed by the first display control unit. A gaming machine, wherein a variation period of the second symbol information variably displayed by the means is changed to the shortened variation period.